construction of school building at lotus petal charitable ...

Construction of School for Lotus Petal Charitable Foundation at DHUNELA, Haryana

……………………………………………. ……………………………………………. Tenderer (Sign and Seal) Employer (Sign and Seal)

of 173

CONSTRUCTION OF

SCHOOL BUILDING AT

LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION DHUNELA CAMPUS, HARYANA

TENDER DOCUMENT & DRAWINGS FOR

Building Works Package: Civil and PHE works

Internal Electrical Works

Architects SHIV MARWAHA AND ASSOCIATES

Please fill in before submission Tender Copy Number: LPCF/2020-21/_____/______ (Ex.: ABC/02-1995)

Tender number filling format: (First 3 letter of your organization name)/ Year of establishment – mm-yyyy)

Issued to: ___________________________ (Organization Name)

Issue Date: ___________________________ (Date of download)

Submission Date: __________________________ (Date of upload)



of 173

Contents TENDER NOTICE ............................................................................................................... 3

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS .................................................................................... 4

LETTER SUBMITTING TENDER ...................................................................................... 6

ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT............................................................................................. 7

SCHEDULE OF.................................................................................................................... 9

FISCAL ASPECTS OF CONTRACT ................................................................................... 9

SPECIAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................................... 11

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ........................................................................................ 15

PROPOSED BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................... 42

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................. 44

PREAMBLES TO WORK SECTIONS UNDER BILL OF QUANTITIES ....................... 169

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES ........................................................................................ 172



of 173

TENDER NOTICE To: Name of the contractor: _________________________ Address of the company: ________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Dear Sir, Sub: Construction of school at LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION, DHUNELA Campus,

Sohna, Gurgaon, Haryana

You are requested to submit your tender for the above-mentioned work(s) for which schedule of quantities, specifications, special conditions, conditions of contract, Tender Drawings are available on the site/ Office. E-tenders should be uploaded on or before November 20, 2020 by 6.00 pm

Please note that LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION reserves the right to accept/reject any or all the tenders without assigning any reason thereof. Yours truly, Kushal Raj Chakravorty Managing Trustee LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION Signed copy is also to be send through courier. _________________________ (Signature) _________________________ (Name of the contractor) _________________________ (Date)



of 173

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS 1. After uploading the quotations as per defined timelines, all the uploaded documents are to signed

and stamped with company stamp and sent to us through courier. The sealed cover should have on top the following

“PRIVATE AND CONFIDENTIAL” To: Mr. Rakesh Jetli Gali No. 5, Plot No. 3, Village Silokhra South City 1 Market, Gurgaon – 122002 Haryana, India From: Tenderer’s name and Address Address

2. The Tender must be filled in English and all entries must be complete in all respects.

3. All the Tenders are to be also sent by post or by courier services. The Tenderer shall ensure that

the Tenders are posted or dispatched sufficiently early so that the Tenders reach the place of submission within the stipulated time. Delays due to postal delivery will not be considered as valid reason for accepting the Tenders beyond the stipulated time. The Tenderer shall also return all tender drawings duly endorsing for having examined the drawings, along with the filled-in Tender document.

4. It is discouraged to add, amend or modify the conditions of Contract by the Tenderer. The Tenderer

is expected to accept the various provisions and conditions in the Tender.

5. Any unauthorized alteration or amendment made to the Tender documents shall be deemed to have no effect (unless authorized in writing by the Trust (LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION) ) and the original text shall be adhered to. All Tenderers must sign and affix their seal on all pages of the tender documents including drawings.

6. The Tenderers are to treat this Tender as strictly confidential and not to communicate their prices to a third party nor reveal anything about it to the public or the press.

7. Quotes submitted by post, should also have the amount written in words. In case of discrepancy between the price quoted in figure and words, the price quoted in words shall prevail for the correct amount. All errors and corrections made while filling the Tender must be attested by Tenderer and stamped. Overwriting of figures is not permitted. Failure on these stipulations will render the Tender as invalid and the Engineer / shall reserve the right to accept such Tender or not.

8. The Tender shall remain valid and open for acceptance for the period of 120 (One hundred twenty) days from the Last Tender submission date. Prior to this expiry date the Trust may by written notice request the tenderer to extend the validity period. The tenderer may refuse the request, but shall not modify his Tender other than by extending its validity.

9. In addition to those items listed elsewhere in the Tender documents, the Tenderer is to submit the following:



of 173

a. A proposed works schedules preferably using MS Project to complete the project within

the duration given in the Tender, giving a breakdown on the various activities scheduled for the project including temporary works planning.

b. Organization Chart with full resume of all personnel working for the project and also a record of past relevant working experience.

c. Methods statement and a list of resource allocation for the various activities as stated in item (a) above.

d. Information with regard to the availability of major plant and equipment. e. Attested copies of the latest income tax and GST clearance certificate f. Details of work(s) currently under execution g. Details of similar Work(s) executed (at least 1 project of similar value, or two projects

of 75% value, or four projects of 50% value are mandatory) h. Details of educational / institutional projects executed i. Details of any current litigations j. QA/QC Procedure k. List of repeat projects and repeat clients in past 5 years with contact numbers

10. Tender submitted on behalf of a firm shall be signed by all Partners of the firm or by a partner who

has the necessary authority on behalf of the firm to enter into the proposed contract. Attested copy of such proof is to be submitted along with Tender; otherwise the Tender may be rejected by the Trust.

11. Any individual tenderer or member of a consortium cannot be member in another consortium and if that individual tenderer or member of a consortium is already a member in some other consortium, then it has to withdraw from that consortium to participate in this tender.

12. The tenderer is advised to visit and examine the Site, its surrounding and other parts of the location,

and must obtain for himself on his own responsibility all information which may be necessary for preparing the Tender and entering into a Contract at its own cost

13. The Trust shall not be bound by any oral representations which may be made during a joint site visit, whether by the Engineer personnel or by others; and whether during a formal meeting or otherwise. In order to minimize the possibility of misunderstanding, tenderer should present any request for clarification submit in writing to the Trust as soon as practicable.

14. Successful tenderer(s) only will be informed of the result of our evaluation. It should be noted

however that Trust will not be obliged to discuss any aspect of the evaluation process or declare the result of evaluation.

15. The Trust shall in any event not be liable for special, indirect, punitive or consequential loss or

damage of any kind whatsoever (including but not limited to lost profits), whether or not foreseeable, to any tenderer during this process



of 173

LETTER SUBMITTING TENDER LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION, Gurgaon, Haryana Subject: Construction of School Building at LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION, DUNELA Campus. Dear Sir/ Madam, With reference to the tender invited by you for the construction of above-mentioned building, I/ we do hereby offer to execute the works under contract at the respective rates mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities. I /We have examined the Drawings, seen the site, and read the articles of agreement, conditions, specifications and special clauses- forming part of the schedule of quantities. I/We agree to finish the whole of the works within time (as mentioned in the Fiscal Aspects) from the date of getting possession of the site or order to start work. I/We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender that you may receive.

We undertake to complete the whole Works as per the scope of Works mentioned in the Appendix to Tender, within the duration as specified in the Fiscal Aspects, including Sundays, Public Holidays, rest days and monsoon, but excluding the Defects Liability Period or any extended time which may be authorized under the Conditions of Contract”.

We agree to abide by this Tender for the period of ______________ days (in words), _________days (in numbers) from the date fixed for receiving the same and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.

In the event of your acceptance of this Tender, we undertake to execute with you a formal Agreement embodying all the conditions and terms contained in this offer and until such execution, the conditions and terms contained in this offer shall constitute a binding contract between us.

We agree that should any discrepancy occur between the Amounts written in Words and in Figures entered upon the Form of Tender, the amount written in words will be considered as correct one.

I/we have the following observations on drawings, document, site and quantities.

…………………………………………………………….

…………………………………………………………….

(Attach separate sheet if required)

Name of Partner of the firm / Authorised Signatory Yours faithfully, ……………………………………. Date : ……………………………. Place : Sign and stamp



of 173

ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT

Made at Gurgaon, this …………………day of ………………2020 Between……………………. ……………. (hereinafter referred to as the Trust which expression shall Include his heirs, Executors, Administrators & Assigns of the one part and ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. trading in the name & Style of ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. (hereinafter referred to as the “Tenderer” which expression shall include his heirs, Executors, Administrators & Assigns ) of the other part WHEAREAS the Trust is desirous of getting the Multi-purpose building constructed at DHUNELA campus site and has caused Drawings and Specifications describing the work to be done to be prepared by M/s SHIV MARWAHA & ASSOCIATES, Architects (hereinafter referred to as the Architects) and WHEREAS the Specifications and the Priced schedule of quantities have been signed by or on behalf of the parties hereto and WHEREAS the Tenderer has agreed to execute upon and subject to the conditions set forth herein (hereinafter referred to as the said Conditions”) and “the said Specification” and the said “Priced Schedule to Quantities” at the respective rates mentioned in the Priced Schedule of Quantities attached. NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS: (1) In consideration of the payments to be made to the Tenderer as hereinafter provided he shall

upon and subject to the Conditions execute and complete the works shown upon the drawings and instructions as may be furnished to him by the said Architects and described in the Specifications & Drawings within the time indicated in Letter Submitting Tender and elsewhere in this contract. In case of the specifications being silent on certain items, the CPWD specifications 2019 – Part 1&2 or the latest edition/ relevant IS Codes shall be used.

(2) The Trust shall pay the Tenderer such sums as shall become payable hereunder of the times

and in the manner specified in the said Conditions. (3) The term the ‘Architect’ in the said conditions shall mean the said M/s SHIV MARWAHA &

ASSOCIATES or in the event of their death or ceasing to be Architects for the purpose of this Contract such other person as shall be nominated for that purpose by the Trust , not being a person to whom the Tenderer shall object for reasons considered to be sufficient by the Trust , Provided always that no persons subsequently appointed to be Architects under this Contract shall be entitled of disregard or over rule any decision or approval or direction given or expressed in writing by the Architects for the time being.

(4) The Agreement and documents above mentioned shall form the basis of this Contract and the

decision of the said Architects for the time being as mentioned in the Conditions of contract in reference to all matters of dispute as to the material, workmanship or account and as to the intended interpretation of clauses of this Agreement or any other document attached hereto shall be final and binding on both parties and may be made a Rule of Court.

(5) The said Contract comprises the buildings above-mentioned and all subsidiary works

connected there within the same site as may be ordered to be done from time to time by the said Architects or the other Architects for the time being even though such works may not be shown on the Drawings or described in the said Specifications or the Priced Schedule of Quantities. The Tenderer shall, however, take due approval for any extra items prior to commencement of work.



of 173

(6) The Trust through the Architects reserves to himself the right of altering the drawing and nature of the work and of adding to or omitting any items of work or of having portion of the same carried out departmentally or otherwise and such alterations or variations shall be carried out without prejudice to the Contract.

(7) The said Conditions shall be read and construe part of this agreement and the parties hereto

will respectively abide by the Conditions and stipulations and execute the agreement on their parts respectively.

(8) All disputes arising out of or in any way connected with this Agreement shall be deemed to

have arisen in DHUNELA only the Courts in Gurgaon/ Haryana shall have jurisdiction to determine the same.

(9) The said conditions thereto and the following correspondences: ……………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………….. shall be read and construed as forming part of this agreement, and the parties hereto shall respectively abide by, submit themselves to the said conditions and perform the agreements on their part respectively in the said conditions contained.

(10) The Tenderer shall afford every reasonable facility to representatives of the said Trust for inspection, checking or otherwise to the site to enable to find out the actual carrying out of all works relating to the installation in the manner laid down in the said conditions, and shall make good any damages done to walls, floors, etc., after the completion of such works.

(11) Notwithstanding any provision of this contract to the contrary, the Tenderer shall not be entitled to use the name of Trust except by taking prior written permission of Trust.

(12) Time shall be considered as the essence of this Agreement and the Tenderer hereby agree to commence the work as stipulated in Letter of Acceptance and as provided for in the said conditions and to complete the entire work within the specified period.

(13) If the Tenderer shall fail to comply with any of his obligations hereunder or shall wound up his

business shall be dissolved or any receiver is appointed or any attachment is made in respect of any its properties or the Tenderer shall otherwise fail to neglect to complete the said job within the stipulated period, then or on the happening of any such event, the Trust shall be entitled to cancel this contract and to get the unfinished job done at the cost and risk of the Tenderer by a third party and if the Trust suffers any losses in this regard the Trust shall look to the Tenderer for the same viz. payment or reimbursement for such loss- The decision of the arbitrator/Engineer in regard to the quantum of such losses will be final and binding on parties hereto- Upon such termination of this contract, there shall be adjustment of any payments made to the Tenderer by the Trust and the Tenderer shall, if required by the Trust /arbitrator refund any such amounts to the Trust .

(14) The several parts of this Contract have been read by us and fully understood by us. As witness

on this …… Day of …………….2020, in the presence of ……………………………………………………………… …………..

……………… ……………………… Tenderer Trust Name Name Place Place Date Date



of 173

SCHEDULE OF FISCAL ASPECTS OF CONTRACT

Note: In event of any conflict in the Contract documents, this Schedule shall prevail

1. Date of Commencement: within 7days of Date of Placing Workorder or handing over site whichever is later

2. Date & Time of Completion: 9 months for PRATISHTHAN; 6 months each for

MULTIPURPOSE and KITCHEN from date of placement of work order for phase 1 of the project.

3. Defects Liability Period: 12 months from the completion date of the project 4. Liquidated Damages: Rs.5,000.00 per day upto 7 days of delay beyond

scheduled date of completion of each milestone stage. Rs.10,000.00 per day from 8th day upto 14th day of delay beyond scheduled date of completion of each milestone stage. Rs 20,000.00 per day beyond 15th day of delay beyond scheduled date of completion of each milestone stage Milestone stages shall be as per the bar chart submitted by the Tenderer and duly approved by the Trust. However, on reaching the next milestone stage in time, the recovered Liquidated Damages of previous stage shall be returned The maximum Liquidated Damages shall be 5% of the contract amount.

5. Mobilization Advance: 10% of the contract sum against bank guarantee,

recoverable on pro-rata basis from second bill onwards. The total mobilization advance shall stand recovered when the value of work done reaches 80% of the Contract Value

6. Bill Cycle: Gross Work done upto INR 25 lakhs or above.

Payment shall be released within 30 days through crossed cheque only, after submission of the bill with necessary documentation. Tenderer shall submit confirmation of receipt of payment to the Trust

7. Retention Money: 10% of value of work done will be recovered from

each RA bills as retention Money 8. Release of Retention Money: 50% Retention Money will be released after six

months of completion and handing over. Balance 50% after successful completion of Defects liability period 12 months from completion and handing over.

9. Extra Items / Deduction of items: The rates for extra items or deduction of items not

done shall be calculated in the following order of priority



of 173

a. Items for which rates have been quoted anywhere in this contract

b. Items for which rates can be calculated from other items that have been quoted anywhere in this contract.

c. As per DSR 2018+/- %age quoted over DSR-2018 by the Tenderer in this contract. Percentage to be quoted above or below DSR 2018 for additional items that cannot be calculated using items anywhere in this contract

d. As per Analysis of Rates worked out with cost of material, labour, Plant and Equipment and 15% overhead for Tenderers profit, plus all applicable taxes duly approved by the Trust

10. Secured Advance: 65% 0f value of the non-perishable material brought at site shall be paid against submission of invoices as material advance. The same shall be recovered from subsequent bill.



of 173

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Sealed tenders should be addressed to The Director, LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION, Dhunela, Haryana super scribed on cover “Tender for Construction of Proposed Multi-Purpose building at LOTUS PETAL CHARITABLE FOUNDATION, DHUNELA Campus, Haryana, must reach this office not later than 6.00 P.M. on date as specified in letter issuing Tender

1. No tender will be received after due date and time under any circumstances whatsoever.

2. Tender shall remain valid for a period of one hundred twenty days (120) days from the date of opening of the tender, The Trust may request for extension of the validity period in case the contract evaluations are not completed within the original validity period. No additional price tag would be allowed for this.

3. The Trust through the Architects does not bind itself to accept the lowest or any tender and

reserves its right to accept or reject any or all the tenders, in whole or in part without assigning any reasons for doing so.

4. Each page of the Tender Documents is required to be stamped & signed by the contactor or

any authorized persons before submitting the tender in token of his/their having acquainted himself/ themselves with the General Conditions of Contract, General Specifications, Special conditions, etc. as laid down. Any tender with any of the documents not so signed is liable to be rejected. The tender submitted on behalf of a firm shall be signed by all the partners of the firm or by a partner who has the necessary authority on behalf of the firm to enter into the proposed contract otherwise the tender is liable to be rejected.

5. The tender form must be filled in English and complete in all respects. If any of the documents

is missing, or unsigned, the tender will be considered invalid. The tenderer shall also submit along with his tender, a list mentioning the names of manufactures of specialized items like steel windows, patented water proofing, flush doors, floor tiles False ceilings etc. which he proposes to use in the work if his tender is accepted.

6. All erasures and alterations made after submitting the tenders online will automatically stands

void. While filling the tender must be attested by the Tenderer. Overwriting of figures is not permitted; failure to comply with either of the conditions will render the tender void. No advice of any change in rate or condition after the opening of the tender will be entertained.

7. Within ten (10) days of the receipt of intimation from the Trust, of the acceptance for his/ their

tender, the successful tenderer(s) shall be bound to implement the contract by signing an agreement in accordance with the draft agreement and the schedule of Conditions by the written acceptance. The conditions of the tender will constitute a binding agreement between the Trust and the person so tendering.

8. The successful tenderer(s) must not assign or sublet any portion of the contract except with the

written consent of the Project Head / Architect failing which the Architect may serve a notice in writing rescinding the contract whereupon the security deposit shall stand forfeited and at absolute disposal of the Trust.

9. The successful tenderer(s) shall carry out all RCC work strictly in accordance with drawings,

details and instructions of the Project Engineer /Architects. If in the opinion of the Project Engineer /Architects changes have to be made in R.C. C. design and they desire the successful tenderer(s) to carry out the same, the decision shall be final and shall not be open to arbitration.



of 173

10. A schedule of quantities in respect of such work and specification accompany these Special Conditions. The Schedule is liable to alterations omission or additions at the discretion of the Architect / Trust. Rates should be quoted in figures and words in column specified. No additional claim is admissible on account of increase or decrease in the quantum of work as desired by the Trust. The rates shall be applicable for any quantity of work with reasonable variation. In the event of more than 20% addition in the total quantum of work, the Trust retains the right to renegotiate the additional work with the tenderer or any other vendor whatsoever.

11. The rates quoted by successful tenderer(s) in the tender will be the correct basis and not the

amount worked out by them.

12. The rate quoted in words will be the correct basis and not the rate shown in figures.

13. The tenderer must obtain for himself on his own responsibility and at his own expense all the information which may be necessary for the purpose of making a tender and for entering into a contract and must examine the drawing and must consider and inspect the site of the work and acquaint himself with all local conditions means of access to the work, nature of the work and all matters appertaining thereto. It is presumed that the Tenderer has visited the site physically and verified the site conditions like existing levels, approaches, availability of water and electricity etc before quoting the prices in this tender and no claim whatsoever shall be entertained for the same.

14. The rates quoted in the tender shall include all charges for executing work at all heights and

lifts, centering materials water charges, electric charges, temporary plumbing, case of cisterns, hire for any tools and plants, sheds materials, marking out and clearing of site, watering concrete as mentioned in the specification. The rates quoted shall be deemed to be included for the finished work to be measured at site. Tenderer must include all taxes in their rates viz sales tax, excise duty, octroi and any other tax and duty, or other levy levied by the Central Government or any State Government of Local Authority, applicable on the date of receipt of tenders excepting service tax that shall be payable as per government rules. No, claim in respect of Sales Tax, Excise Duty, Octroi or other tax, Duty or levy shall be entertained by the Trust. However, in case of levy of any tax after the date of tendering by way of govt. order, it would be financially adjusted.

15. Time shall be considered as the essence of the Contract. The entire work must be completed

in time specified in fiscal aspects. It is intended that the general works should be so completed as to leave that last three (3) months for installations and finishing items. The successful tenderer(s) shall before commencing work prepare a detailed work program that shall be approved by the Architect and Trust. Tenderer shall at his own cost employ a project manager who would ensure that project moves at the desired pace. He would be assisted by necessary qualified and experienced engineering staff (to be approved by the architect and the Trust). The successful bidder shall hand over the ground floor section of one month before the final handing over of the complete building.

16. The successful tenderer(s) shall not be entitled to any compensation for any loss suffered by

him on account of delays in commencing or executing the work whatever the cause of delays may be, including delays arising out of modification to the work entrusted to him or any sub-contracts there with or delays in awarding contracts for other trades of the project or in Commencement or completion of such works or in procuring government controlled or other building materials or obtaining water and power connection for construction purposes or for any other reason whatsoever and the Trust shall not be liable for claim in respect thereof the Trust does not accept liability for any sum besides the tender amount subject only to such variations as may be provided for herein.



of 173

17. The successful tenderer(s) are bound to carry out any items of work necessary for the completion of job and handover the building in completely operational stage

18. If the Headquarters of successful tenderer(s) are elsewhere than Gurgaon, then he shall have a duly authorized Agent/ office in Gurgaon from the commencement of the work until the building is occupied by the Trust. Such agent shall be authorized to act on behalf of the successful tenderer to accept service of notice of contract and to agree to extras, omissions and variations of works and rates for the same. Such Agent shall maintain on his staff two qualified engineers (One with Civil Engineering Degree and one with Civil Engineering Diploma) approved by the Trust and such office personnel as may be required for the efficient execution of work. Any notice under the contract shall be deemed to have been served on the successful tenderer if served upon such agent of sent by registered letter to his address. Such agent shall not be changed and shall not leave during the duration of the contract, unless the consent of the Trust shall have been previously obtained. If the Architects shall order to tenderer to carry out any rectifications under the terms of the contract after the building is completed, the successful tenderer shall have to carry out the same or through another duly authorized agent.

19. The successful tenderer must co-operate with the other Tenderers appointed by the Trust, in

the same premises, so that the work shall proceed smoothly with least possible delay and to the satisfaction of the Architects.

20. The successful tenderer(s) shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water for his

labour as well as for construction purpose and all charges for water shall be borne by him. The water shall conform to the relevant IS codes for drinking and construction purposes.

21. The successful tenderer(s) shall have to make his own arrangements to obtain power

connections and maintain, at his own expense. The successful tenderer(s) would bear the charges for the power consumed. The Trust s shall give all possible assistance to the successful tenderer(s) to obtain the requisite permission from the various authorities, but the responsibility for obtaining the same will be that of the successful tenderer(s) at his cost. However, the delay in obtaining power connections from electricity Board should not affect agreed time schedule. The alternate arrangement with DG of adequate capacity is to be arrange by the tenderer in case of Non-availability of power supply and/or water from whatever source shall not entail any additional claims or extension of contract period on this account.

22. If power is supplied from existing connection, the necessary connection charges as well as the

charges for consumption of electricity will have to be borne by the successful tenderer(s). NOC of the power and water service provider shall be obtained & deposited with the Trust before finalizing the final payments.

23. The Earnest money of the successful tenderer(s) will be forfeited if he fails to comply with any

or the conditions of the contract. 24. The successful tenderer(s) will provide a working schedule indicating important milestones for

monitoring the project within one (1) week of placement of work order to be approved by Trust. The program should be prepared on MS Project software / MS Excel

25. The successful bidder shall indemnify the Trust against any claims from any of the sub

Tenderers, labour, suppliers etc. The Tenderer shall be solely responsible for the safety and security of the manpower at site.



of 173

26. The contractor shall supply to the Project Engineer, colored pictures of good quality (soft copy either by email or by CD) of site progress of such portions of the work in progress or completed works every month end or along with each running bill or as directed by Project Engineer. The photographs shall become the property of the Trust. No photographs should be supplied to any persons without the authority of the Project Engineer. All photographs to be taken from a digital camera. The photographs may be upto 20-30 nos per month as required by the Project Engineer. In case the Tenderer fails to provide photographs as described above, suitable penalty from each running bill shall be recovered from the running bills as decided by the Trust.



of 173

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

1. Definitions: In the Contract following words and expressions shall have meanings hereby assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires

1.1. The Contract documents consist of the notice inviting tenders, the Agreement between the

Owner and the Tenderer, the General Conditions of Contract, Specifications, the Drawings, Schedule of Quantities, Scope of work, Preambles to Work and relevant correspondence including all modifications thereof incorporated in the documents before their execution.

1.2. "Owner / Employer/ Trust / Client” means LOTUS PETAL FOUNDATION,(Address : Gali

No. 5, Plot No. 3, Village Silokhra, South City – 1 Market, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India) on whose behalf tenders are invited and includes its successors, assigns and legal and authorized representatives.

1.3. "Tenderer” means the person, firm or company whether incorporated or not, employed as

Tenderer by the Trust for undertaking the works and shall include the Tenderer's legal and authorized representatives, successors and permitted assigns.

1.4. "Sub-Tenderer" means the person, firm or company to whom any part of the Contract has

been sublet by the Tenderer with the written consent of the Trust and includes the Sub-Tenderer's legal and authorized representatives, successors and permitted assigns.

1.5. "Nominated Sub-Tenderer" refers to those specialists, tradesmen and others, nominated by

the Architect for executing special works or supplying special equipment or materials, for which provisional sums are included in the Contracts. Such agencies shall be deemed to have been employed by the Tenderer.

1.6. "Architect" means Shiv Marwaha & Associates, (Address: 919, Emerald Plaza, Sector 65,

Gurgaon) such other person, firm or Company as the Client may nominate for the purpose. 1.7. “Representative" means any person authorized by the Owner to act on its behalf. 1.8. “Project Manager" means as person(s) authorized by the Owner to act on its behalf.

Hereafter referred as Project Engineer. 1.9. "Contract Sum" means Sum calculated from Bill of Quantities. 1.10. "Work" means the work to be executed in accordance with the Contract. 1.11. "Constructional Plant" means all plant, tools, tackles, appliances or equipment, implements,

scaffolding of whatever nature required for the execution of the works but does not include materials, equipment or other things intended to form part of the works.

1.12. "Temporary Works" means all temporary works of every kind required for the execution of

the works by the Tenderer. 1.13. "Specification" means the specifications annexed to or issued with the tender and any

modifications thereof or additions thereto as may from time to time be furnished or approved in writing by the Authorized Representative.



of 173

1.14. “Drawings" means the drawings referred to in the specifications and any modifications of such drawings or such other drawings as may be from time to time be furnished or approved in writing by the Owner/Architect.

1.15. "Site" means the lands and other places on, under, in or through which the works are to be

executed or carried out and any other lands or places provided by the Owner or used for the purpose of the Contract.

1.16. "Approved" means approved in writing including subsequent written confirmation of previous

verbal approval. 1.17. "Force Majeure" are risks due to riots (otherwise than among Tenderer's employees) and

civil commotion (in so far as both these are uninsurable), war (whether declared or not), invasion, act of foreign enemies, hostilities, civil war, rebellion, insurrection, military or usurped power, an act of Government, an act of God, such as lightening, unprecedented floods, tornado, and damage from aircraft.

1.18. "Writing" means any manuscripts, typewritten or printed statement under or over signature

and/ or seal as the case may be. 1.19. "Written Notice" shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the

individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, of if delivered at and a written delivery receipt obtained or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to him, who gives the notice.

1.20. "Month" means English Calendar month. "Day" shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours each. 1.21. "Working Day" shall mean any day from Monday to Saturday (both days inclusive) excluding

all Public Holidays as notified by the Central Government 1.22. "Completion" shall mean that the works have been completed in every respect in conformity

with the Contract Documents and are ready and fit for occupation/ commissioning 1.23. "Completion Date" means the scheduled date for completion of the Works as set forth in the

Agreement between the Client and Tenderer, as the same may be extended pursuant to the provisions under General Conditions of contract.

2. Singular and Plural: Words importing singular number shall also include plural and vice versa

where the context so requires.

3. Headings and Marginal Notes: The headings and marginal notes in these conditions are for the purpose of facilitating reference and shall not be deemed to be part thereof or taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

4. Language:

4.1. All documentation and correspondence in respect of this Contract shall be in the English

language.

5. Scope and Intent

5.1. The general character and the scope of work is illustrated and defined by the signed Contract Documents herewith attached



of 173

5.2. The Tenderer shall carry out and complete the said work in every respect in accordance with the Contract, and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architect.

5.3. The Contract documents are complimentary and cumulative, and what is called for by and one

shall be binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor and materials, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work (excepting those materials and equipment listed separately which are supplied by the Owner, if any). Materials of Work described in words which so applied have well known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards as applicable.

5.4. The Owner/Trust may, from time to time and through the appointed Architect, issue further

supplementary drawings and/or written instructions, details and directions and explanations, which are collectively referred to as Architect Instructions. The Tenderer shall forthwith comply with and duly execute works comprised in such Owner/Architect’s instructions provided always that verbal instruction, directions and explanations given to the Tenderer or his work’s representative by the Owner/Architect shall, if involving a variation, be confirmed in writing.

5.5. The Owner reserves the right to increase/decrease the scope of work on any or all items or

change the nature of work involved in any or all items of the contract. The Tenderer shall have no claim for loss of anticipated profits or for any other reason whatsoever on account of these variations.

6. Project engineer The Project engineer who will be responsible for the day-to-day supervision of

the Contract shall represent the Owner at the site. He shall act under the instructions of the Owner. The Tenderer shall provide all necessary facilities for the performance of his duties.

7. Duties of Project engineer

7.1. The Project engineer shall carry out such duties in issuing decisions, certificates and orders as are specified in the Contract and such additional functions as are delegated to him by the Owner from time to time. The Project engineer shall coordinate, watch and supervise the works and examine and approve materials to be used or workmanship employed in connection with the Works.

7.2. Provided always that: 7.2.1. The Project engineer has full authority on behalf of the owner to reject any substandard

work or materials without any prejudice. 7.2.2. Except as otherwise provided in these documents, if the Tenderer is dissatisfied by

reason of any decision of the Project Engineer, arises due to ambiguity in specification and drawing, he shall be entitled to refer the matter to the Architect within 7 days of the receipt of such decision, who shall thereupon confirm or reverse such decision.

8. Assignment The Tenderer shall not assign the Contract or any part thereof, or any benefit or invest

or thereunder otherwise than by a charge in favour of Tenderer's bankers of any monies due or to become due under this Contract, without prior written consent of the Owner/ Architect.

9. Sub-letting: The Tenderer shall not sublet any part of the works without the prior written consent of the Owner/Architect, except as provided for in these conditions, which shall not be unreasonably, withheld. Such consent if given, shall not relieve the Tenderer from any liability or obligation under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and neglects of any Sub-Tenderer, his agents, servants or workmen as fully as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of the Tenderer, his agents, servants or workmen. Provision of labour on a piecework basis shall not be deemed to be sub-letting under this Clause.



of 173

10. Sub -Tenderers: As soon as practicable and before awarding any sub-contract, the Tenderer shall notify the Architect in writing the names of the sub-Tenderers proposed for the principal parts of the work as the Architect may direct Project engineer for his approval. The Tenderer shall not employ any sub-Tenderer to whom the Architect may object. In particular, sub-Tenderers for waterproofing, pest control, doors and windows, insulation and other specialist items shall be got approved well in advance.

11. Specialist Agencies: The Tenderer may entrust specialist items of work to the agencies

specialized in the specified trade. The Tenderer shall give the names and details of such firms whom he is going to employ for approval off the Trust. These details shall include the expertise, financial status, technical manpower, equipment, resources, and list of works executed and on hand of the specialist agency.

12. Tenderer's General Responsibilities

12.1. The Tenderer shall execute and maintain the works with due care and diligence and shall

provide all materials, labour including supervision thereof, constructional plant, temporary works, transport and all other things, whether of temporary or permanent nature, required for the proper execution and maintenance of the works.

12.2. The Tenderer shall execute the whole and every part of the Works in the most substantial

and workmanlike manner, both as regards materials and labour and otherwise in every respect in strict accordance with the specifications. The Tenderer shall conform exactly, fully and faithfully to the designs, drawings and instructions relating to the work, in writing.

12.3. Before commencing any item of work, the Tenderer shall co-relate all relevant

drawings and information and satisfy himself that the information available thereof is complete, unambiguous and without any discrepancies. The Tenderer shall be responsible for any errors in the execution of the works and/or damage caused due to any discrepancy in the Contract documents / drawings which was overlooked by the Tenderer and/or his Sub-Tenderer, and is not brought to the notice of the Trust.

12.4. Levels, dimensions and other information shown on the drawings are believed to be correct.

The Tenderer shall, however, verify them for himself and no claim or allowance whatsoever shall be entertained on account of any errors or omissions in the levels, dimensions, et cetera from those shown in the drawings.

DOCUMENT

13. Documents Mutually Explanatory The Contract documents are complimentary and cumulative

and what is called for by any one shall be binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labour and materials, equipment and transportation necessary for proper execution of the work (exempting those materials and equipment listed separately which are to be supplied by the Owner). Materials of work described in words which so applied have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards as applicable. Wherever silent, the CPWD specifications 2019 shall prevail

14. Discrepancies and Adjustments of Errors

14.1. In the case of discrepancies, the following order of precedence shall be followed

14.1.1. Drawings & Specific Details 14.1.2. Particular Specifications. 14.1.3. Scope of works



of 173

14.1.4. General specifications - specifications given in CPWD Specifications, 2019 or later.

14.2. In the event of ambiguities, discrepancies, the drawings and/or specifications, the Engineer / Architect shall explain the same and shall in his sole discretion, determine which of the requirements govern and/or clarify any such ambiguity or discrepancy and the Tenderer shall comply with such determination. In case of two or more type of specification available in the contract and drawings, the stringer and the costlier specification shall prevail.

14.3. All errors in extensions or computing the amounts and totaling shall be corrected. 14.4. The Tenderer shall not be entitled to any extension of time or any compensation due to

such determination. 14.5. The decision of the Construction Head / architect shall be final and binding in case of any

discrepancy.

15. Drawings

15.1. The drawings shall remain in the sole custody of the Trust. Two (2) copies of the Drawings shall be furnished to the Tenderer, free of charge.

15.2. One copy of the Contract Documents including drawings furnished to the Tenderer shall be kept at the site and the same shall, at all reasonable times, be available for inspection.

15.3. The Tenderer shall give written notice to the Project engineer and inform the

Owner/Architect, whenever planning or progress of the work is likely to be delayed or disrupted, unless the required drawings or order including a direction, instruction or approval is issued within reasonable time.

15.4. The Architect shall have full power and authority to supply to the Tenderer, from time to time;

during progress of the works such further drawings and instructions as shall be necessary for proper and adequate execution of the works through Trust.

16. Type of Contract: This is an item rate contract and the Tenderer shall be paid at the Contract

Rates for the actual quantity of work carried by him as measured, in accordance with the Contract documents and Drawings. The Contract shall have single package namely BUILDING WORKS PACKAGE (including civil, finishing, electrical and PHE works) as per the scope of work.

17. Variations in Price: Any items added or subtracted, or substituted / replaced shall be paid / deducted as mentioned in Fiscal Aspects of Contract

18. Licenses and Permits: License and permits for all materials under Government control shall be

obtained by the Tenderer directly. The Owner may assist the Tenderer in this respect to the extent possible. The Tenderer shall include in his tender all transport charges and other expenses that may be incurred in this connection

19. Royalties and Patent Rights: All royalties or other sums payable in respect of the supply and use

in carrying out the works as described by or referred to in the Contract drawings, the Contract Specifications and the Contract Schedule of Quantities of any patented articles, processes or inventions shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract sum, and the Tenderer shall indemnify the Owner against all claims, proceedings, damages, costs and expenses which may be brought or made against the Owner or to which he may be put by reason of the Tenderer infringing or being held to have infringed any patent rights to any such articles, processes and inventions.



of 173

20. Separate Contracts: The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the work. The Tenderer shall afford other Tenderers reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work and theirs. If any part of the Tenderer's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other Tenderer, the Tenderer shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other Tenderer's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work, except as to the defects which may develop in the other Tenderer's work after execution of the work. Owner/Architect reserves the right of allotting part works, from the main contract, to any other Tenderer at any stage if the Tenderer’s performance is not satisfactory.

21. Tenderer to prepare Sample: The Tenderer shall prepare samples/ mock-ups of all materials/

furniture including those specified by brand names for approval of the Architect. The Project Engineer / Architect will approve the samples/ mock-ups in writing before the Tenderer arranges bulk supplies. The cost of arranging/making of test samples/ mock-ups, cost of their packing and forwarding and testing charges shall be borne by the Tenderer.

22. Interest: Interest or any other charges shall not be payable on any money due to the Tenderer

against earnest money, security deposit, interim or final bills or any other payments due under this contract.

23. Work to Satisfaction of Owner/ Architect: The Tenderer shall execute and maintain the works in

strict accordance with the Contract to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall comply with and adhere strictly to the Architect instructions and directions on any matter whether mentioned in the Contract and not, touching or concerning the works. The Owner / Architect or his Project engineer’s decision relating to the use and quality of materials and visual and aesthetic effect shall be final and binding.

24. Program Evaluation and Review

24.1. Network based integrated time schedule shall be submitted by the Tenderer. The time

schedule shall include details of mobilization of resources, materials, equipment and labour. After award of Contract, the Project Engineer may require the Tenderer to expand the information given in the program until it is suitable for the effective review of progress during the execution of the works. The critical path shall be determined. It is the Tenderer's obligation to ensure that such a program, duly approved by the Architect is available prior to the commencement of work at site.

24.2. The Tenderer shall, every fortnight, review and update this program and furnish for the

information of the Project Engineer / Site Engineer, in writing, details of the Tenderer's arrangements for executing the works, materials procured, erected, balance at Site, and expected deliveries during the next fortnight; skilled/ unskilled labour, foremen, supervisors working at Site and steps proposed for speeding up progress of work.

24.3. If at any time it should appear to the Owner/ Architect or the Project Engineer that the progress of the works does not conform to the approved program, the Tenderer shall furnish a revised program and take such steps at his cost, as are necessary to expedite progress and ensure completion of the works within the completion period or extended date of completion.

24.4. Approval by the Architect of such programs or the furnishing of such particulars shall not relieve the Tenderer of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.

24.5. The Tenderer shall be called upon to attend co-ordination meetings with the Site Engineer, Owner/ Architect and his Consultants and other Tenderers and shall fully cooperate with such persons and agencies involved in these discussions. The Tenderer shall take notes of the



of 173

discussions during the meeting and shall strictly adhere to the decisions of the Architect/ Owner or his representative in performing the works

25. Period of Completion: The entire Works covered in this Contract shall be completed by the Tenderer within the completion period set out in the Schedule of Fiscal Aspects.

26. Extension of Time:

26.1. If the Works are delayed by Force Majeure (as defined elsewhere), suspension of work by the Client, serious loss or damage by fire, ordering of altered additional or substituted work or other special circumstances other than through the default of the Tenderer, as would fairly entitle the Tenderer to an extension of time and which in the discretion of the Trust / Trusts beyond the control of the Tenderer, then upon the happening of any such event causing delay, the Tenderer shall within 7 days of the happening of event give notice thereof in writing to the Architect, stating the cause and the anticipated period of delay, in any such event the Client on the recommendations of the Architect may give fair and reasonable extension of time for the completion of work.

26.2. Such extension shall be communicated to the Tenderer by the Project Manager in writing. The Tenderer shall not be entitled to claim any compensation or over-run charges whatsoever for any extension granted.

27. Delays: If, in the opinion of the Project Engineer / Architect, the Tenderer shall be delayed or

impeded in the execution of the Works for reason of: 27.1. Force Majeure: or

27.2. By the works or delays of other Tenderers or tradesmen engaged or nominated by the

Client and not referred to in the Contract Documents: or

27.3. The non-delivery or delay in delivery to the Tenderer, of any materials and equipment which under the Contract Documents the Client is to supply: or

27.4. Any cause, whatever, arising out of the acts or defaults of the Client or the Architect.

27.5. Any accident happening to the works during their progress not arising from neglect, default

or willful act of the Tenderer or his workmen or Sub-Tenderers.

27.6. Extras or variations being ordered by the Architect or owner

27.7. Any other cause which the Architect certifies as beyond the control of the Tenderer, the Tenderer may from time to time, within 7working days of the happening of any of the aforesaid, apply in writing to the Owner/ Architect for an extension of time on account thereof, setting forth the cause of such delays, and the Trust may, with the prior written approval of the Client, make a fair and reasonable extension of time for completion of the Works. Tenderer has to maintain a hinderance register indicating any disruption or stoppage of work with reasons thereof. The hinderance report is to be sent to the office of the Project management and architect for periodic review.

28. Liquidated Damages for delay in completion:

28.1. If the Tenderer fails to complete the Project within the stipulated period as per terms and

conditions, Tenderer is liable to pay to the owner as liquidated damages as mentioned in the fiscal schedule before. The calculation of liquidated damages shall be as below.



of 173

28.1.1. Rs.5,000.00 per day upto first 7 days of delay beyond scheduled date of completion of each milestone stage

28.1.2. Rs.10,000.00 per day from 8th day upto 14th day of delay beyond scheduled date of completion of each milestone stage.

28.1.3. Rs 20,000.00 per day beyond 15th day of delay beyond scheduled date of completion

of each milestone stage 28.1.4. Milestone stages shall be as per the bar chart submitted by the Tenderer and duly

approved by Trust. However, on reaching the next milestone stage in time as per the original bar chart, the recovered Liquidated Damages of previous stage shall be returned

28.2. The total amount of liquidated damages for delay under the contract will be subject to

maximum of five percent (5%) of the contract price.

28.3. The owner may without prejudice to any other method of recovery deduct the amount of such damages from the moneys in his hands due to the Tenderer or which may become due to the Tenderer. The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the Tenderer from his obligation to complete the supplies and demonstrate the performance or from any of his other obligations and liabilities under the contract.

29. Tenderer's Site Organization and Equipment

29.1. Engineer in Charge: The Tenderer shall ensure continued effective supervision with the

help of a qualified, experienced engineer (with civil engineering degree) assisted by civil engineering diploma holder engineer & adequate staff as ascertained by the Trust, for the entire duration of the Works. The engineer-in-charge will be responsible for carrying out the work to the true meaning of the Drawings, conditions of contract, Specifications, schedule of quantities and Project Engineer/ Architect's Instructions and directions given to him in writing shall be held to have been given to the Tenderer officially. Attention is called to the importance of requesting written instruction from the Architect before undertaking any work where Architect's directions or instructions are required. Any such work done in advance of such instructions will be liable to be removed at the Tenderer's cost. No staff from the Engineer and technical supervisory staff shall be transferred from the work without the written prior permission from the Architect. In case the Tenderer fails to employ suitable and qualified man power as listed above, suitable penalty shall be recovered from the Tenderer as decided by the Trust.

29.2. Equipment: The Tenderer shall provide and install all necessary hoists, ladders, scaffolding, tools, plants and all transport for labour, materials and plant necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Works to the satisfaction of the Architect and Trust.

29.3. Security & Safety: The Tenderer shall provide adequate number of watchmen to

guard the site premises, materials and equipment at all times at his expense. Tenderer shall be solely responsible for the security at site. No construction activity/ labourers/ material/ machinery etc. shall be permitted beyond the construction zone. Construction zone is to be duly approved by the Trust before starting the work. Construction zone is to be hard barricaded using Coated sheets and sturdy MS Frame upto the top of the building, and sealed completely to prevent unauthorized entry at the cost of tenderer. Gate entry for all labour and material coming in the site and exiting site is to be maintained. The same is liable to be audited by the Project Manager at any point of time. Post the completion of construction and at the time of



of 173

handing over the site, the tenderer shall remove the barricading and remove from site at his own cost after seeking written permission from project manager.

29.4. Work Sheds: The Tenderer shall provide, erect and maintain at the Site at his expense

proper waterproof shed for the storage and protection of construction materials, carpentry and joinery workshop, equipment, both his own as well as those supplied by the Client, if any from time to time.

29.5. Sanitary Convenience: The Tenderer shall at his expense provide and erect at the Site

all necessary sanitary conveniences for the Site staff and the workmen, and shall maintain them in a clean orderly condition and clean and deodorize the ground after their removal. The sanitary and living facilities are to be upto the satisfaction of Project Manager.

29.6. Scaffolding, Staging, Guard Rails: The Tenderer shall provide at his expense at the Site

scaffolding, staging, guard rails, temporary stairs and temporary measures required during construction. the supports for scaffolding, staging, guard rails and temporary stairs shall be strong, adequate for the particular situations, tied together with horizontal pieces and braced properly. The temporary access to the various parts of the building under construction shall be rigid and strong enough to avoid any chance of mishaps. The entire scaffolding arrangements proposed shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/ Project Engineer but such approval will not relieve the Tenderer of his obligations under this clause.

30. Tenderer's Supervision:

30.1. The Tenderer shall provide all necessary supervision during the execution of the works and

guarantee period for the proper fulfilling of the Tenderer's obligations under the Contract. The Tenderer or a competent and authorized agent approved in writing by the Site Engineer, which approval may at any time be withdrawn; is to be constantly on the works and shall give his whole time to supervise the works. Such authorized agent shall receive on behalf of the Tenderer, directions and instructions from the Project Engineer or the Owner/ Architect.

30.2. The Tenderer shall employ for the execution of the Works 30.2.1. Such technical persons as mentioned before in clause 29.1 are qualified and

experienced and such representatives, foremen and supervisory staff as are competent to give supervision to the work, and

30.2.2. Such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for the proper and timely execution and maintenance of the works.

31. Setting Out: The Tenderer shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works at

his expense in relation to reference points, lines, and levels given in the drawing or furnished by the Engineer in writing and for the correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of every part of the works. If any error in setting out is noticed at any stage, the Tenderer shall, at his own cost, rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the Architect/Owner/Project Engineer. Wrongly executed work shall not be accepted.

32. Nuisance: The Tenderer shall not at any time do, cause or permit any nuisance on the site or do anything which shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience to the others working on or near the site and to the public generally.

33. Water and Electricity: Water and Electricity shall be arranged by the Tenderer at his cost for which

nothing shall be paid extra. In the eventuality of power break down, the Tenderer is required to have



of 173

power backup for continuous operation at site. Tenderer shall lay a water system network to provide water at different places on the site for adequate curing as required by the CPWD specifications.

34. Care of Works: From the commencement of the Works until the date the Works are completed (as

set forth in the Completion Certificate) and handed over to the Client, the Tenderer shall take full responsibility for the care thereof. In case of any damage, loss or injury to the Works executed by him or by other Tenderers or to any part thereof from any cause whatsoever, the Tenderer, shall at his own cost, repair and make good the same so that on completion, the Works shall be in good condition and in conformity in every respect with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Tenderer shall also be liable for any damage to the Works occasioned by him in the course of any operations carried out by him for the purpose of completing any outstanding work or rectification of defects during the Guarantee Period.

35. Co-operation with other Tenderers

35.1. The Tenderer shall co-operate with other Tenderers and Consulting Engineers and freely

exchange with them such technical information as necessary for the proper execution of the works.

35.2. The Tenderer shall, in accordance with the directions of the Engineer, afford all reasonable opportunities to other Tenderers and their workmen and to the workmen of the Owner who may be employed in the execution of the works not included in the Contract, for carrying out their work.

35.3. All operations necessary for the execution of works shall be carried out so as not to interfere

unnecessarily or improperly with the execution of works by other Tenderers. Execution of works under this Contract shall be co-ordinate with the work of other Tenderers where it would interfere with their work or working. The Engineer and the concerned Tenderer shall be informed well in time for effective coordination and proper execution of Works.

36. Tenderer to Keep Site Clear: During the progress of the Works, the Tenderer shall keep the site

reasonably free from all necessary obstructions and shall store or dispose of any Constructional plant and surplus materials, wreckage, rubbish, debris or Temporary Works no longer required.

37. Coordination of Work

37.1. At the commencement of work, and from time to time, the Tenderer shall confer with other Tenderers, sub- Tenderers, and persons engaged on separate contracts in connection with the work, and with the Architect, Owner for the purpose of coordination and execution of the various phases of work. The Tenderer shall ascertain from the other Tenderers, sub-Tenderers and persons engaged in separate contracts, in connection with the works, the extent of all chasing, cutting and forming of all opening, holes, grooves et cetera as may be required to accommodate the various services.

37.2. The Tenderer shall ascertain the routes of all services and the position of all floor and wall outlets, traps et cetera in connection with the installation of plant, services and arrange for the construction of work accordingly. The breaking and cutting of the completed work must not be done unless specifically authorized in writing by the Project Manager/ Architect. Generally, all breaking shall be by the Tenderer for civil work and no work shall be done over broken or patched work without first ascertaining that the broken surface is adequately prepared and reinforced to receive and hold further work.

38. Clearance of Site on Completion: Before the Engineer issues the Completion Certificate, the

Tenderer shall clear away and remove from the Site all constructional plant, surplus materials,



of 173

debris, rubbish and temporary works of every kind and leave the whole of the Site and Works clean and in workman like condition to the satisfaction of the Owner/ Architect.

39. Patent Rights: The Tenderer shall fully indemnify the Owner against any action, claim or proceeding relating to any infringement of the use of any patent or design or any alleged patent or design rights and shall pay royalties which may be payable in respect of any article or part thereof included in the Contract.

LABOUR

40. Engagement of Labour:

40.1. The Tenderer shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of labour, local or

otherwise, and for their transport, housing and payment. All labour engaged by the Tenderer shall be and remain the employees of the Tenderer and no claim shall lie against the Owner by them or Tenderer and any person claiming on their behalf against the Owner in respect of any right or benefit due to them in their employment.

40.2. The Tenderer shall obtain a valid license under the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, before the commencement of the work and continue to have a valid license until the completion of work or expiry of guarantee period, if applicable.

40.3. The Tenderer shall pay the labour employed by him directly or through Sub-Tenderers,

wages not less than the minimum wages notified under the Minimum Wages Act.

40.4. The Tenderer shall in respect of all labour employed by him either directly or through Sub-Tenderers comply with or cause to be complied with the provisions of the payment of Wages Act, 1936, Minimum Wages Act 1948, Employers Liability Act, 1938, Workman's Compensation Act 1923, Maternity Benefit Act 1961,Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act 1970, Employee's Provident Fund Act, and any other Act, Rules or Regulations for the labour as may be enacted by the Government or any modification thereof or any other law relating thereto and rules made thereunder from time to time.

40.5. The Trust shall, on a report from the competent authority have the power to deduct from

the monies due to the Tenderer any sum notified under the provisions of the relevant Act.

40.6. The Tenderer shall indemnify the Owner and the Trust against all or any payments to be made under and for the observance of any Act, Rules and Regulations aforesaid without prejudice to his right to claim indemnity from his Sub-Tenderers.

41. Model Rules: The Tenderer shall at his own cost comply with or cause to be complied with Model

Rules for labour welfare framed by the Government or other local bodies from time to time for the protection of health and for making sanitary arrangement for workers employed directly or indirectly on the works and in the workers hutment area.

42. Safety Code: The Tenderer at his own cost arrange for the safety provisions stipulated by Government or local authorities or as required by the Architect / Trust in respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed for performance of the works and shall provide all facilities in connection therewith. The Tenderer shall also get a workmen’s insurance policy for all the workers on site.

43. Child Labour: The Tenderer shall not employ any labour under 18 years of age on the job or age

as specified in the rules & regulations of the government.

44. Returns of Labour: The Tenderer shall furnish to the Architect a return every week in such detail and form as the Architect may prescribe showing the supervisory staff and the number of labour



of 173

employed by the Tenderer and Sub-Tenderers on the Site separately for each category of labour indicating their working hours.

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

45. Quality of Materials and Workmanship: All Materials and workmanship shall be the best of the

respective kinds described in the Contract and in accordance with the instructions and directions of the Architect /Project Engineer and shall be subjected from time to time, to such tests as the Architect /Project Engineer may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other places as may be directed by the Site Engineer. The Tenderer shall execute the whole and every part of the work in the most substantial and workman-like manner, both as regards to materials and workmanship and in every respect in strict accordance with the specifications et cetera The Tenderer shall also conform exactly and faithfully to the designs, drawings and instructions in writing of the Architect.

46. Storage of Materials: All materials and equipment brought on to the Site shall be stored by the Tenderer only at places approved by the Site Engineer. Storage and safe custody of materials and equipment shall be the responsibility of the Tenderer. Storage of material is to be done as per the CPWD specification 2019.

47. Approval of Materials:

47.1. The Tenderer shall supply samples of all materials including those specified by brand

names for approval of the Architect/Owner/Project Engineer. The Architect/Owner will approve the samples in writing before the Tenderer arranges bulk supplies. The cost of arranging/making of test samples cost of their packing and forwarding and testing charges shall be borne by the Tenderer. The Tenderer shall maintain a record of samples approved and keep them in a sample room to be referred to at any time.

47.2. The Owner/Architect/Project Engineer may at any time during the execution of work call upon the Tenderer to submit samples of any materials used or to be used in the works for checking compliance with the Contract specifications or approved samples. Should these samples fail to comply with the Contract specifications or not conform to approved samples, then the materials from which the said samples were taken shall be removed from the Site immediately and all work executed with such materials shall be replaced and made good to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architect, at the expense of the Tenderer.

48. Standard of Workmanship: To determine the acceptable standard of workmanship, the

Owner/Architect/Project Engineer may require the Tenderer to execute certain proportions of works and services such as walls, flooring, joinery, finishes, sanitary installation et cetera under his close supervision. On approval, such samples of work shall be termed as guiding samples. Work shall be executed to conform to the standard of workmanship of these samples.

49. Inspection of Works:

49.1. The Owner and any person authorized by them shall at all times have access to the Works and to all workshops and places where work is being prepared or from where materials, or equipment are being obtained for the Works and the Tenderer shall afford every facility and assistance in obtaining the right to access.

49.2. All work embracing more than one process shall be subject to examination and approval at each stage thereof and the Tenderer shall give due notice to the Project Engineer when each stage is ready.



of 173

50. Examination of Works: No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Architect/Project Engineer. The Tenderer shall give due notice to the Project Engineer and afford him full opportunity to examine any work, which is about to be covered up or put out of view. The Tenderer shall open any part or parts of the works as the Owner /Project Engineer or the Architect may from time to time direct and shall reinstate and make good such part or parts to the satisfaction of the Architect/Project Engineer.

51. Removal of Improper Work & Materials:

51.1. The Project Engineer /Architect shall have full powers to order in writing:

51.1.1. The removal from the Site, within such time as may be specified in the order, of any materials which, in the opinion of the Architect/Project Engineer are not in accordance with the Contract,

51.1.2. The substitution of proper and suitable materials, with prior approval from the Trust and

51.1.3. The removal and proper re-execution notwithstanding any previous test thereof or

interim payment thereof, or any work which, in respect of materials or workmanship is not in the opinion of the Architect/Project Engineer, in accordance with the Contract.

51.2. In case the Tenderer defaults in carrying out such order, the Owner shall be entitled to

employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall be recoverable from the Tenderer by the Owner, or may be deducted by the Owner from any monies due or which may become due to the Tenderer.

CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT, MACHINERY & TEMPORARY WORKS

52. Tenderer to supply all Plant, Machinery, Scaffolding et cetera: No plant, machinery, scaffolding and tools and tackles will be arranged or issued by the Client.

53. Materials, Plants, et cetera Exclusive Use for the Works:

53.1. All Constructional Plant, Temporary Works and materials when brought on to the Site shall be deemed to be exclusively intended for the execution of the Works and shall become and remain the property of the Client. The Tenderer shall not remove the same or any part thereof, without the consent, in writing, of the Architect / Project Engineer, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

53.2. Upon completion of the Works, the Tenderer shall remove from the Site all the said Constructional Plant and Temporary Works remaining thereon and any unused materials provided by the Tenderer.

53.3. The Client shall not at any time be liable for the loss of or damage to any of the said

Constructional Plant, Temporary Works or materials. The storage and safe custody of all materials, equipment, Constructional Plant and the Temporary Works executed shall be the responsibility of the Tenderer.

54. Urgent Repairs: If, by any reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring, either during

the execution of the works or during the Guarantee Period, any remedial or other work or repair shall, in the opinion of the Architect, be urgently necessary for the safety of the Works and the Tenderer is unable or unwilling to do such work or repair, the Client may employ and pay other persons to carry out such work or repair as the Architect may consider necessary. If the work or



of 173

repair is so done by the Client, is work which, in the opinion of the Architect, the Tenderer is liable to do at his own expense under the Contract, all expenses properly incurred by the Client in so doing shall be recoverable from the Tenderer by the Client, or may be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to the Tenderer. The Architect shall, as soon after the occurrence of any such emergency, as may be reasonably practicable, notify the Tenderer thereof in writing.

55. Working at all heights: Item rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include allowance for executing work at all heights above and at all depths below the ground level, except where specific provision has been made to measure work separately at different heights. Method of measurements given in the CPWD Specification 2019 (or later) and in the Indian Standard Method of Measurement with latest amendments shall be deemed to be modified accordingly. The decision of the architect shall be final and binding.

DEVIATIONS/ VARIATIONS

56. Extras and Variations

56.1. The Owner shall have the power to make and order any variation of the form, quality of the

Works that may appear to him to be necessary during the progress of the Works with the consent of the Architect or any variation that the Owner may desire and the Tenderer shall carry out the Works as directed.

56.2. Variations shall not in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract.

56.3. No variations shall be made by the Tenderer without an order in writing of the Architect/Project Engineer, provided always that no order in writing shall be required for any increase or decrease in the quantities of any work if there is no change in the extent of work ordered from that included in the Contract.

56.4. No verbal orders by the Architect/Owner shall constitute an authority for the Tenderer to

undertake any variations from the Contract, specifications. If the Tenderer, for any reason, has been given verbal orders it shall be his responsibility to ask confirmation of the orders and shall proceed accordingly only after the orders are confirmed in writing.

56.5. The rates for extra items or deduction of items not done / variation shall be calculated in

the order of priority given in the Fiscal Aspects of Contract. For Replacement Items, Addition or Deduction shall at par DSR 2018 for quantity of items replaced to be calculated by Tenderer and verified by Trust. The Tenderer shall obtain permission in writing before executing any variation / replacement / substituted item or exceeding of quantity from BOQ.

57. Claims: The Tenderer will not execute any extra item of work / or increase/ or decrease without

any written approval from Trust. Such items shall be identified and forwarded to Trust for review and ask for change Order 57.1. The Tenderer shall send to the Trust every month, an account giving full particulars, as full

and detailed as possible of all claims for any additional payments to which the Tenderer may consider himself entitled and of all extra work ordered in writing and which he has executed during the preceding month.

57.2. No claim for payment for any extra work or expense will be considered which has not been included in such particulars. The Owner may consider payment for any such work or expenses where admissible under the terms of the Contract, if the Tenderer has at the earliest practicable opportunity notified the Trust in writing that he intends to make a claim for such work and expense and it is certified by the Trust's Representative that such payment was due.



of 173

CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS

58. Quantities: The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are estimated quantities of the work; they are not to be taken as the actual or correct quantities of the Works to be executed by the Tenderer in fulfillment of his obligations under the Contract.

59. Valuation: The Owner/ Architect shall except where otherwise stated, ascertain and determine the value of work done by measurement in accordance with the Contract.

60. Works to be measured:

60.1. The measurement of work done by the Tenderer shall be recorded in the measurement

books by his Engineer, from time to time, jointly with the Owner’s Engineer representative. Measurements of altered, additional or substituted items of work ordered shall be recorded as and when these are executed even if the rates for these items have not been settled.

60.2. The Project Engineer shall, when he requires any part of the works to be measured, give a reasonable notice to the Tenderer who shall attend or send his representative to assist the Project Engineer or his representative in making such measurements, and shall furnish all particulars required by him.

60.3. Measurements shall be signed and dated by both parties on the completion of each set of

measurements. If the Tenderer objects to any of the measurements recorded by the Project Engineer, the Tenderers or their authorized representative shall record a note to this effect in the Measurement Book against items objected to and such a note shall be signed and dated by both the Tenderer and the Project Engineer. The Decision of Architect shall be final and binding.

60.4. If the Tenderer fails to attend or neglects or omits to send his authorized representative,

then the measurements made by the Project engineer or approved by him shall be taken to be correct measurement of the work. If after examination of such record of measurements, the Tenderer does not agree with the same or does not sign the same as agreed, these shall nevertheless be taken as correct, unless the Tenderer shall have within 14 days of such examination, notifies the Architect in writing in which respect the measurements recorded are claimed by him to be incorrect.

61. Method of Measurement: The Works shall be measured net (as executed at site), notwithstanding

any general or local custom, as per the method of measurement set out given anywhere in this contract, in absence of which, in the CPWD Specifications – 2019 (or later) Volume I & II and items not covered by the CPWD Specifications, shall be measured as per IS:1200 - Method of Measurement of Building Works (respective part).

62. Interim Bills:

62.1. The Tenderer shall, at monthly intervals, on the dates agreed between the Trust and the Tenderer, submit interim bills in 4 copies showing the value of the work executed in accordance with the Contract based on the measurements recorded in the measurement books.

62.2. The Architect / Owner shall approve the quality of materials, equipment and workmanship and adherence to the details as per drawings, specifications and the Architect’s instructions



of 173

and render certificates accordingly before the Architect certifies to the Owner the interim bill for payment to the Tenderer.

62.3. The Architect/Project Engineer shall check interim bills and the Tenderer shall provide

necessary information and details which the Architect may request for proper verification of the same. In the event of any discrepancy the Architect shall adjust the value shown in the interim bills.

62.4. Payment for items of work, which are partly completed, shall be allowed at part rates

derived from the Contract rates. Payment for altered, additional or substituted items of work ordered shall be allowed at provisional rates as may be fixed by the Architect till the rates are finally fixed.

62.5. All interim payments shall be treated as payments by way of advances against final

payment and not as payments for the work done or be considered as an admission of the due performance of the Contract.

62.6. Inclusion of any supplies made or works executed in an interim bill and payment of such

interim bills shall not be deemed to constitute approval by the Owner or the Architect of any such supplies or works nor shall it in any way affect the rights of the Owner under the Contract.

62.7. From the amount of the interim bill certified, the Owner shall deduct a percentage of the

value of the work executed towards Security Deposit subject to a percentage specified in the Schedule of Fiscal Aspects.

62.8. The Architect may by any certificate correct or modify any previous certificate and shall

have the power to withhold any certificate if, the Works or any part thereof have not been carried out to his, Owner/Architect’s satisfaction.

63. Pre-Final and Final Bill

63.1. Pre-Final bill submitted by the Tenderer shall consist of claims upto that date of all items

covered as per BOQ and all extra items along with proof of sanction of those items. In case any extra item is not claimed in the Prefinal bill, it shall not be entertained in the Final Bill. Responsibility of measurements and verification of the same from Trust shall be of the Tenderer. The pre-final Bill shall be submitted when project reaches the stage of handing over.

63.2. Not later than 15days after the Architect issues Completion Certificate, the Tenderer shall submit to the Owner 4 (four) copies of final bill with supporting documents showing in detail the value of work done in accordance with the Contract, the payments received by him and other recoveries/ deductions to be affected from the Tenderer. Within two months of the receipt of final bill and all information reasonably required for verification of the final bill, the Architect shall approve and render a certificate to the Owner that he has satisfied himself that the work executed is as per Contract specifications and to his satisfaction with due endorsement from Trust.

64. Withholding of Payments: The Architect may withhold or on account of subsequently discovered

evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 64.1. Defective work not remedied 64.2. Failure of the Tenderer to make payments properly to sub Tenderers for materials or labour

or equipment



of 173

64.3. Damage to works of another Tenderer or sub-Tenderer 64.4. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance unpaid amount 64.5. A reasonable doubt that the Tenderer intends to leave work items incomplete.

65. Materials & Workmanship: 65.1. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the works shall be new materials and

equipment and workmanship are to be of the best quality of the specified type and to the entire satisfaction of the Owner/Architect. The Tenderer shall immediately remove from the premises any materials, equipment and/ or workmanship which in the opinion of the Owner/Architect, are defective or unsuitable and shall substitute proper materials, equipment and/ or workmanship at his own cost. The term `approval’ used in connection with this Contract shall mean the approval of the Owner/Architect. The Tenderer shall, if required, submit satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

65.2. All materials and equipment shall be delivered so as to ensure a speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work. The same shall be stored so as to prevent overloading of any portion of the structure and the Tenderer shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss to the materials, by weather or other causes.

65.3. Within two weeks after signing the Contract, the Tenderer shall submit for approval of the

Architect / Owner, a complete list of all materials and equipment he and his sub-Tenderers propose to use in the work, or definite brand or make, which differ in any respect from those specified; also the particular brand of any article where more than one is specified as a standard. He shall also list items not specifically mentioned in the specifications but which are reasonably inferred and are necessary for the completion of the work.

65.4. The Tenderer shall employ the right kind of workmen, jigs, tools and equipment to fabricate

all materials and equipment. They shall be fabricated and installed without any damage and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and manuals. Unless specifically shown otherwise, all items such as doors/window frames suspended and other ceilings, equipment et cetera shall be securely fixed to their supports through expansion machine bolts, raw bolts or other approved means. Securing any items through wooden plugs shall not be permitted.

65.5. All materials, equipment and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and

test by the Owner/Architect at any and all items during manufacture and/ or construction. The Owner/Architect shall have the right to reject defective material, equipment and workmanship or require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected materials and equipment shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material and equipment without charge therefore, and the Tenderer shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected materials and equipment from the premises. If the Tenderer fails to proceed at once with the replacement of rejected materials and/or the correction of defective workmanship, the Owner may contract or otherwise, replace such materials and equipment and/or correct such workmanship and charge the cost thereof to the Tenderer or may terminate the right of the Tenderer to proceed further with the work. The Tenderer shall furnish promptly, without additional charge all reasonable facilities, labour, materials and equipment necessary for the safe and convenient inspection and test that may be required by the Owner/Architect.

65.6. All tests on material, equipment and workmanship shall be carried out through an organization selected by the Owner/Architect. The Tenderer shall arrange for such tests and also bear all expenses in connection therewith.



of 173

66. Deductions for Uncorrected Work: If the Owner/Architect deems it inexpedient to correct work damaged or not done in accordance with the contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract Price shall be made therefore and the Owner/ Architect’s decision in this respect shall be final.

67. Correction of Work before Completion of Work: The Architect/ Owner / Trust shall conduct a final inspection just before the completion of the work and prepare a list of materials, equipment, and items of work, which fail to conform to the Contract’s Specifications. The Tenderer shall promptly replace and re-execute such items in accordance with the Contract and shall bear all expenses of making good all work and cost of all work of other Tenderers destroyed or damaged by such replacement or removal. If the Tenderer fails to remove and replace above rejected materials, equipment and/ or workmanship within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the Owner may employ and pay other persons to amend and make good such defects at the expense of the Tenderer. All expenses incurred by the Owner in rectifying the defects including all damages, loss and expense consequent to the defects shall be recoverable from any amount due or that may become due to the Tenderer.

68. Completion:

68.1. The work shall be considered as completed only upon fulfillment of procedure laid down in

clause above and when the Architect has certified in writing that the work has been completed along with the rectification of items in defects list. The defect liability period shall commence from the date of such certificate.

68.2. Should the Owner decide to occupy any portion of the building or use any part of any equipment, before the Contract is completed, same shall not constitute an acceptance of any part of the work unless so stated in writing by the Architect.

GUARANTEES, MAINTENANCE & DEFECTS

69. Defects 69.1. The Tenderer shall make good, at his own cost, and to the satisfaction of the Architect, all

defects, shrinkage, settlement or other faults, arising in the opinion of the Architect from work or materials not being in accordance with the Drawings or Specifications or Schedule of Quantities or the instructions of the Architect/Project Engineer, which may appear within one year after completion of work, excepting specialist items such as waterproofing, anti-termite treatment et cetera which shall call for longer guarantee periods.

69.2. Such defects, shrinkage, settlement and other faults shall, upon directions in writing of the Architect and within such reasonable time as shall be specified therein, be amended and made good by the Tenderer at his own cost, and in case of default the Owner may employ and pay other persons to amend and make good such defects, shrinkage, settlements or other faults and all costs, damages, loss and expenses consequent thereon or incidental thereto shall be made good and borne by the Tenderer and such cost, damage, loss or expense shall be recoverable from him by the Owner or may be deducted by the Owner upon the Architect ‘s Certificate in writing from any amount due to the Tenderer, or the Tenderer deduct from any moneys due to the Tenderer, a sum to be determined by the Architect equivalent to the cost of amending such work and in the event of the retention amount being insufficient to recover the balance from the Tenderer, together with any expenses the Owner may have incurred in connection therewith.

69.3. The Tenderer may not maintain staff and labour at site throughout the defects liability

period. However, if any major defects are noted requiring his urgent attention, he shall attend to the same immediately.



of 173

70. Rectification of Defects/ Repairs 70.1. Should the Architect consider, at any time during the construction or reconstruction or prior

to the expiration of the Guarantee Period, that any work has been executed with unsound or imperfect materials or unskilled workmanship or is of a quality inferior to the constructed for or not other wise in accordance with the Contract, in respect where of the decision of the Trust's Representative shall be final, the Tenderer shall, on demand in writing from the Architect, specifying the fault, notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, rectify forth or remove and reconstruct the defective work so specified, in whole or in part, as the case may require, at his own expense: and in the event of his failing to do so within the period specified by the Architect in his demand/direction, the Trust may carry out the work by other means at the risk and expense, in all respects, of the Tenderer.

70.2. If it becomes necessary for the Tenderer to replace or renew any defective portions of the plant or installation under this clause, the provisions of this clause shall apply to the portions of the plant/installation so replaced or renewed until the expiration of 10 months from the date of such replacements or renewals.

71. Drawings, Specifications et cetera:

71.1. After the Contract is signed, the Tenderer will be furnished with two copies of the drawings

but no additional sets of contract documents. The tender documents signed by Trust will become contract documents one set of which will be handed over to him for his reference. Necessary copies will be Xeroxed by Tenderer.

71.2. In general, the drawings shall indicate dimensions, positions and type of construction; the specifications shall indicate the qualities and the methods; and the Schedule of Quantities shall indicate the quantity and rate for each item of work. However, the above documents being complementary, what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. In case of any discrepancies in or among the documents, the most stringent of all shall apply.

71.3. Any work indicated on the drawings and not mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities or

Specifications or vice versa, shall be deemed as though fully set forth in each. Work not specifically detailed, called for, marked or specified, shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified.

71.4. No deviations from the Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities shall be made

without written approval from Trust / architect / Trust. The Owner/ Architect’s interpretation of these documents shall be final and without appeal.

71.5. Errors or inconsistencies discovered in the Plans and Specifications shall be promptly

brought to the attention of the Architect for interpretation or correction. Local conditions if any, that may have changed subsequent to the issue of tender document and which may affect the work shall likewise be brought to the Owner/ Architect’s attention at once. If, at any time, it is discovered that work being done which is not in accordance with the approved plans and Specifications, the Tenderer shall correct the work immediately. Correction of defective work shall not be a basis for any claims for extension of time or money. The Tenderer shall not carry on the work except with the knowledge of the Site Engineer.

71.6. Figured dimensions on the scale drawings and large-scale details shall govern. Large-scale

details take precedence over scale drawings. Any work done before receipt of such details if not in accordance with the same, shall be removed and replaced or adjusted as directed, without expense to the Owner.



of 173

71.7. All Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities and copies thereof furnished by

the Owner/ Architect are his property. They shall not be used on any other work and shall be returned to him at his request or at the completion of the Contract.

72. Samples: After the award of the Contract, the Tenderer shall furnish for the approval of the

Architect/Owner, samples. Samples shall be delivered as directed by the Owner/ Architect. No extra payment is due to the Tenderer for preparation of any samples. A schedule giving dates for the submission of samples shall be included in the time schedule. A sample room shall be made at site which shall hold all samples, sample boards till the end of the project.

73. Safety Procedures

73.1. The Tenderer shall incorporate in his operation the requirements of all the "Safety Codes" issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards, National Building Code and regulations of local Authorities. Where the requirements of BIS Codes, National Building Code and regulations are duplicated by local Authorities, the more stringent regulations shall be deemed to apply. The Tenderer shall Provide all Temporary Works (including roadways, footways, guards and fences), which may be necessary because of the execution of the Works, for the use and protection of the public and of owner and occupiers of adjacent land without any extra cost to the owner

73.2. The Tenderer shall provide safe means of access to all working places.

73.3. The Tenderer shall properly design scaffolding, temporary access, ladders, ramps and hoisting arrangements, cranes et cetera as applicable, to ensure safety of workmen as well as Works. Tenderer shall be responsible for maintenance of all scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices and shall ensure that they are in safe conditions.

73.4. All necessary personal safety equipment shall be kept available for the use of the persons

employed on the Site and maintained in a condition for immediate use. The Tenderer shall take adequate steps to ensure proper use of equipment by those concerned.

73.5. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. Tenderer

shall arrange for a proper electrical distribution system at site for construction work and lighting for hutments through distribution board with necessary MCBs as per the safety charter of CPWD. Adequate care shall be taken to prevent unauthorized access to electrical systems to prevent accidents due to electrocution. Proper sizes of wires to be installed securely for electrical distribution. The responsibility of the safety of electrical systems and electrical equipment rests with the tenderer.

73.6. No materials on the site of works shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or

inconvenience to any persons. Tenderer to engage a team for regular Housekeeping works to keep site neat and tidy.

73.7. All consequences, damages or losses arising by reasons of any violation of the safety

requirement shall be met by the Tenderer. The Tenderer shall be bound to pay compensa-tion to the persons for the injuries sustained or death owing to neglect of the safety precautions, should any claim proceedings be filed against the Client/Trust. The Tenderer hereby agrees to indemnify the Client and Trust against the same.

73.8. Tenderer shall procure the following insurances for the period of work

73.8.1. Tenderer All Risk policy for the value of the contract 73.8.2. Workmen’s policy for the staff and workers at site



of 173

FORE-CLOSURE AND TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

74. Foreclosure of Contract 74.1. If at any time after the commencement of work, the Owner shall, for any reason whatsoever,

not require the whole or part of the works specified, the Owner shall give notice in writing of that to the Tenderer who shall have no claim to any payment of compensation whatsoever on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived from the execution of work in full but which he did not derive in consequence of the full amount of work not having been carried out. The Tenderer shall be paid at Contract rates full amounts for the works executed at site. Tenderer will not be entitled to any claims for exclusion of whole or part of a work which is not executed.

74.2. Provided that against any payments due from the Owner under the clause, the Owner shall be entitled to be credited with any outstanding balances due from the Tenderer for any advances in respect of materials and otherwise and any other sum which on the date of foreclosing was recoverable by the Owner from the Tenderer under the terms of Contract.

75. Cancellation of Contract on Default of Tenderer

75.1. If the Tenderer shall become bankrupt, or being a corporation, shall go into liquidation

(other than a voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction), or if the Tenderer shall assign the Contract without the consent in writing of the Trust, or shall have an execution levied on his goods or if the Architect shall certify in writing to the Trust that in his opinion the Tenderer

75.1.1. has abandoned the Contract, or 75.1.2. without reasonable excuse has suspended the progress of the Works for 15 days

after receiving from the Project Engineer, written notice to proceed, or 75.1.3. despite previous warnings by the Project Engineer / Architect, in writing, is not

executing the Works in accordance with the Contract, or is persistently or flagrantly neglecting to carry out his obligation under the Contract, or

75.1.4. has in defiance of the Owner's instructions to the contrary, sublet any part of the Contract, then the Owner may, after giving fourteen days’ notice in writing to the Tenderer, determine the Contract, and enter upon the Site and Works without releasing the Tenderer from any of his obligation or liabilities under the Contract, or affecting the rights and powers conferred on the Owner by the Contract and may either himself complete the Works or may employ any other Tenderer, to complete the Works at the risk and cost of the original tenderer.

75.1.5. The Owner may use for such completion so much of the said Constructional Plant Temporary Works and materials, which may have been deemed to be reserved exclusively for the execution of the Works under the provisions of the Contract, as the Trust may think proper; and the Trust may at any time sell any of the Construction Plant, Temporary Works and unused materials and apply the proceeds of sale in or towards the satisfaction of any sums due or which may become due to the Owner from the Tenderer under the Contract.

75.2. The Architect shall, as soon as may be practicable after any such determination by the

Owner, fix and determine ex parte, or by or after reference to the Tenderer and shall certify what amount, if any, had at the time of such determination reasonably accrued to the Tenderer and the value of any of the said unused or partially used materials, any Constructional Plant and any Temporary works.



of 173

75.3. If Owner determines the Contract under this clause, he shall not be liable to pay the Tenderer any money on account of the Contract until the expiration of the Guarantee period and thereafter until the cost of execution and maintenance, rectification of defects, damages for delay in completion, and all other expenses incurred by the Owner have been ascertained and the amount thereof certified by the Architect. The Tenderer shall then be entitled to receive only such sum or sums, if any, as the Architect may certify would have been payable to him upon due completion by him after deducting the said amounts. The Tenderer shall be paid accordingly.

76. Change in Constitution: If, there is a change in the constitution of the Tenderer’s firm, after or

prior to the award of the Contract and if prior approval is not obtained, the Tenderer shall have been deemed to have been assigned and the owner reserves the right to determine the Contract and the same consequence shall follow as if the Contract was determined on the Tenderer's default.

77. Taxes and Duties: The rates are deemed to be inclusive of all the taxes (like excise duty, sales tax, octroi/entry tax, labour cess, GST and all other taxes as applicable) The tenderer shall submit documentation for the compliance of the same along with every running bill and final reconciliation with the final bill.

78. Use of Completed Portions: The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any

completed or partially completed portion of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work may not have expired. Taking such possession and use shall not be deemed acceptance of any work completed in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Tenderer is also required to handover part of the building to the Trust three months in advance for occupation.

79. Force Majeure: If, at any time, during the continuance of this contract, the performance in whole

or in the part by either party of any obligation under this contract, shall be prevented or delayed by reason of any war, hostility, acts of public enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, fires, floods, explosions, epidemics, quarantine restrictions or other acts of God, strikes and lockouts (hereinafter referred to as ‘eventualities’) then provided notice of happening of any such eventuality is given by the either party txo the other within fifteen (15 ) days from the date of occurrence thereof, neither party shall be reason of such eventuality be entitled to terminate this contract nor shall either party have any claim for damages against the other in respect of such nonperformance or delay in performance and work under this contract shall be resumed as soon as practicable after such eventuality has come to an end or ceased to exist, and the decision of the owner as to whether the work has been so resumed shall be final and conclusive. The time of completion shall then be extended by a period equal to the period during which the eventuality was prevailing.

80. No Liability

80.1. Notwithstanding any provision of this Contract to the contrary, Owner or its representatives shall in any event not be liable for special, indirect, punitive or consequential loss or damage of any kind whatsoever (including but not limited to lost profits), whether or not foreseeable, even if Owner has been advised of the likelihood of such loss or damage and regardless of whether the claim for loss or damage is made in negligence, for breach of Contract or otherwise.

80.2. The Owner shall not be responsible for the genuineness, validity, effectiveness or suitability of this Contract or other documents incidental thereto, or any security or the priority thereof constituted or purported to be constituted thereby or thereunder, nor shall it be responsible or liable to any person because of any provision of such documents or the unenforceability thereof, whether arising from statute, law or decision of the court.

80.3. The Owner shall be protected and shall incur no liability for or in respect of any action taken,

omitted or suffered in reliance upon any instruction, request or order from the company or



of 173

any resolution, direction, consent, certificate, affidavit, statement, facsimile transmission or other paper or document reasonably believed by it to be genuine and to have been delivered, signed or sent by the proper party or parties.

80.4. Neither the Owner nor the Architect nor their Representatives shall be personally bound or

liable for the acts or obligations or default or omission in the observance of any of the acts, matters or things which are herein contained.

81. Non-Waiver of Defaults: Failure of the Owner to insist upon strict performance of any terms and

conditions of the Contract or condonation by them of any breach by the Tenderer or any Sub-Tenderer of any stipulations and conditions of the Contract shall in no way prejudice or affect or be construed as a waiver of any rights and remedies that the Owner may have and will not be deemed a waiver of any subsequent default under the terms and conditions of the Contract.

82. Trial Operations, Handing Over, Completion Certificate

82.1. On completion of the installation and before its startup, each item of the equipment shall be inspected by the Tenderer and Architect / Consultants jointly for the correctness and completeness of the installation. Thereafter Tenderer's commissioning/start-up Project Engineer shall carry out all pre-commissioning tests as specified in the relevant Indian Standards. Results of pre-commissioning tests shall be signed jointly by the Tenderer's Representative and the Consultants.

82.2. On conclusion of satisfactory pre-commissioning tests the installation shall be put on trial operation during which period all necessary adjustments shall be made while operating over the full load-range. The trial operation shall be considered successful if the installation is in operation continuously on full load for a period mutually agreed, with all vital safety operations maintained. The status of the installation during its trial operation shall be recorded in the logbook, which shall be signed daily by the Representatives of the Engineer / Architect and the Tenderer.

82.3. Should the continuous operation of the installation during the trial operation be interrupted

due to either difficulty with the installation, or otherwise then the trial operation shall run again for the period agreed after removal of the difficulty.

82.4. The readiness of the installation shall then be notified in writing, to the Local Authority

concerned, for their inspection and certification that the installation meets all the statutory requirements and authorization for its commissioning and use. The Tenderer shall obtain all necessary approvals and/or certificates from the concerned local authorities before the completion certificate is issued by the Architect.

82.5. The Tenderer shall ensure that all technical requirements of installation inclusive of all sub-

systems are compiled well before performance tests are carried out.

83. Performance Tests 83.1. Performance tests shall be then conducted at Site, by the Architect /Engineer to determine

compliance of every equipment with the specified performance as envisaged. The Tenderer's commissioning and start-up Engineers shall make the unit ready for such tests and assist the Architect /Engineer in conducting the tests.

83.2. The guaranteed performance rating of each equipment shall be proved by the Tenderer during the performance tests should the results of these tests show any decrease/increase from the guaranteed values, the Tenderer shall modify the Equipments as required to meet the guarantees. In such cases, performance test shall be repeated within fifteen days from



of 173

the date the equipment is ready for re-test and all cost of modifications including labour, materials and the cost of re-testing to prove that the equipment meets the guarantees, shall be borne by the Tenderer.

84. Final Acceptance/ Completion Certificate

84.1. Only after the demonstration of the trial run and satisfactory performance tests and

rectification of defects as per the defect list and shall the Owner issue the completion certificate to the Tenderer dually endorsed by Trust and architect.

84.2. Minor defects, which do not affect the safe operation of the equipment at the rated capacity, if accepted by the Architect, shall not be considered as reason for the installation being not ready for handing over. These defects will be notified to the Tenderer and will be rectified by the Tenderer in a mutually agreed schedule.

84.3. All equipment, tools and tackles and any special instruments required, for conducting pre-

commissioning and performance tests shall be provided by the Tenderer at his cost.

84.4. Tenderer shall handover the building to the Trust after the owner issues completion certificate along with necessary documentation and facilitated by Trust

85. Use Before Completion Certificate

85.1. If by reason of any default on the part of the Tenderer, a completion certificate has not been

issued in respect of every portion of the Works within one month after the time for completion or extended time as the case may be, the Owner shall be at liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof in respect, of which a completion certificate has not been issued, provided that works or the portion so used as aforesaid shall be reasonably capable of being used and that the Tenderer shall be afforded the earliest opportunity of taking such steps as may be necessary to permit the issue of the certificate of completion. The Tenderer shall handover part of the building as instructed one month in advance.

85.2. The Owner shall be at liberty from time to time or at any time before the completion of the Works to take possession of and use any part of the Site or uncompleted Works and in such case the Tenderer shall completely finish the said incomplete parts or a part of the works as and when the Architect shall direct whether before or after the respective prescribed time or extended time or times (if any) for the completion of the Works and if required by the Architect while the Owner is in possession of the said part or parts of the Site or Works.

86. Price Escalation: No Price escalation shall be considered during the contract period or extended

period under any circumstances

87. Price Adjustments: The rates quoted by the Tenderer and accepted by the Owner shall hold good till the completion of the work and no additional claim will be admissible on account of statutory increase in prices, fluctuation of market rates, increase in duties, taxes/and any other levies/ fees et cetera.

88. Jurisdiction: All matters arising out of or in any way connected with this Agreement shall be

deemed to have arisen in Gurgaon and only the Courts in Gurgaon/ Haryana shall have Jurisdiction to determine the same.

89. Arbitrator: Subject to clause 94.0, any dispute or difference arising between the parties out of or

in connection with the terms and condition of this agreement after the execution there of shall be first resolved through arbitration under the Arbitration & Conciliation Act, 1996 or any amendments



of 173

thereof. Such disputes shall be referred to a sole arbitrator, who shall be appointed jointly by both the parties. The award of the sole arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties here to. The venue for the arbitration proceedings shall be at Gurgaon.

90. Protection and Cleaning:

90.1. Protection of Site: The Tenderer shall protect and preserve the Works from all damage or

accident by providing temporary roofs, windows and door coverings, boxing or other construction as required by the Architect. This protection shall be provided for all property adjacent to the site as well as on the site.

90.2. Cleaning of Site: The Tenderer shall properly clean the Work as it progresses and shall remove all rubbish and debris from the site from time to time as is necessary and as directed. On completion, the Tenderer shall ensure that the premises and/or site are cleaned, surplus materials, debris, sheds et cetera removed, areas under floor cleared of rubbish, gutters, drains cleared, doors and sashes eased, locks and fastenings oiled, keys clearly labeled and handed over to the Site Manager so that the whole is left fit for immediate occupation or use and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

91. Covering Up: The Tenderer must give at least three working days clear notice to the Architect and

the Project Engineer before covering up any of the work in foundation and drains in order that proper measurement may be taken of the work as a executed and in the event of the Tenderer failing to provide such notice, he is, at his own expense, to uncover as required to allow the measurements to be taken and afterwards to reinstate the work satisfactorily.

92. Methods of Measurement: For measuring all work, the standard method of measurement in accordance with the standards laid down by the Bureau of Indian Standards shall be adopted unless otherwise specified. In the Event of any dispute with regard to the mode of measurement of the work executed, the decision of the Architect/Project Engineer shall be final and binding.

93. Tolerance: The Tenderer shall exercise every care to ensure that all structural members are

sufficiently plumb and true to dimensions called for on the drawings to receive prefabricated finishing elements such as doors, windows, cabinet work, ceramic work, concrete, tiles et cetera. Any variations may require rectification in the structural members or may involve remaking or replacing the finishing elements, fabricated to fit into the openings or spaces, as called for on the Drawings. In case of separate Contract, the Tenderer whose work does not conform to dimensions called for, shall be liable for all the expenses which have been incurred for rectification or replacement as may be required by the Architect for the proper installation of the finishing elements. The Architect’s decision in this respect shall be final and binding on the parties concerned.

94. Settlement of Disputes: All disputes and differences of any kind whatever arising out of or in

connection with the Contract or the carrying out of the works (whether during the progresses of the works or after their completion, and whether before or after the determination, abandonment or breach of the Contract) shall be referred to and settled by the Arbitrator, as appointed in accordance with clause 89.0 hereinabove, after hearing the disputing parties. The Arbitrator shall state his decisions with reasons thereof. Such decisions may be in the form of a final Certificate or otherwise. The decision of the Arbitrator with respect to any or all of the following matters shall be final and without appeal.

94.1. The variation or modifications of the design. 94.2. The quality or quantity of works or the addition or omission or substitution of any work. 94.3. Any discrepancy in the Drawings and/or Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. 94.4. The removal and/or re-execution of any works executed by the Tenderer. 94.5. The dismissal from the Works of any persons deployed thereupon. 94.6. The opening up for inspection of any works covered up.



of 173

94.7. The amending and making good of any defects under defects liability period. 94.8. Acceptability of materials, equipment and workmanship. 94.9. Materials, labour, tools, equipment and workmanship necessary for the proper execution

of work. 94.10. Assignment and sub-letting 94.11. Delay and extension of work 94.12. Termination of Contract by the Owner.

95. Indemnity: The Tenderer shall indemnify the Owner against all actions, suits, claims and demands

brought or made against the Owner in respect of any matter or thing done or omitted to be done by the Tenderer in the execution of or in connection with the work of this Contract and against any loss or damage to the Owner in consequences of any action of suit being brought against the Tenderer for anything done or omitted to be done in the execution of the work in this contract.

96. Milestones: Major Mile stones suggested to complete the project in scheduled time (as given in fiscal aspects) are given below. However, the Tenderer shall submit the milestones with dates. Tenderer can alter the milestones in the chart submitted by him. The chart shall have to be approved prior to start of execution

MULTI-PURPOSE & KITCHEN:

S. No. Description of Mile stone Contractual Duration

1 Date of Commencement 7th day from the date of release of Letter of Acceptance, or the handover of site for Construction whichever occurs later

2 Completion of sub-structure, upto plinth beams including dismantling

One month from the date of commencement

3 Completion of Ground Floor Roof Two months from the date of commencement 4 Completion of First Floor Roof 3.5 months from the date of commencement 5 Completion of MEP Works &Masonry and

Plastering 4.5 months from the date of commencement

6 Completion of Civil Finishes Works 5 months from the date of commencement 7 Completion of External Works 6 months from the date of commencement 8 Completion of Project, Site Clearance,

Completion of snag points & Handover 6 months from the date of commencement

PRATISHTHAN:

S. No. Description of Mile stone Contractual Duration

1 Date of Commencement 7th day from the date of release of Letter of Acceptance, or the handover of site for Construction whichever occurs earlier/later

2 Completion of sub-structure, upto plinth beams two months from the date of commencement 3 Completion of Ground Floor Roof 3.5 months from the date of commencement 4 Completion of First Floor Roof 4.5 months from the date of commencement 5 Completion of Second Floor Roof 5.5 months from the date of commencement 6 Completion of Third Floor Roof- Mumty 6 months from the date of commencement 7 Completion of Masonry, MEP Works and

Plastering 7 months from the date of commencement

8 Completion of Civil Finishes Works 8 months from the date of commencement 9 Completion of External Works 9 months from the date of commencement 10 Completion of Project, Site Clearance,

Completion of snag points & Handover 9 months from the date of commencement



of 173

97. Statutory deductions and compliances: All statutory deductions like TDS, WCT or any other shall be deducted from all the bills submitted by the Tenderer. Tenderer has to comply with ESI, PF, GST and other norms as applicable and submit necessary documents to show compliance with every bill

98. Recovery for supplied materials: In case Trust issues materials, viz. cement and steel, it shall be

recovered from Tenderer’s bills as per the purchase price of the same.

99. Payment Schedule: Payment for the running bills submitted by the tenderer, shall be processed after the same are duly verified by the client’s project engineer and the architect. Other details as per schedule of fiscal aspects.

100. Handing Over: The contractor shall hand over the site after restoring the existing pathways,

plinth protection, planters, pipes, cables etc that may have been demolished/relocated to facilitate the construction process without any extra cost to the Trust. Any relocation of existing services as may be required to facilitate construction shall be done by the contractor without any extra time or cost implication to the Trust.



of 173

PROPOSED BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS

S.NO. Description of Items Proposed Specifications

1.0 External Finishes External Finish. OUTSIDE: Exposed Brickwork, Exposed concrete and

grit wash finish on the exterior with grooves, panels, bands, architraves etc as per the drawings. INSIDE: Plaster finish with grooves on Brickwork using ordinary First class burnt clay bricks to match with existing structure. Exposed brickwork in corridors and common areas as per drawings

Roof Exposed Concrete for RCC in corridors & other areas as specified in drawings. Truss Roof for First floor roof in approved colour (in Multipurpose and kitchen building only) complete with accessories like ridge, flashing, gutter and drain pipes

Plinth Protection Cast in situ RCC over brickbat bed with grove as per drawing. To match with existing

2.0 Class Rooms Flooring Polished Kota stone Walls Oil Bound distemper on Plaster& matt enamel dado Ceilings Oil Bound distemper on Plaster 3.0 Corridors Flooring Polished Kota stone Walls Exposed brickwork Ceilings Exposed RCC for concrete members like columns,

beams, lintels, coping etc. 4.0 Labs Flooring Polished Kota stone Walls Acid Proof Ceramic Tiles in wet areas as per drawing and

Oil bound distemper on all other surfaces. Acid proof tiles on walls and counter in labs

Ceiling Oil Bound distemper on Plaster 5.0 Basement Flooring Kota stone Walls One side Exposed Brickwork & one side OBD on putty

base Ceilings Exposed RCC 6.0 Library Flooring Kota stone Walls OBD on putty base Ceilings Oil Bound distemper on Plaster 7.0 Computer Centre Flooring Kota stone Walls OBD on putty base Ceilings Oil Bound distemper on Plaster / possibly false ceiling 8.0 Faculty & Office Flooring Kota stone Walls OBD on putty base Ceilings Exposed RCC



of 173

S.NO. Description of Items Proposed Specifications

9.0 Toilets Flooring Kota Stone/ Tiles as per drawings Dado Ceramic tiles with vertical joints upto 2.4m level and

remaining OBD WC Parryware/ Hindware wall hung WC with cistern white

coloured, cascade model with two flush buttons Wash basin Parryware/ Hindware WB stand alone with pedestal

white/ivory coloured Urinals Parryware/Hindware urinals half stall white coloured with

standalone sensors. WB-taps Jaquar/ESS ESS standard taps. Hand driers Provision only Drinking Water Water cooler & RCC Tray with Tiles 10.0 Stair Case Treads Unpolished Kota Stone Riser Kota/Tiles Railing MS railing – 11.0 Ramp Floor Rough Kota Stone Railing MS railing 12.0 Doors & Windows Doors frames Pressed Steel Door Frames painted with 3 or more coat

of synthetic enamel paint over two coats of red oxide primer

Shutters Factory made Flush door shutters with 1mm laminate on both sides (as per colour code), lipping to cover laminate all around, with Vision panel

Main entrance doors, corridor doors, Windows in lobby, partition

MS Tubular Door shutters and Frames as per drawing

Windows MS Windows as per drawings with glazing and railing 13.0 Shuttering Columns 12mm Film coated ply shuttering Beams 12mm Film coated ply shuttering Exposed concrete Slabs,

Cills, Coping etc 12mm Film coated ply shuttering

Slabs with plaster Steel plate shuttering 14.0 Skirting 100mm high Kota Stone Skirting 15.0 Grade of Concrete M25 for Foundations/ Slabs/beams etc

M30 for Columns or as per drawings 16.0 Steel Fe550 TMT



of 173

SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL

o In case where the specifications given below are found wanting the relevant IS code with latest

amendments, CPWD Specifications 2019 (or latest) shall hold good. In case of clash, the decision of Chief Engineer/ Architect will prevail.

o Wherever reference has been made to Indian standard or any other specifications the same shall

mean to refer to the latest specifications irrespective of any particular edition of such specification being mentioned in the specifications below or schedule of quantities.

WORKMANSHIP The workmanship shall be the best of its kind and shall confirm to these specifications as given. In case nothing is specified in these specifications the Indian Standard specifications in every respect and where I.S.I. is also silent latest trade practices shall prevail subject to the approval of the Architect. All materials or workmanship, which in the opinion of the Architects / Engineer is defective or unsuitable, shall be removed immediately form the site and shall be substituted with proper material and or workmanship forthwith.

SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION

The tenderer shall employ only such methods of construction, tools and plant as are appropriate for the type of work or as approved by Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The tenderer shall take all precautions and measures to ensure safety of works and workman and shall be fully responsible for the same. Safety pertaining to construction works such as excavation, centring and shuttering, trenching, blasting, demolition, electric connections, scaffolds, ladders, working platforms, gangway, mixing of bituminous materials, electric and gas welding, use of hoisting and construction machinery shall be governed by CPWD safety code, relevant safety codes and the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.

MEASUREMENTS

In booking dimensions, the order shall be consistent and in the sequence of length, width and height or depth or thickness. Rounding off where required shall be done in accordance with IS: 2-1960. The number of significant places rounded in the rounded off value should be as specified. MATERIALS

All materials shall be best of their kind and shall conform to the latest Indian Standard. All materials shall be of approved quality as per samples and from origins approved by the Architects/Project Engineer. A set of sealed specimen samples of all approved materials shall be kept at site till final bill is settled, cost of which to be borne by the Tenderer. Materials stored at site, depending upon the individual characteristics, shall be protected from atmospheric effects due to rain, sun, wind and moisture to avoid deterioration Materials like timber, paints etc. shall be stored in such a way that there may not be any possibility of fire hazards. Inflammable materials and explosives shall be stored in accordance with the relevant rules



of 173

and regulations or as approved by Engineer-in-Charge in writing so as to ensure desired safety during storage.

Planning of Storage Layout:

For any site, there should be proper planning of the layout for stacking and storage of different materials, components and equipment with proper access and proper manoeuvrability of the vehicles carrying the material. While planning the layout, the requirements of various materials, components and equipment at different stages of construction shall be considered. The storage & stacking checklist is given in Table 1.1. For further details refer IS- 4082. Cost of constructing material storage yard/platform/room shall not be payable extra.



of 173

Cement: Cement shall be 43 grade OPC and comply with the latest specification IS 8112. Fully or partly set cement shall be rejected. One bag of cement shall weight 50 Kg. Cement shall be stored in pucca godown with raised floor and should be watertight. Cement shall be stored at the work site in a building or a shed which is dry, leakproof and as moisture proof as possible. The building or shed for storage should have minimum number of windows and close-fitting doors and these should be kept closed as far as possible. Cement shall be stored and stacked in bags and shall be kept free from the possibility of any dampness or moisture coming in contact with them. Cement bags shall be stacked off the floor on wooden planks in such a way as to keep about 150 mm to 200 mm clear above the floor. The floor may comprise of lean cement concrete or two layers of dry bricks laid on well consolidated earth. A space of 600 mm minimum shall be left around between the exterior walls and the stacks (see Fig 1.1) In the stacks the cement bags shall be kept close together to reduce circulation of air as much as possible. The height of stack shall not be more than 10 bags to prevent the possibility of lumping up under pressure. The width of the stack shall be not more than four bags length or 3 meters. In stacks more than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall be arranged alternately length-wise and cross-wise so as to tie the stacks together and minimize the danger of topping over. Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in the order in which they are received; a label showing date of receipt of cement shall be put on each stack to know the age of cement. For extra safety during the monsoon, or when it is expected to store for an unusually long period, the stack shall be completely enclosed by a water proofing membrane such as polyethylene, which shall close on the top of the stack. Care shall be taken to see that the waterproofing membrane is not damaged any time during use. Cement in gunny bags, paper bags and polyethylene bags shall be stored separately.



of 173

Steel: M.S. Reinforcement. Where plain mild steel is to be used, it shall conform to IS: 432-1966. This is to be used only as hoop iron in 115mm thick brickwork TMT Bars Shall be of grade Fe500 and conform to relevant IS codes.



of 173

Stocking and storage. Steel reinforcement shall be stored in a way as to prevent distortion and corrosion. Bars of different classifications, size and lengths shall be stored separately to facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths as to minimize wastage in cutting from standard lengths. For each classification of steel, separate areas shall be earmarked. It is desirable that ends of bars and sections of each class be painted in distinct separate colours. Steel reinforcement shall ordinarily be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and to prevent deterioration and corrosion. It is desirable to coat reinforcement with cement wash before stacking to prevent scaling and rusting. Bars of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately to facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths so as to minimize wastage in cutting from standard lengths. In case of long storage, reinforcement bars shall be stacked above ground level by at least 150 mm.

Structural Steel: Shall be mild steel rolled sections and plates conforming to the latest Indian Standard IS:226-1962.Structural steel of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately. It shall be stored above ground level by at least 150 mm upon platforms, skids or any other suitable supports to avoid distortion of sections.

Aggregate Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard dry and level patch of ground. If such a surface is not available, a platform of planks or old corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent contamination with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter. Cost of lean concrete for storage shall not be payable extra Stacks of fine and coarse aggregates shall be kept in separate stock piles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from getting intermixed. On a large job, it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give each type of aggregates its own compartment. Fine aggregates shall be stacked in a place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum. Unless specified otherwise or necessitated by site conditions stacking of the aggregates should be carried out in regular stacks. The suggested sizes of stacks are as follows:

Coarse aggregate: Shall be the best quality crushed or broken hard stone from quarries approved by the Architects and shall conform to IS : 383-1970. It shall be blue in colour and/or as approved by the Architects. Coarse Sand. Shall be either river sand or pit-sand, clean, sharp, strong, angular and composes of hard siliceous materials. It shall be obtained from quarries approved by the Architects. Its grading shall be within the limits of grading Zone III (Table1). When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for the sieves other than 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron (I.S) sieves by not more than 5% it shall be regarded as falling within the zone. This five percent can be split up; for example it could be one percent of each of three sieves and two percent on another, or four percent on one sieve and one percent on another. The maximum quantity of silt shall not exceed 5%.



of 173

Fine Sand: This shall be natural river sand. Its grading shall be within the limits of grading zone IV (table 1). When the grading fails the percentage, limit prescribed for the sieves other than 600 microns. 300 microns and 150 microns (I.S.) sieves by not more than 5% it shall be regarded as falling within the zone. This 5 % can be split up: for example, it could be one percent on each of three sieves and two percent on another or 4 % on one sieve sand one percent on another. The maximum quantity of silt shall not exceed 5 %

Stone dust. It shall be obtained from crushing hard stones and from quarries approved by the Architects. It grading shall be within the limits of grading zone III as per table below. When the grading falls outside the percentage limits prescribed for sieves other than 600 micron and 300 micron (IS) sieves by not more than 5 % and on 150 micron sieve by not more then 20 % It shall be regarded as failing within then zone. This five percent can be split up for another or four percent one sieve and one percent on another. The maximum quantity of slit shall not exceed 5 %

ISSieve Designation Percentage passing for

Grading Grading Grading Grading Zone I Zone II Zone III ZoneIV

10 mm 100 100 100 100 4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 90-100 2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100 1.8 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100 600 microns 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100 300 microns 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50 300 microns 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15 Note. Find aggregate conforming to grading zone III &IV shall not be used in reinforced concrete

unless tests have been made to ascertain the suitability of proposed mix proportions. Bricks. Shall conform to IS 1077 for compressive strength and water absorption. Bricks shall be Local best quality approved by the architect, well burnt, sound, hard square and with sharp arises and shall give a ringing sound when struck with a mallet. The average water absorption shall not be more then 1/6th by weight after 24 hours immersion in water. Bricks shall be stacked in regular tiers as and when they are unloaded to minimize breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site. Bricks stacks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required to unload and transport the bricks again by loading on pallets or in barrows. Building bricks shall be loaded or unloaded a pair at a time unless palletized. Unloading of building bricks or handling in any other way likely to damage the corners or edges or other parts of bricks shall not be permitted. Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground. For proper inspection of quality and ease in counting the stacks shall be 50 bricks long, 10 bricks high and not more than 4 bricks in width, the bricks being placed on edge, two at a time along the width of the stack. Clear distance between adjacent stacks shall not be less than 0.8m. Bricks of each truck load shall be put in one stack. Bricks of different types, such as clay bricks, clay fly ash bricks, fly ash lime bricks, sand lime (calcium silicate) bricks, auto-clave bricks etc. shall be stacked separately. Bricks of different classification and size consideration (such as, conventional and modular) shall be stacked separately. Also bricks of different types, such as, solid, hollow and perforated shall be stacked separately.



of 173

Blocks Blocks are available as hollow and solid concrete blocks, hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks, autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, concrete stone masonry blocks and soil-based blocks. Blocks shall be unloaded one at a time and stacked in regular tiers to minimize breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site. The height of the stack shall not be more than 1.2m. The length of the stack shall not be more than 3.0 m, as far as possible and the width shall be of two or three blocks. Blocks cured for 28 days only should be received at site. All blocks should be water cured for 10 to 14 days and air cured for another 15 days; thus, no blocks with less than 28 days curing shall be used in building construction. Blocks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required for their transportation. Blocks manufactured at site shall be stacked at least for required minimum curing period as mentioned above. The date of manufacture of the blocks shall be suitably marked on the stacks of blocks manufactured at factory or site. Floor, Wall and Roof Tiles Floor, wall and clay roof tiles of different types, such as, cement concrete tiles (plain, coloured and terrazzo) and ceramic tiles (glazed and unglazed) shall be stacked on regular platform as far as possible under cover in proper layers and in tiers and they shall not be dumped in heaps. In the stack, the tiles shall be so placed that the mould surface of one face that of another. Height of the stack shall not be more than one metre. During unloading, these shall be handled carefully so as to avoid breakage. Tiles of different quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately to facilitate easy removal for use in work. Tiles when supplied by manufacturers packed in wooden crates, shall be stored in crates. The crates shall be opened one at a time as and when required for use. Ceramic tiles and clay roof tiles are generally supplied in cartons which shall be handled with care. It is preferable to transport these at the site on platform trolleys. Glazing glass. Shall be patent flattened sheet of float glass of approved make of the best quality plain or ground glass, free from flaws, specks, bubbles. It is important that all glass sheets whether stored in crates or not shall be kept dry. Suitable covered storage space shall be provided for the safe storage of the glass sheets. In removing glass sheets from crates, great care shall be taken to avoid damages. The glass sheets shall be lifted and stored on its long edges against a vertical wall or other support with the first sheet so placed that its bottom edge is 25 mm from the vertical support. The stacks shall be of not more than 25 panes and shall be supported at two points by fillets of wood at 300 mm from each end. The whole stack shall be as close and as upright as possible. The glass sheets of different sizes, thickness and type shall be stacked separately. The distance between any two stacks shall be of the order of 400 mm. Timber Shall be of best quality as specified in the schedule of quantities. Kiln seasoned, free from sap wood, should straight, free from large and loose knots, cracks, shakes and any appearance of rot and any other defect and shall not be placed in position covered in the wall or ground unless it has been approved by Architects. The maximum permissible limits of moisture contents shall conform to IS:287-1973. Doors, Windows and Ventilators: While unloading, shifting handling and stacking timber or other lignocellulosic material based, metal and plastic door and window frames and shutters, care shall be

taken that the material is not dragged one over the other as it may cause damage to the surface of the



of 173

material particularly in the case of decorative shutters. The material should be lifted and carried preferably flat avoiding damage of corners or sides. Metal and plastic doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upright (on their sills) on level ground preferably on wooden battens and shall not come in contact with dirt and ashes. If received in crates they shall be stacked according to manufacturer’s instructions and removed from the crates as and when required for the work. Metal and plastic frames of doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upside down with the kick plates at the top. These shall not be allowed to stand for long in this manner before being fixed so as to avoid the door frames getting out of shape and hinges being strained and shutters drooping. During the period of storage all metal doors, windows and ventilators shall be protected from loose cement and mortar by suitable covering such as tarpaulin. The tarpaulin shall be hung loosely on temporary framing to permit circulation of air to prevent condensation. All timber and other lignocellulosic material-based frames and shutters shall be stored in a dry and clean covered space away from any infestation and dampness. The storage shall preferably be in well ventilated dry rooms. The frames shall be stacked one over the other in vertical stacks with cross battens at regular distances to keep the stack vertical and straight. These cross battens should be of uniform thickness and placed vertically one above the other. The door shutters shall be stacked in the form of clean vertical stacks over the other and at least 80 mm above ground on pallets or suitable beams or rafters. The top of the stack shall be covered by a protecting cover and weighted down by means of scantlings or other suitable weights. The shutter stack shall rest on hard and level ground. If any timber or other lignocellulosic material-based frame or shutter becomes wet during transit, it shall be kept separate from the undamaged material. The wet material may be dried by stacking in shade with battens in between adjacent boards with free access of dry air generally following the guidance laid down in IS 1141. Separate stacks shall be built up for each size, each grade and each type of material. When materials of different sizes grades and types are to be stacked in one stack due to shortage of space, the bigger size shall be stacked in the lower portion of the stacks. Suitable pallets or separating battens shall be kept in between the two types of material. Flush doors: Shall be of kiln seasoned timber, of solid core construction with a frame, lock rail and well balanced breaking and shall be faced with high quality commercial or teak veneering as specified. They shall be thermosetting synthetic resin bound. The flush doors shall be of approved make with 37 mm (or as specified in the Schedule of quantities or drawings) minimum teak wood lipping glued and machine pressed along with core. Factory made flushed doors of appropriate size and approved quality shall be used after approval from the Project Engineer / Architect in writing. Steel windows and doors. Shall be made from mild steel sections of approved make free from rolling defects. All steel doors and windows shall conform to IS:1038-1975 unless otherwise provided. Steel section should be cold straightened and such as to be easily punched and welded. All joints to be through welded. Aluminium window doors and glazing. Shall be made from extruded Aluminium sections and shall be of approved make. Aluminium sections of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately, on a level platform under cover. The aluminium sections shall not be pulled or pushed from the stack nor shall be slide over each other, to protect the anodizing layer. Roofing Sheets Roofing sheets shall be stored and handled in such a manner as not do damage them in anyway. Corrugated galvanized iron sheets and aluminium sheets shall be stacked horizontally to a height of



of 173

not more than 0.5 m on a firm and level ground, with timber or other packing beneath them. To protect them from dust and rain water, these shall be covered with tarpaulin or polyethylene sheets. Plastic sheets and glass reinforced plastic (GRP) sheets shall be stacked under a shed to a height of not more than 0.5 m on a firm and level ground with timber or other packing beneath them. Gypsum boards, Plywood, Fibreboard, Particle Board, Blockboard etc. These boards shall be stored flat in a covered clean and dry place. Different sizes and types of each of these boards shall be stacked separately. The board shall be stacked on a flat platform on which a wooden frame shall be constructed with 50mm x 25 mm battens in such a way that it will give support to all four edges and corners of the boards with intermediate battens placed at suitable intervals to avoid warping. The boards shall be stacked in a solid block in a clear vertical alignment. The top sheet of each stack shall be suitably weighed down to prevent warping wherever necessary. The boards shall be unloaded and stacked with utmost care avoiding damage to the corners and surface. In case of decorative plywood and decorative boards, the surfaces of which are likely to get damaged by dragging one sheet over another it is advisable that these are lifted as far as possible in pairs facing each other. Pipes and Fittings The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required when the trenches are ready to receive them. Storage shall be done on firm, level and clear ground and wedges shall be provided at the bottom layer to keep the stack stable. The stack shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes length-wise and cross-wise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack is advisable in smaller diameter pipes for conserving space in storing them. The height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m each stack shall contain only pipes of same class and size, with consignment or batch number marked on it with particulars of suppliers wherever possible. Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away from grease, oil heat and light. Unplasticized PVC Pipes: The pipe should be given adequate support at all times. Pipes should be stored on a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported throughout its length. In storage, pipe racks should be avoided. Pipe should not be stacked in large piles, especially under warm temperature conditions as the bottom pipes may distort, thus giving rise to difficulty in jointing. Socket and spigot pipes should be stacked in layers with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lopsided stacks. It is recommended not to store pipe inside another pipe. On no account should pipes be stored in a stressed or bent condition or near the sources of heat. Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 m high. Pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately. The ends of pipe should be protected from abrasion particularly those specially prepared for jointing either spigot or socket solvent welded joints or shouldered for use with couplings. In tropical conditions, pipes should be stored in shade. In very cold weather, the impact strength of PVC is reduced making it brittle and more care in handling shall be exercised in wintry condition. If due to unsatisfactory storage of handling a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged portion should be cut out completely. Kinking is likely to occur only on very thin walled pipes. Tar felts. Shall comply with IS: 11322 – 1970 of Hessian base type – 3 Grade-I, or type – 3 grade-II or approved well known make, unless otherwise specified. All types of bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc, in drums or containers shall be stacked vertically on their bottoms in up to 3 tiers. Leaky drums shall be segregated. Empty drums shall be stored in pyramidal stacks neatly in rows. Paints. These shall be of standard manufacture approved by Project Engineer / Architects conforming to the latest Indian Standards. All containers of paints, thinners and allied materials shall preferably be stored in a separate room on floors with sand cushions. The room shall be well-ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks of flame and direct rays of sun. The containers of paint shall be kept covered or properly fitted with lid and shall not be kept open except while using. The containers of paints have expiry date marked by the manufacturers, which should be highlighted so as to facilitate use of paint within due period.



of 173

Other Materials Small articles like nails, screws, nuts and bolts, door and window fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare parts of machinery, linings, packing, water supply and sanitary fittings, electrical fittings, insulation board, etc, shall be kept in suitable and properly protected store rooms. Valuable small material such as, copper pipes and fittings shall be kept under lock and key. Sanitary Appliances All sanitary appliances shall be carefully stored under cover to prevent damage. When accepting and storing appliances, advance planning shall be made regarding the sequence of removal from the store to the assembly positions. Supporting brackets shall be so stored as to be readily accessible for use with the appliances. Water. Shall be clean and free from excessive salinity, impurities/ ingredients and other harmful masters duly tested in an approved Laboratory declared suitable for construction purpose as per IS 456 :2000 and as approved by Architects. Wherever water is to be stored for construction purposes this shall be done in proper storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities getting mixed up with it. Testing of materials and works. For ascertaining the quality of materials, compressive strength of concrete cubes and other routine tests, the Tenderer shall establish a field laboratory. The lab shall be equipped with the apparatus as listed in the latest CPWD specifications. The tests which cannot be performed at site lab or as and when required by the Project Engineer / Architects, the Tenderer shall arrange to test materials and/ or portions or works at his own cost to prove their soundness and efficient. If after tests any materials, work or portions of work are considered defective or unsound by the Architects the Tenderer shall remove the defective material from the site, pull down and re-execute the works at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Project Engineer / Architect. To prove, that the materials used are as specified the Tenderer shall furnish to Architects with original vouchers on demand. All materials and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the Contract and in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions, The Tenderer shall provide such assistance, labour, electricity, fuels, stores, apparatus and instruments as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any materials or Plant and shall supply samples of materials, before incorporation in the Works, for testing as may be selected and required by the Engineer. The Tenderer shall furnish to the Engineer all certificates, invoices, accounts, Vouchers, etc., to prove that the materials are of the quality specified. Samples All samples shall be supplied by the Tenderer at his own cost if the supply thereof is clearly intended by or provided for in the Contract. Where materials and fittings are specified to be “approved”, samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at the earliest possible date after notification of acceptance of the Tenderer’s tender and before any orders or bulk delivery of such materials and fittings to the Site is made. All samples, which are approved, will indicate the standard to be maintained in the execution of the Works and shall be so marked and retained by the Engineer until the Completion of the Contract.

Cost of Tests The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Tenderer if such test is clearly intended by or provided for in the Contract. The testing Materials and requirement of Material test certificates is enclosed as below



of 173

Material Test Requirements

S.N Material Frequency Tests to be conducted 1 Cement Every 7500

Bags Physical tests at external Lab but Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential

2 R/F Steel Fe 500 Every 10 T of Each dia

Physical test and Unit weight at External Lab But Unit weight [ Rolling margin] for every batch and Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential

3 Bricks Every 25000 No Every 10000 No

Compressive strength & Efflorescence Water Absorption at external lab

4 Sand and Aggregates Every 25M3 for each material

Once for each source Deleterious materials, Water absorption, Specific gravity

Gradation or Sieve analysis for Sand and Aggregate

Visual inspection for silt content, flaky and elongated particles and over size

5 Water Once or change of source

As per IS 456 – 2000 at external lab

6 Cube testing 7 days and 28 days compressive strength

Sampling of Cubes at site for different grades [ One set – 6 Cubes 3 for 7days and 3 for 28 days]

05—10M3 = One set

11 – 20M3 = Two Set

21 - - 40M3= Three Set

> 41M3 = Four Set Minimum Cube moulds required – 30 No

7 Anti-termite Chemical Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential 8 Water proofing Materials Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential 9 Cables / Wires Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential 10 Pipes / Conduits Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate for every batch is essential 11 Kota stone / Ceramic tiles Every batch Visual inspection for thickness, colour, Shade and size 12 Aluminum Sections Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate for sections used and

anodizing thickness 13 Steel door frames /

Windows Every batch Visit fabricator shop and check the lot of raw materials

for thickness, unit weight as per IS Standard 14 Glass Every batch Visual inspection for thickness, warping or bubbles 15 Flush Shutters Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate 16 Electrical, plumbing and

sanitary fittings Every batch Manufacturer’s test certificate

Tenderer shall establish a Site laboratory consisting of minimum equipment as below

1. Electronic Weigh balance up to 10 Kg 2. Cube testing of Capacity – 100KN 3. Slump Cone -01 4. IS Sieve set for Sand and Coarse aggregate 5. Curing tank for Concrete Cubes and Bricks 6. Measuring Jars for checking silt – 2 No



of 173

Quality during Execution: The check list system will be deployed for all important activities to ensure the construction of each activity meets the specification and relevant IS Codes. Any non-conformity found during inspection, the same will be corrected. However, the signing of Checklist will not absolve the Tenderer from rectifying the defective work and cannot claim any extra cost against the rectification.



of 173

EXECUTION PART

ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT Sub-terranean termites are responsible for most of the termite damage in buildings. Typically, they form nests or colonies underground. In the soil near ground level in a stump or other suitable piece of timber in a conical or dome shaped mound. The termites find access to the super-structure of the building either through the timber buried in the ground or by means of mud shelter tubes constructed over unprotected foundations. Termite control in existing as well as new building structures is very important as the damage likely to be caused by the termites to wooden members of building and other household article like furniture, clothing, stationery etc. is considerable. Anti-termite treatment can be either during the time of construction i.e. pre-constructional chemical treatment or after the building has been constructed i.e. treatment for existing building. Prevention of the termite from reaching the super-structure of the building and its contents can be achieved by creating a chemical barrier between the ground, from where the termites come and other contents of the building which may form food for the termites. This is achieved by treating the soil beneath the building and around the foundation with a suitable insecticide. Materials Chemicals: Any one of the following chemicals in water emulsion to achieve the percentage concentration specified against each chemical shall be used:

Chlorphriphos emulsifiable concentrate of 20%

Lindane emulsifiable concentrate of 20% Anti-termite treatment chemical is available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is indicated on the sealed containers. To achieve the specified percentage of concentration, Chemical should be diluted with water in required quantity before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical with water in the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of concentration. For example, to dilute chemical of 20% concentration. 19 parts of water shall be added to one part of chemical for achieving 1% concentration. Termite Proofing shall be done by a specialized agency for doing so. Any one of the following chemicals (as specified in water emulsion) shall be used or any other as approved by the architect and engineer incharge. Chemicals shall be brought to site of work in sealed original containers. The materials shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantity to suffice for the whole or at least a fortnight’s work. Pre-Construction Chemical Treatment. This is a process in which chemical treatment applied to a building in the early stages of its construction. Hand operated pressure pump shall be used for uniform spraying of the chemical. To have proper check for uniform spraying of chemical, graduated containers shall be used.

Time of application. Soil treatment should starts when foundation and pits are ready to take mass concrete in foundations. Laying or mass concrete should start when the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet with rain or sub-soil water. The foregoing applies also in the case of treatment to the filled earth surface within the plinth before laying the sub-grade for the floor.



of 173

Disturbance. The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by chance, treated soil barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the completeness of the barrier system. Treatment of Column-pits, Walls, trenches, excavations etc. The bottom surface and the sides (upto a height of about 300 mm) of the elevations made for column pits, wall trenchers and basement shall be treated with the chemical at the rate of 25 liters per sqm of the surface area. After the column foundations and the retaining wall of the basement come up the back fill in immediate contact, with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 liters per sqm of the vertical surface of the sub-structure for each side. If water is used for ramming each fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at 150 mm centers close to the wall surface and spraying the chemical with the above dose. The earth is usually returned in layers and the treatment shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemicals emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete or masonry surfaces of the columns and walls so that the earth in contract with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical. In the case of R.C.C. framed structures with columns and plinth beams and RCC basements the concrete mix is rich and dense (being 1:2:4 or richer), it is unnecessary to start the treatment from the bottom of excavations for columns and plinth beams. The treatment shall be at the depth of 500 mm below ground level. From this depth the back fill around the columns, beams, and RCC basement walls, shall be treated @15 liters/sqm. Of the vertical surface. The other details of treatment shall be as laid down in clause (b) above.

Treatment of top surface of plinth Filling. The tap surface of the filled earth with plinth wall shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 4 liters per sqm. Of the surface before the sand/sub-grade is laid. Holes upto 50 to 75 mm deep at 150 mm deep at 150 mm centers both ways shall be made with crow bars on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion. Treatment at junction of wall and floor. To achieve continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on inner walls surfaces from the ground level, small channel 30 x 30 mm shall be making at all the junctions of wall and column with floor (before laying the sub-grade) and rod holes made in the channel upto ground level 150 mm apart and chemical emulsion poured along the channel @ 15 liters/sqm. Or the vertical wall or column surfaces so as to soak the soil right to bottom. The soil shall be tamped back into place after this operation.

Treatment of soil along external perimeter of building. After the building is complete. Provide holes in the soil with iron rods along with external perimeter of the building at intervals of about 150 mm and depth 300 mm and filling these holes with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 liter per meter of perimeter of the external wall. Treatment for expansion joints. Anti-termite treatment shall be supplemented by treating through the expansion joint after the sub-grate has been laid @ 2 liters per linear meter of expansion joint. Safety Precautions. All chemical used for anti-termite treatment are poisonous and hazardous to heath. These chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin inhaled as vapour or spray mists or swallowed. Person using or handing these chemicals should be warned of these dangers and advised that absorption through skin is the most likely source of accidental poisoning. They should be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions given below. These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable concentrator. The containers should be clearly labeled and should be stored carefully so those children and pet cannot get at them. They should be kept securely closed.



of 173

Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contract with concentrates. Prolonged exposure to dilute emulsions should also be avoided. Workers should wear clean clothing and should wash thoroughly with soap and water, especially before eating and smoking. In the event of serve contamination, clothing should be removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water. If chemical splash into the eye they shall be flushed with plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention should be sought. The concentrates are all solution and present a fire hazard owning to the use of petroleum solvents. Flames should not be allowed during mixing. Care should be taken in the application of chemical to see that they are not allowed contaminate wells or spring, which serve as sources of drinking water. The work of anti-termite treatment shall be got executed by a specialist firm which must be a member of IPCA and approved by the Architect/Project Director and shall be carried out as per IS : 6313 (Part II ) of 1981 for pre-construction soil treatment .The firm shall render a Ten Year guarantee to the Employer through the Tenderer who will be the principal guarantor. The period of ten year shall be reckoned from the date of completion of the contract. The Guarantor (Specialist Firm) shall give the guarantee on Non-Judicial stamp paper of value of Rs. 100/-. The Guarantor (Principal Guarantor) shall give the guarantee on a Non-Judicial stamp paper of value of Rs. 100/- EARTH WORK

The Tenderer shall furnish all tools, plant instruments, qualified supervisory personnel, labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables, any and everything necessary, whether or not such items are specifically stated herein for completion of the work in accordance with the Employer's Requirements. The Tenderer shall survey the site before excavation and set out all lines and establish levels for various works such as grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains, cable trenches, pipelines etc. Such survey shall be carried out by taking accurate cross sections of the area perpendicular to established reference/grid lines at 8 m intervals or nearer. If necessary, based on ground profile and thereafter properly recorded. The excavation shall be carried out to correct lines and levels. This shall also include where required proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night. Excavated material shall be dumped in regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular slopes within the lead specified and leveling the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/soil excavated shall be stacked properly as approved by the Employer's Representative. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid along the center of heaps, the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately. Topsoil shall be stock piled separately for later re-use.

Site Clearance.

Before the earth work is started, the area coming under cutting and filling shall be cleared of shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up to 30cm measured at a height of one meter above ground level and rubbish removed up to a distance of 50 meters outside the periphery of the area under clearance. The roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60cm below ground level or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below sub grade level, whichever is lower, and the holes or hollows filled up with the earth, rammed and leveled. The trees of girth above 30 cm measured at a height of one meter above ground shall be cut only after permission of the Engineer-in-Charge is obtained in writing. The roots of trees shall also be removed as specified above. Existing structures and services such as old buildings, culverts, fencing, water supply pipe lines, sewers, power cables, communication cables, drainage pipes etc. within or adjacent to the area if required to be diverted/removed, shall be diverted /dismantled as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge and



of 173

payment for such diversion/dismantling works shall be made separately. The Tenderer shall provide all labour and materials for site clearance at this own cost.

SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILES A masonry pillar to serve as a bench mark will be erected at a suitable point in the area, which is visible from the largest area. This bench mark shall be constructed as per Fig. 2.1 and connected with the standard bench mark as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Necessary profiles with strings stretched on pegs, bamboos or ‘Burjis’ shall be made to indicate the correct formation levels before the work is started. The Tenderer shall supply labour and material for constructing bench mark, setting out and making profiles and connecting bench mark with the standard bench mark at his own cost. The pegs, bamboos or ‘Burjis’ and the bench mark shall be maintained by the Tenderer at his own cost during the excavation to check the profiles.

Bench mark and levels. The Tenderer shall lay out one or more permanent bench mark in some central place before start of the work, from which all important levels exact bed levels for the excavation will be set. The Tenderer shall provide all labour and material for setting levels and profiles at his own cost. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Tenderer of his responsibility for the accuracy thereof and the Tenderer shall carefully protect and preserve all bench-marks, sight-rails, pegs and other things used in setting-out the Works. Levelling site. The ground levels after site clearance shall be taken before the start of the work and recorded in a level book duly signed by the Tenderer and the Engineer. Similarly, final levels shall be taken and recorded in the level book signed by the Tenderer and the engineer. The quantities shall be computed by averages method. The cross-sections shall be taken at every 15 M apart in both directions in a fairly level ground and in an undulating ground cross-section shall be taken at closer distances to be decided by the architect/consultants. All useful materials such a gravel, stone, relics of antiquity, coins, fossils. Etc. met with during excavation shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be handed over to the engineer on behalf of the Employer all cutting shall be done from top to bottom. No under mining shall be permitted. Cutting shall be done to precise levels and any cutting taken deeper shall be made good to the required levels without any extra cost. The final surface shall be neatly dressed.



of 173

Excavation in All Kind of Soil All excavation operations manually or by mechanical means shall include excavation and ‘getting out’ the excavated materials. In case of excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’ shall include throwing the excavated materials at a distance of at least one metre or half the depth of excavation, whichever is more, clear off the edge of excavation. In all other cases ‘getting out’ shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The subsequent disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate item or included with the items of excavation stating lead. During the excavation the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained. Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not be done. In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical upto a depth of 2 metres from the bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 50 cms on either side after every 2 metres from the bottom. Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to give slope of 1:4 (1 horizontal: 4 vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the tenderer to take complete instructions in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the stepping, sloping or shoring to be done for excavation deeper than2 metres. The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated by the Engineer in-Charge. Only the excavation shown on the drawings with additional allowances for centring and shuttering or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be measured and recorded for payment. In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation shall be to the correct level or slope and consolidated by watering and ramming. If the excavation for foundation is done to a depth greater than that shown in the drawings or as required by the Engineer-in -Charge, the excess depth shall be made good by the tenderer at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for levelling/ bed concrete for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the bed of the foundations shall be



of 173

dugout and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Excavation in trenches. The foundation trenches shall be excavated to the exact width of the lowest step of the foundation or footing as shown on drawing. The sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical and bottom horizontal both transversely and longitudinally as shown on the drawings. Steps shall be squarely benches out as shown on the drawings or as directed by the architects. The excavated earth shall be deposited at least three meter or 1/3rd or depth away from the edge of excavation whichever is more. Working space on the outer periphery, if required shall be proved by the Tenderer as per IS Code and shall be paid as per actuals or as per I.S. code whichever is less. The bed of the trenches shall be made level and compact by watering and ramming, any soft and defective spots detected shall be filled with concrete of the mix as specified for foundations or as directed by the Architects. Cost of such concrete shall be paid to the Tenderer. In case excavation is taken deeper than required, the depth shall be made good with concrete as specified of foundation or as directed by the Architects at no extra cost to the Employer. The Tenderer shall at his expense without extra charges shall make provision for all shoring, strutting, close or open timbering, pumping, dredging, or bailing out water and the trenches shall be kept free form water during the work in foundations is complete and trenches refilled. The trenches shall be inspected and passed before concrete is placed.

The measurements shall be the exact length and width of the lowest stop of the trench of footings as shown on the drawing including the working space and depth, shall be measured vertically. The extra earth-work done by the Tenderer, providing steps etc. and earth work done in making ramps/ steps as approach to work place shall not be measured and paid for.

Excavation in rock: Rock is not likely to meet during excavation. However, in case it is met, the specification for earthwork shall apply to excavation in rock in general. The cutting in rock shall be by chiseling, wedging or any other method (except blasting) to the required width and depths as directed by the architects. The measurement of rock when made from stacks which shall be made with the spoils shall be reduced by 50 % for voids for payments as excavation the rock spoil shall remain the property of the Employer.

Classification of soils: If soils of any classification other than specified in the schedule of quantities is met with during excavation, no work shall be done until the decision of the architects as to the classification of soil, level or the strata of different classification and their location is obtained in writing. The materials to be excavated shall be classified as follows:

(a) Soft, loose soil: Such as vegetable or organic soil, tuff, gravel, sand silt, loam, clay peat etc. which

yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, Pharwa, rake or other ordinary digging implements.

(b) Hard Dense soil: Such as stiff clay, gravel and rock fragment usually rounded or semi rounded having maximum diameter between 80 to 300 mm which require the close application of picks or jumpers or scarifier and rippers to loosen.

(c) Soft Disintegrated rock: Rock or boulders, which do not require blasting but can be quarried or split with crow bars such a laterite and hard Conglomerate.

(d) Hard rock: Any rock or boulder, which require blasting or chiseling. Where levels for different soil strata cannot be clearly marked and defined the Tenderer shall stack different soil of various classifications separately for measurement purposes and then dispose off as directed.



of 173

Earth Filling: Filling can be in the sides of foundation trenches, under floors and for site formation. The earth to be used for filling shall be free from salt peter, organic or other foreign matter. The space round the foundations in trenches and under floors shall be cleared of all debris, brick pieces or any other rubbish, surplus mortar falls etc. Filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 150 mm thickness. Each layer shall be well watered and rammed to the satisfaction of the architects. The degree of compaction shall be 95% of Proctor density when the samples from core cutting collected and tested on random basis. Final surface shall be neatly dressed. The earth filling shall be computed from levels recorded before start of filling; and after completion of filling. The quantity so computed shall be paid with deduction of 1/3 as mentioned above for open site formation and without any deduction of 1/13 filling under floors i.e. in confined situation. Sand filling: sand filling shall be done, measured and paid in the same manner as earth filling as described in the foregoing Hard core: Shall either be of stone ballast, gravel or stone rubble of size mentioned in the schedule of quantities and shall be free from dust and other impurities. Hard core of stone ballasts not exceeding 40 mm gauge shall be laid in required thickness dry rolled and consolidated with a power roller to the satisfaction of the architects unless otherwise specified in the schedule of quantities. Hard core of rubble stone shall be laid, with stones of required height vertically, closely and hand packed with smaller pieces and/or stone ballast 40 mm gauge as direct by the Architects and consolidated dry with a ten-ton power roller unless otherwise specified in the schedule of quantities to the satisfaction of the Architects/Consultants. Disposal of excavated soil: Where in the schedule of quantities the disposal of excavated soil is specified to be measured and paid for separately, the quantity of disposal of earth, rock etc., shall not exceed the quantity paid as excavation i.e the element of bulkage is not to be reflected in the measurements for disposal but is to be accounted for in the rates quoted for disposal. All the materials such as earth, moorum, soft/hard rock, etc. are to be kept separately for classification and payment of disposal. The Tenderer shall maintain detailed charts showing the origin and place of disposal of soil for calculation of lead for disposal. No separate payment shall be made for re-excavation or loosening of excavated soil for disposal and transportation due to its having become hard or consolidated due to passage of time, rains or any other cause whatsoever. The lead shall be measured by shortest route possible.

Backfilling and Compaction

Backfilling shall be done in layers not more than 150mm and compacted with 95% proctor density. All lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be broken. Each layer shall be watered and consolidated with steel rammer or ½ tonne roller. Where specified, every third and top must layer shall also be consolidated with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes. Wherever depth of filling exceeds 1.5 metre vibratory power roller shall be used to consolidate the filing unless otherwise directed by Engineer-in-charge. The top and sides of filling shall be neatly dressed. The tenderer shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in earth fillings, embankments, traverses etc. during execution and till the completion of work unless otherwise specified.



of 173

The earth used for filling shall be free from all roots, grass, shrubs, rank vegetation, brushwood, tress, sapling and rubbish. Measurement The length and breadth of excavation or filling shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest cm. The depth of cutting or height of filling shall be measured, correct to 5 mm, by recording levels before the start of the work and after the completion of the work. The cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic metres. In case of open footings up to the depth of 1.5 metres, all-round excavation of 30 cm. beyond the outer dimension of footing shall be measured for payment to make allowances for centring and shuttering. Any additional excavation beyond this limit shall be at the risk and cost of the tenderer and shall not be measured for payment. In case of open footings/Rafts at a depth of more than 1.5 metre, all-round excavation of 75 cm shall be measured for payment to make allowance for centring and shuttering. Additional excavation beyond this limit shall be at the risk and cost of the tenderer and shall not be measured for payment. In case the ground is fairly uniform and where the site is not required to be levelled, the Engineer- in-Charge may permit the measurements of depth of cutting or height of filling with steel tape, correct to the nearest cm. In case of borrow pits, diagonal ridges, cross ridges or dead-men, the position of which shall be fixed by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be left by the tenderer to permit accurate measurements being taken with steel tape on the completion of the work Deduction of such ridges and dead men shall be made from the measurements unless the same are required to be removed later on and the earth so removed is utilized in the work. In the latter case nothing extra will be paid for their removal as subsequent operation. Where ordinary rock and hard rock are mixed. The measurement of the excavation shall be made as specified as above. The two kinds of rock shall be stacked separately and measured in stacks. The net quantity of the two kinds of rocks shall be arrived at by applying deduction of 50% to allow for voids in stacks. If the sum of net quantity of two kinds of rocks exceeds the total quantity of the excavated material then the quantity for each type of rock shall be worked out from the total quantity in the ratio of net quantities in stack measurements of the two types of rocks. If in the opinion of the Engineering- in-charge stacking is not feasible, the quantity of ordinary and hard rock shall be worked out by means of cross-sectional measurements. CONCRETE WORK Reinforced cement concrete work may be cast-in-situ or pre-cast as directed. Reinforced cement concrete work shall comprise of the following which may be paid separately or collectively as per description of the item of work (a) Form work (b) bending, binding and placing reinforcement (c) Concrete (d) plastering or other finishing on concrete surface. Scope: This specification covers reinforced cement concrete work both cast-in-situ or pre-cast and related work in sections, form work and reinforcement, special requirements for shell/ folded plate construction, architecturally exposed concrete are also included. Reference publication: The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of this specification. Publication referred to herein shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. In case of discrepancy, between this specification and those referred to herein, this specification shall govern.



of 173

MATERIALS Cement IS 269 - Ordinary and low heat Portland Cement. Grade 43 IS 455 - Portland slag cement. IS 8041 - Rapid hardening Portland cement. IS 1489 - Portland Pozzolana Cement. IS 8112 - High strength ordinary Portland cement. IS 8043 - Hydrophobic Portland cement. IS 6909 - Super sulphated cement Testing of cement IS 4031 - Physical Tests of Hydraulic cement. IS 650 - Standard sand for testing of cement. Aggregates IS 383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete. IS 2386 Method of test (part 1 to VIII) for aggregates for concrete. Concrete IS 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete. IS 516 Methods of test for strength of concrete. IS 1881 (part VI) Analysis of hardened concrete. Water IS 3025 Method of sampling and test for water used in industry. Steel IS 432 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel

wire for concrete reinforcement. IS 1139 Hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield

strength steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement. IS 1786 Cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement. IS 1566 Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement. Admixtures IS 2645 Integral cement Waterproofing compound. IS 9103 Admixtures for concrete. Codes of Practice IS 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete. IS 3696 (Part I 7 II) Safety code for scaffolds and ladders. IS 1200 Method of measurement of building and civil engineer works. IS 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concrete. ASTN-94 Ready mixed concrete. The latest edition of Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be applicable



of 173

General The Engineer shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations including the sources of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment and the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and the Engineer's approval obtained, prior to starting of concrete work. This shall, however, not relieve the Tenderer of any of his responsibilities. All materials which do not conform to the Specifications shall be rejected. Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements of strength, serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the functional requirements and the environmental conditions to which the structure will be subjected. Materials complying with codes/standards shall generally be used. Other materials may be used after approval of the Engineer and after establishing their performance suitability based on previous data, experience or tests. Materials Cement Unless otherwise called for by the Engineer, cement shall be 43 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS: 8112. For other works use of PPC cement can be allowed subject to approval by Engineer in charge. Only one make of cement out of the list of makes shall be used in anyone mix. The source of supply, type or brand of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be changed without approval from the Employer's Representative. Cement which is not used within 90 days from its date of manufacture shall be tested at a laboratory approved by the Employer's Representative and until the results of such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work. Cement used for structure shall be OPC 43 grade cement. Aggregates (General) Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones (crushed or uncrushed), gravel and sand. They shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, clean, durable against weathering, of limited porosity, free from dust/slit/organic impurities/deleterious materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, slate, clay alkali, soft fragments, sea shells and conform to IS: 383. Aggregates such as slag, crushed over burnt bricks, bloated clay aggregates, sintered fly ash and tiles shall not be used. Aggregates shall be washed and screened before use where necessary or if directed by the Engineer. Aggregates containing reactive silica shall not be used. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings but in no case greater than 1/4 of the minimum thickness of the member. Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable size may be used in mass concrete fill where directed. Plums shall not constitute more than 20% by volume of the concrete when specifically permitted. The plums shall be distributed evenly and shall not be closer than 160 mm from the surface. For heavily reinforced concrete members as in the case of ribs of main beams the nominal maximum size of aggregate shall be restricted to 5 mm less than minimum clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to reinforcement whichever is smaller. Coarse and fine aggregates shall preferably batch separately, Specially for design mix concrete. The largest possible size, properly graded aggregates should be used in order to reduce water demand. Grade aggregate, all in aggregate shall conform to CPWD specifications. Fine aggregates are divided into 4 zones. Typical good sand falls in Zone II grading, however, finer or coarse sand may be used with suitable adjustment in the ratio of quantities of coarse to fine aggregates. Very fine sands as included in Zone IV grading should not be used except when the concrete is closely controlled by design mixes.



of 173

Water Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS: 456 and free from injurious amounts of oils1 acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6. Reinforcement Reinforcement shall be TMT High strength bars and wires (FE500 or more). All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or other coatings which may destroy or reduce bond. Makes of steel shall be as per the list of makes. For concrete elements subject to very severe aggressive environments, special precautions like use of fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforced bars shall be taken. Admixtures Accelerating, retarding, water reducing and air entraining admixtures shall conform to IS: 9103 and integral water proofing admixtures to IS : 2645.Admixtures may be used in concrete as per manufacturer's instructions only with the approval of the Engineer. An admixture's suitability and effectiveness shall be verified by trial mixes with the other materials used in the works. If two or more admixtures are to be used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, their interaction shall be checked and trial mixes done to ensure their compatibility. There should also be no increase in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedment. Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete containing reinforcement or embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted such as in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water by an amount not exceeding 1.5 percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. The designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly.

Samples and Tests All materials used for the works shall be tested before use. Manufacturer's test certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement/steel and when directed by the Engineer samples shall also be got tested by the Tenderer in a laboratory approved by the Engineer at no extra cost to Employer. Sampling and testing shall be as per IS : 2386 under the supervision of the Engineer’s representative. Water to be used shall be tested to comply with requirements of IS: 456. The Tenderer shall furnish manufacturer's test certificates and technical literature for the admixture proposed to be used. If directed, the admixture shall be got tested at an approved laboratory at no extra cost.

Storing of Materials All materials shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter and to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for use in the work. Materials shall also be protected against atmospheric agencies, fire and other hazards. The Tenderer will have to make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate quantity of cement. If such cement is not stored properly and has deteriorated, the material shall be rejected. Cement bags shall be stored in dry weatherproof and as moisture proof as possible shed with a raised floor, well away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid moisture from ground. (clear above floor 200 mm and space of 450 mm minimum around/ between bags and external wall). Not more than 15 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The width of the stack shall not be more than 4 bags length of 3 m. In stacks



of 173

more than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall be arranged alternately lengthwise and cross wise so as to tie the stacks together and minimize danger of toppling over. Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in order in which they are received. During the monsoon or when it is expected to be stored for a long period, the stack shall be completely enclosed be a water proofing membrane. Different types of cements shall be stored separately. Storage arrangement shall be approved by the Engineer. Storage under tarpaulins shall not be permitted. Each consignment of cement shall be stored separately and consumed in its order of receipt. Each size of coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately and shall be protected from leaves and contamination with foreign material. The stacks shall be on hard clean, free draining bases, draining away from the concrete mixing area. If such a surface is not available a platform of planks or corrugated sheet or a floor of dry bricks or a thick layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent the admixture of clay dust, vegetable and other foreign matter. Stacking of aggregate should be carried out in regular sizes. The Tenderer shall make his own arrangements for storing water at site in tanks to prevent contamination. The reinforcement shall be stacked on top of timber sleepers to avoid contact with ground/water. Each type and size shall be stacked separately. Steel shall be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and corrosion.

Concrete Concrete grade shall be as designated on drawings. In concrete grade M15, M20 etc. the number represents the specified characteristic compressive strength of 150 mm cube at 28 days, expressed in N/sq. mm as per IS : 456. Concrete in the works shall be "DESIGN MIX CONCRETE" or "NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE". All concrete works of grade M5, M7.5 and M10 shall be NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE whereas all other grades, M15 and above, shall be DESIGN MIX CONCRETE. Design Mix Concrete The mix design shall produce concrete having reduced workability (consistency) and strength not less than approximate values given in above table. Workability shall be controlled by direct measurement of water content and checking it at frequent intervals by method prescribed in IS 1199.

Mix Design and Testing Minimum M-25 grade of concrete shall be used for all RCC works i.e. RCC frame work, RCC, beams, footings, roof slab etc. M30 Grade to be used for Columns. For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS : 10262 and SP 23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS:456. The design mix shall be cohesive and does not segregate and should result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in water tight concrete. The Tenderer shall exercise great care while designing the concrete mix and executing the works to achieve the desired result.

The minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete of grade M 25 shall be 360 Kg/ m3

The minimum cement content stipulated above shall be adopted irrespective of whether the Tenderer achieves the desired strength with less quantity of cement. The TENDERER's quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the above eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the TENDERER in this account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement required is higher than that specified above to achieve desired strength based on an approved mix design, nothing extra shall become payable to the TENDERER. It shall be the Tenderer's sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at his own cost from IIT/Delhi College of Engineering. He shall furnish to the Engineer at least 30 days before concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes



of 173

and the strength results obtained. The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS: 516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456.

Grade of Concrete

Minimum Compressive Strength N/sq.mm at 7 days

Specified Characteristic Compressive Strength N/sq.mm at 28 days.

M15 10.0 15.0

M20 13.5 20.0

M25 17.0 25.0

M30 20.0 30.0

M35 23.5 35.0

M40 27.0 40.0

Grades lower than M25 shall not be used for reinforced concrete structures. A range of slumps which shall generally be used for various types of construction unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer is given below:

Structure/ Member Slump in Millimeter

Reinforced foundation walls and footings 75

Plain footings, caissons and substructure walls 100

Slabs, Beams and reinforced walls 75

Building columns 75

Pavements 50 Batching & Mixing of Concrete Proportions of aggregates and cement, as decided by the concrete mix design, shall be by weight. These proportions shall be maintained during subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers capable of controlling the weights within one percent of the desired value. Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required consistency, specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so adjusted to account for moisture content in the aggregates. Water-cement ratio specified for use by the Engineer shall be maintained. Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out and while recommencing, the first batch shall have 10% additional cement to allow for sticking in the drum. Arrangement should be made by the Tenderer to have the cubes tested in an approved laboratory or in field with prior consent of the Engineer. Sampling and testing of strength and workability of concrete shall be as per IS: 1199. IS: 516 and IS: 456. All M25/M30 concreting is to be done using Ready Mix Concrete. In case the same is not available, Portable Mini Batch Mixing Plant/ Mechanical mixer is to be installed by the Tenderer to produce the desired quality of concrete. In no case, Hand mixing shall be permitted. For Columns, site mixing may be allowed in the ratio of 1:1:2 Nominal Mix Concrete Mix Design & Testing Mix Designing and preliminary tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete. However, works tests shall be carried out as per IS: 456. Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete and w/c ratio may be adopted as per Table 3 of IS: 456. However, it will be the Tenderer's sole responsibility to adopt appropriate nominal mix proportions to yield the specified strength.



of 173

Batching & Mixing of Concrete The Proportions of materials used for concrete of grades shall be as given below:

Proportions or Nominal Mix of Concrete

Grade of Concrete

Total Quantity for Dry Aggregate by Mass per 50 kg of Cement (as Sum of Fine and Coarse Aggregates) in kg, Max.

Proportion of Fine Aggregate to Coarse Aggregate (by Mass)

Quantity of Water per 50 kg of Cement, Max in Litres

M10 480 Generally, 1:2 Subject to an upper limit of 1:1.5 and a lower limit of 1:2.5

34

Notes: 1. The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit to

lower limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate (see Table 3) shall be used.

2. Example: For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is, Zone II of IS 386: 1970, Table 4) the proportions shall be 1:1.5, 1:2 and 1:2.5 for maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and 40 mm respectively.

3. This table envisages batching by weight. Volume batching when done the nominal mixes would roughly be 1:3:6, 1:2:4 and 1:1.5:3 for M10, M15 and M20 respectively.

4. For underwater concreting the quantity of coarse aggregate either by volume or mass shall not be less than 1.5 times not more than twice that of the fine aggregate.

Concrete Grades and Quality

Grades. The concrete shall be in grades designated as per Table below The characteristic strength is defined as the strength or material below which not more than 5 percent of the test results are expected to fall.

Grades of Concrete

Grade Designation Specified Characteristic

compressive strength of 28 days

N/mn2

M-10 10

M-15 15

M-20 20

M-25 25

M-30 30

M-35 35

M-40 40



of 173

Target mean strength of concrete The mix design for different grades of concrete shall be done for the following mean strengths:

Grade of concrete Target mean cube strength of 28

days N/mn2 M-10 14.0 M-15 20.8 M-20 27.5

M-25 33.7 M-30 39.0

M-35 45.0 M-40 50.0 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately. Concrete shall be assessed daily for compliance. The Tenderer shall keep a record at site of all such tests identifying them with the portion of the work to which they relate. The Architects will check this record, from time to time. The said record shall give the following details and shall be initialed by the Architects.

(a) Reference to specific structural member receiving the batch of concrete from which the cubes were cast.

(b) Mark on cubes. (c) Mix of concrete (d) Date and time of casting (e) Water cement ratio by weight and slump (f) Crushing strength as obtained of the end of 7 days for 3 cubes out of a set of 6 cubes and at

the end of 28 days for the remaining 3 cubes. (g) Laboratory in which tested and reference to test certificates (h) The quantity of concrete incorporated in work that is represented by the quantity of concrete of

the set of the cubes (i) Any other information required by the architects.

Mixing Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS 1791 and 12119. The mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading, the concrete should be remixed. Hand mixing is strictly not allowed. Stone aggregate shall be washed with water to remove dirty dust or any other foreign matters.The mixing drum shall be flushed clean with water. When the mixer is idle for more than 20 minutes, the drum shall be flushed again.

Ready Mixed Concrete. Except as otherwise provided, ready mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications for “Ready-Mixed Concrete” ASTMC 94. Ready-mixed concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the point of placing as rapidly as practicable by methods that will maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any constituents or ingress of foreign matter or water. The concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after delivery, as close as is practicable to its final position to avoid re-handling or moving the concrete horizontally by vibration. If required by the purchaser the producer can utilize admixtures to slow down the rate of workability loss, however this does not remove the need for the purchaser to place the concrete as rapidly as possible. The purchaser should plan his arrangements so as to enable a full load of concrete to be discharged within 30 minutes of arrival on site.



of 173

Concrete shall be transported in a truck-mixer unless the purchaser agrees to the use of non-agitating vehicles. When non-agitating vehicles are used, the mixed concrete shall be protected from gain or loss of water. Time in Transport: The general requirement is that concrete shall be discharged from the truck-mixer within 2 h of the time of loading. The time of loading shall start from adding the mixing water to the dry mix of cement and aggregate or of adding the cement to the wet aggregate whichever is applicable. Ready-mixed concrete plant shall have test facilities at its premises to carry out routine tests as per the requirement of the standard.

Sampling and Testing of Ready-Mixed Concrete Point and Time of Sampling: For the assessment of compliance of ready-mixed concrete, the point and time of sampling shall be at discharge from the producer’s delivery vehicle or from the mixer to the site or when delivered into the purchaser’s vehicle. It is critical that the sampling procedure and equipment used enables as representative a sample as possible to be taken of the quantity of concrete delivered The sampling may be carried out jointly by the purchaser and the supplier with its frequency mutually agreed upon. However, it will not absolve the supplier of his responsibility from supplying in concrete as per the requirement given in this standard or otherwise agreed to where so permitted in the standard.

Workability: The test for acceptance is to be performed upon the producer’s delivery vehicle discharge on site or upon discharge into the purchaser’s vehicle. lf discharge from the producers’ vehicle is delayed on site due to lack of preparedness on behalf of the purchaser then the responsibility passes to the purchaser after a delay of more than 30 min. The workability shall be within the following limits on the specified value as appropriate: Slump ± 25 mm or 1/3 of the specified value, whichever is less.

Compacting factor: ± 0.03, where the specified value is 0.90 or greater, ± 0.04, where the specified value is less than 0.90 but more than 0.80, ± 0.05, where the specified value is 0.80 or less. Flow table test may be specified for concrete, for very high workability (see IS 9103) Acceptance criteria for spread (flow) are to be established between the supplier and the purchaser All the mass concreting work shall be done with the ready-mix concrete of approved design. Before procurement of RMC from external supplier, the source and mix design shall be approved. The RMC supplier shall guarantee the strength of concrete supplied by collecting samples at site, testing and providing test reports for the concrete, they supplied. All RMC batches have to be accompanied by computerized batch mix report. Concrete that has been in transit or more than 2 hours shall be rejected.



of 173

Formwork The form work shall be designed and constructed as per IS 14687.Form work shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not be limited to shores, bracings, sides of footings, walls, beams and columns etc. including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts. False work, wedges etc. The design and engineering of the form work as well as its construction shall the responsibility of the Tenderer, However, if so desired by the Engineer, the drawings and calculations for the design of formwork shall be submitted to the Engineer for the approval. Tenderer has to give atleast 24hours notice for checking of formwork before the next stages can begin.

Formwork shall be designed to fulfill the following requirements. a) Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the concrete at all

stages and appropriate to the methods of placing and compacting. b) Made of suitable materials. c) Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within the specified

tolerance limits. d) Capable of withstanding without deflection the worst combination of self-weight,

reinforcement and concrete weight, all loads and dynamic effects arising from construction and compacting activities, wind and weather forces.

e) Capable of easy striking out without shock, disturbance or damage to the concrete. f) Soffit forms capable of imparting a camber if required g) Soffit forms and supports capable of being left in position if required h) Capable of being cleaned and/or coated if necessary immediately prior to casting the

concrete; design temporary openings where necessary for these purposes and to facilitate the preparation of construction joints.

The formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel, plastic or concrete depending upon the type of finish specified. Sliding forms and slip form may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Timber for formwork shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, loose knots, worm holes, warps and other surface defects. Joints between formwork and structures shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of slurry from concrete, using seals if necessary. The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and two coats of approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces dust. etc. shall be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed. Where directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of compressed air at no extra cost. Forms intended for reuse shall be treated with care. Forms that have deteriorated shall not be used. Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes suitably plugged, joints repaired and warped lumber replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Tenderer shall equip himself with enough shuttering to allow for wastage so as to complete the job in time. Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with adjoining concrete before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly anchored to the concrete. Wire ties passing through beams, columns and walls shall not be allowed. In their place bolts passing through sleeves shall be used. Formwork spacers left insitu shall not impair the desired appearance or durability of the structure by causing spalling, rust staining or allowing the passage of moisture. Where specified all corners and angles exposed in the finished structure shall have chamfers or fillets of 20 mm x 20 mm size. The Tenderer shall provide adequate props carried down to a firm bearing without overloading any of the structures. The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the side shuttering of beams can be removed without disturbing the bottom shuttering. If the shuttering for a column is erected for the full height of the column, one side shall be built up in sections as placing of concrete proceeds or windows left for placing concrete from the side to limit the drop of concrete to 1.0 m or as approved by the



of 173

Engineer. The Tenderer shall temporarily and securely fix items to be cast (embedments/ inserts) in a manner that will not hinder the striking of forms. Forms shall be sewed, wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimension. Forms shall have sufficient strength, to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces. Materials, the selection of materials suitable for form work shall be based on economy, consistent with safety and quality required in the finished work. Form work shall be of timber, plywood, steel fibre glass, reinforced plastics or any other material as approved by architect whose decision in this respect shall be final. Props and shores shall be of steel, timber posts, ballies or any other material as approved by Architects. Shuttering material to be used for structural members will be as defined in the schedule of specifications. The design and engineering of the forms work, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the Tenderer. Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction, shall be repositioned and strengthened. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be entirely removed and formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete at Tenderer's cost. The striking time for formwork shall be determined based on the following requirements:

a) Development of adequate concrete strength b) Permissible deflection at time of striking form work c) Curing procedure employed - its efficiency and effectiveness d) Subsequent surface treatment to be done e) Prevention of thermal cracking at re-entrant angles f) Ambient temperatures; and g) Aggressiveness of the environment (unless immediate adequate steps are taken to

prevent damage to the concrete). Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20°C) forms may be struck after expiry of the time period given in 11.3 of IS:456 unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. For Portland Pozzolana/slag cement the stripping time shall be suitably modified as approved by the Engineer. It is the Tenderer's responsibility to ensure that forms are not struck until concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself, does not undergo excessive deformation and resist surface damage and any stresses arising during the construction period. In normal circumstances and where ordinary port land cement is used, forms may generally be removed after expiry of the following period:

(a) Wall, columns and vertical faces of all 24 to 48 hours

structure members as may decided by the Engineer: (b) Slabs (Props left under) 7 days (c) Beam soffits (Props left under) 21 days (d) Removal of props under slabs:

…spanning upto 4.5 M 14 days …spanning over 4.5 M 21 days.

For cement other than ordinary port land cement the time for removal of forms shall be as specified below: (i) Forms supporting sides of At age when concrete attains 20 %

beams, columns and walls. Of the specified characteristic strength



of 173

(ii) Bottoms of slabs upto At age when concrete attains 67 %

4.5 m span of the specified characteristic strength (iii) Bottoms of slabs above At age when concrete attains 80 %

4.5 m span of the specified characteristic strength (iv) Bottoms of slabs above At age when concrete attains 80 %

6 m span of the specified characteristic strength (v) Bottoms of slabs over 6 m span At age when concrete attains 90 %

of the specified characteristic strength The periods as mentioned above shall be determined by testing cubes at different ages (3 days, 7 days, 14 days, 21 days, 28 days) from the same sample of concrete using the particular type of cement. Testing is to be repeated for every new arrival of cement.

The number of props left under, their sizes and dispositions shall be such as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beams or as the case may be together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further construction. In case of cold weather, these periods may be increased at the discretion of the Architect/Project Director. The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to be able to safely carry full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case may be together with any live load likely to occur during placing of concrete, curing or further construction. Re-shoring When re-shoring is permitted or required, the operations shall be planned in advance and shall be subject to approval. While re-shoring is under way, not live load shall be permitted on the new construction. In no case during re-shoring shall concrete in beam slab, column or any other structural member be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of the loads permitted by the Architect/Engineer for the developed concrete strength of time of re-shoring. Re-shores shall be tightened to carry their required loads without over stressing the construction. Floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete shall have their original supporting shores left in place or shall be re-shored. The re-shoring system shall have capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated loads and, in all cases, shall have a capacity equal to at least on half of the capacity of the shoring system above. The re-shores shall be located directly under a shore position above unless other locations are permitted. In multistory buildings the re-shoring shall extend over a sufficient number of storey to distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such a manner that the design superimposed loads of the floors supporting shores are not exceeded. Reinforcement Workmanship Reinforcement shall be bent and fixed in accordance with procedure specified in IS 2502. Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils shall be straightened cold without damage. No bending shall be done when ambient temperature is below 5°C Local warming may be permitted if steel is kept below 10°C. Prior to start of cutting the Reinforcement, Tenderer shall prepare a bar bending schedule as per latest drawings and checked by Employer at site. All bars shall be accurately bent gradually and according to the sizes and shapes shown on the drawings/ schedules or as directed by Engineer. Re-bending or straightening incorrectly bent bars shall not be done without the approval of the Engineer.



of 173

Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained firmly in the correct position by the use of blocks, spacers, chairs, binding wire etc. to prevent displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. The tied in place reinforcement shall be approved by the Engineer prior to concrete placement. Spacers shall be such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover. Binding wire shall be 16-gauge soft annealed wire. Ends of the binding wire shall be bent away from the concrete surface and in no case encroach into the concrete cover. Substitution of reinforcement, laps/ splices not shown on drawing shall be subject to ENGINEER's approval. Tolerances Tolerance for form work and concrete dimensions shall be as per IS:456 unless specified otherwise. Tolerances specified for horizontal or vertical building lines or footings shall not be construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries. The formwork shall be designed and constructed to the shapes. lines and dimensions shown on the drawings within the tolerances given below: Tolerances for formed surfaces (applicable only for concrete dimensions not applicable for positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels or embedded items).

Variation from plumb (a) In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in sharp edges formed at meeting of two

surfaces 6 mm per 3.0 M, but not more than 25 mm. (b) For exposed corner columns and other conspicuous lines In any 6 M height …6 mm Maximum for entire height. …12 mm Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings after allowing for specified cambers. (a) In slab soffits, ceilings beam soffits, and in horizontal sharp edges formed at meeting of two

surfaces. (measured before removal of supporting shore) In 3 M 6 mm In any bay or in any 6 M length 10 mm Maximum of entire length 20 mm

(b) For exposed lintels, sills parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines

In any bay or in any 6 M length 6 mm Maximum of entire length 12 mm

Variation of the linear building lines form established position in plan and related position of columns, wall and partitions.

In any 6 M length 12 mm Maximum of entire length 25 mm

Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, openings in wall and floors.

6 mm Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls. Minus 6 mm Plus 12 mm



of 173

FOOTINGS Variation in dimension in plan Minus 12 mm Plus 50 mm

Misplacement or eccentricity 2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm. Reduction in thickness minus: 50% of specified thickness subject to a maximum of 50 mm. Variation in steps. In a flight of stairs Riser 3 mm Tread 5 mm In consecutive steps Riser 1.5 mm Tread 3 mm Cover to Reinforcement: Care shall be taken to maintain the correct cover to reinforcement. The minimum covers to be provided shall be in accordance with the provisions specified in the structural drawings. Expansion Joints. Expansion joint shall be provided where required as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Architects. The filler to be used be of approved materials Inserts. Inserts of any kind like fan hooks, sleeves pipes, bolts and nuts, anchor bolts etc, are to be accurately places in the concrete (and/or brick work) and concerted over as and where required and directed. The work “Insert” will mean article like anchors, anchor beams, sleeves, pipes, bolts, nut etc. and the Weight of which does not exceed 100 kgs/piece. The Tenderer shall provide necessary wooden plug sleeves etc. for his own works for which no extra payment shall be made. He will provide if so direction any insert, wooden plugs, sleeves etc. for other Tenderers for which he shall be paid but in case where the other constructors provide the insert, he will take proper measures at his own expense not to disturb their work while concreting.

Conduit & Plumbing pipes. All electric conduits and all sanitary pipes, water supply pipes and down pipes that lie within concrete slabs, beams or columns shall be laid correctly in place and the Architects approval shall be obtained before the casting of concrete, no cutting of structural concrete will be permitted. All case shall be taken to ensure that conduit piper are not damaged. Preparation Prior to Concrete Placement Before concrete is actually placed in position. the inside of the formwork shall be cleaned and mould oil applied, inserts and reinforcement shall be correctly positioned and securely held, necessary openings, pockets, etc. provided. All arrangements- formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be approved by the Engineer. Tenderer shall maintain separate Pour Card for each pour as per the format developed jointly along with the Engineer-in-Charge.

Transporting, Placing and Compacting Concrete Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with minimum time lapse by methods that shall maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any ingredients or ingress of foreign matter or water. During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep



of 173

containers other suitable measures to reduce loss of water by evaporation and heat loss in cold weather may also be adopted. In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final position to avoid rehandling. To avoid segregation, concrete shall not be rehandled or caused to flow. For locations where, direct placement is not possible and in narrow forms and Tenderer shall provide suitable drops. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 1.0 m. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or formwork.

Conveying Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner, which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is maintained. Conveying equipment shall be approved and shall be of size and design such that detectable setting of concrete shall not occur before adjacent concrete is placed. Conveying equipment shall be cleaned at the end of each operation or work day. Conveying equipment and operations shall conform to the following additional requirements: (a) Truck mixers, agitator and non-agitating units and their manner of operation shall conform to

the applicable requirements of “specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete” (ASMT C 94). (b) Belt conveyors shall be horizontal or at a slope which will not cause excessive segregation or

loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be protected against undue drying or rise in temperature. An approved arrangement shall be used of the discharge end to prevent apparent segregation. Mortar shall not be allowed to adhere to the return length of the belt. Long runs shall be discharged into a hopper or through a baffle.

(c) Chutes shall be metal or metal-lined and shall have a slope not exceeding 1 vertical to 2

horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontals. Chutes more than 6 meters long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements may be used provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution.

(a) Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall be of a suitable kind with adequate pumping

capacity. Pneumatic placements shall be controlled so that segregation is not apparent in the discharged concrete. The loss of slumps in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed 50mm.

(b) Concrete shall not be conveyed through pale made of aluminium or aluminium alloy.

While placing concrete the Tenderer shall proceed as specified below and also ensure the following: a) Continuously between construction joints and pre-determined abutments. b) Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement c) Without disturbance to pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in; ensure that such items

are securely fixed. Ensure that concrete cannot enter open ends of pipes and conduits etc. d) Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock. e) In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork designed for this purpose and by using

suitable chutes or pipes. f) Do not place if the workability is such that full compact ion cannot be achieved Without

disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent contamination of concrete with earth. Provide sheeting if necessary in supported excavations, withdraw the linings progressively as concrete is placed.

h) If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen the surface to reduce loss of water from the concrete.

i) Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.



of 173

j) Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.

Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment without causing segregation until it forms a solid mass free from voids thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork. Immersion vibrators shall be inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn slowly till air bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When placing concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure adequate vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive layers. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement, formwork and finished surfaces after start of initial set. Over-vibration shall be avoided; under vibration is likewise harmful. The vibrator should penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and atleast 15 cm into the preceding layer if there is any. It should be held generally 5 to 15 sec. until the compaction is considered adequate and then withdrawn slowly at the rate about 8 cm/s. Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment after getting the complete procedure approved by the Engineer. The slump shall be held to the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this method. When concrete is to be pumped. the concrete mix shall be specially designed to suit pumping. Care shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work once pumping has started. Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple lift work, shall be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete before the start of subsequent placement. Placing shall stop when concrete reaches the top of the opening in walls or bottom surface of slab, in slab and beam construction, and it shall be resumed before concrete takes initial set but not until it has had time to settle as approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance.

Depositing Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers of such thickness that on concrete will be deposited on concrete, which has hardened sufficiently to course the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints shall be located as shown in the structural drawing or as approved, placing shall be carried on of such a rate that the concrete, which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete, which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited. Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached as elevation rendering their service unnecessary. They may remain embedded in the concrete only if made of metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained.

Placing. Placing of concrete in supporting elements shall not be started until the concrete previously placed in columns and walls is not longer has been in place at least two hours.

Segregation. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing, concrete shall not be subjected to any procedure which will cause segregation.

Consolidation. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding or forming so the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms, eliminating all



of 173

air or stone pockets which may cause honey-combing, pitting or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively. They shall be operated by competent workmen, use of vibrator to transport concrete with in the forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn of points approximately 450 mm apart. At each insertion. The duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete but not sufficient to cause segregation, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the job site during all concrete placing operations. Where the concrete is to have an as cast, finish, a full surface of mortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process, supplemented if necessary by spading to work the coarse aggregate back from the formed surface.

Protection Unless adequate protections provided and approval is obtained, concrete shall not be placed during rain. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water not to damage the surface finish. Special precautions are to be taken during rainy season so that freshly placed concrete can be adequately covered and protected by keeping sufficient number of tarpaulins. Bonding When specified, the surface of joints shall be prepared in accordance with one of the methods specified in the section on joints and embedded items. The hardened concrete of construction joints and of joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or columns and beams and floor they support, joints in unexposed walls and all others not mentioned below shall be dampened (but not saturated) immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete. The hardened concrete of joints in exposed work; joints in the middle of beams, girders, joints and slabs; and joints in work designed to contain liquids shall be dampened (but not saturated) and then thoroughly covered with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in the concrete. The grout shall be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least 12 mm thick on horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set. Joint receiving an adhesive shall have been prepared and adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations prior to placing of fresh concrete. Surfaces of joints which have been treated with a chemical retarder shall have been prepared in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations prior to placing of fresh concrete. Curing Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the concrete to protect it from

a) Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind b) Leaching out by rain and flowing water c) Rapid cooling during the first few days after placing d) High internal thermal gradient e) Low temperature of frost f) Vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its bond to the

reinforcement After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. 1 to 2 hr. after laying curing shall be started. All concrete, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer, shall be cured by use of continuous sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of sacking, canvas, hessian or other absorbent material for the period of complete hydration with a minimum of 7 days. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for mixing. Water shall be made to stand on the roof slabs/ floor slabs for the entire duration of curing.



of 173

Where a curing membrane is approved to be used by the Engineer, the same shall of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any manner. The curing compound to be used shall be approved by the Engineer before use and shall be applied with spraying equipment capable of a smooth, even textured coat. Over foundation concrete, masonry work may be started after 48 hr of its laying but curing of cement concrete shall be continued along with masonry work for a minimum period of 7 days. When concrete is used as sub-grade for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before the curing period of sub-grade is over, but curing of sub-grade shall be continued along with the top layer of flooring for a minimum period of 7 days. Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable material such as polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.

Supervision Constant and strict supervision of all items of construction shall be done during progress of work including the transporting and mixing of concrete. Before any important operation such as stripping of formwork is started. adequate notice shall be given to the Employer's Representative. Construction Joints and Keys The position and arrangement of construction joints shall be as indicated by the designer. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of work between construction joints. If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint shall be made with the approval of the Engineer. Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be coated with cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and loose stone shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing/hacking and surface washed with high pressure water jet and treated with thin layer of cement slurry for vertical joints and horizontal layers. When concreting is to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water removed and a coat of cement slurry applied. On this, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well rammed against the old work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way. For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar about 10-15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the concrete mix. This cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing concrete.

Foundation Bedding. All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall be well compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or spongy areas shall be cleaned out and filled with either soil-cement mixture, lean concrete or clean sand compacted as approved by the Engineer. The surfaces of absorptive soils shall be moistened. Concrete shall not be deposited on large sloping rock surfaces. The rock shall be cut to form rough steps or benches by picking, barring or wedging. The rock surface shall be kept wet for 2 to 4 hours before concreting. Excavation, in clay or other soils that are likely to be affected by exposure to atmosphere, shall be concreted as soon as they are dry. Alternatively, the bottom of the excavation shall be protected immediately by 8 cm thick layer of cement concrete not leaner than M10 or in order to obtain a dry hard bottom, the last stretch of excavation of about 10 cm shall be removed just before concreting.



of 173

Finishes The formwork for concrete works shall be such as to given the finish as specified. The Tenderer shall make good any unavoidable defects as approved consistent with the type of concrete and finish specified; defects due to bad workmanship (e.g. damaged or misaligned forms, defective or poorly compacted concrete) will not be accepted. The Tenderer shall construct the formwork using the correct materials and to meet the requirements of the design and to produce finished concrete to required dimensions, plumbs, planes and finishes. Integral Cement Finish on Concrete Floor. In all cases where integral cement finish on a concrete floor has been specified, the top layer of concrete shall be screened off to proper level and tamped with tamper having conical projections so that the aggregate shall be forced below the surface. The surface shall be finished with a wooden float and a trowel with pressure. The finish shall be continued till the concrete reaches its initial set. No cement or cement mortar finish shall be provided on the surface. Where specified, a floor hardener solutions of sodium silicate, magnesium silico-fluoride or zinc silico-fluoride as approved by the Engineer shall be supplied and used as recommended by the manufacturer. Finishing of formed surfaces. Unless otherwise specified after removal of forms the surface of concrete shall be given one or more of the finishes specified below in locations designated by the contract documents.

Cement Plaster finish. The concrete surface shall be properly roughened immediately after the shuttering is removed taking care to remove any laitance completely without disturbing the concrete. The roughening shall be done by hacking. Before the surface is plastered, it shall be cleaned and wetted so as to give good bond between concrete and plaster. After surface preparation the exposed formed surface of RCC work shall be plaster with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand) of thickness not less than 6 mm to give a smooth and even surface true to line and form. Rough form finish. No selected form facing materials shall be required for rough form finish surfaces. The holes and defects shall be patched with cement mortar. Fins exceeding 6 mm in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the form. Smooth form finish. The form facing materials shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. It may be plywood, tampered concrete form grade hard board metal, plastic, paper or other approved material capable of producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflection material with raised grain, torn surfaces. Worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. The holes and defects shall be parched. All fins shall be completely removed. Architecturally exposed as cast finish. The formed surfaces shall be left as it comes out after removal of forms, barring minor patching. Control is to be exercised on choice of materials of concrete, cover of concrete, shuttering etc. as detailed out in the specifications for architecturally exposed concrete.

Architecturally exposed smooth rubbed finish. General requirements of architectural exposed concrete shall govern. The form work shall be chosen to produce smooth form finish-smooth rubbed finish shall be produced on newly hardened concrete not later than the day following form removal. Surfaces shall be wetted and rubbed with corborundum stone or other abrasive until uniform colour and texture are produced. No cement grout shall be used other than the cement paste drawn from the concrete itself by the rubbing process.



of 173

Architecturally exposed cork floated and rubbed finish. General requirements of architectural exposed concrete shall govern. The formwork shall be chosen to produce smooth form finish. Forms are to be removed at an early stage, within 2 to 3 days of placement where possible. All ties are to be removed. All burns and fins are to be removed. Mix one-part Portland cement and one-part fine sand with sufficient water of produced a stiff mortar. The mortar after drying shall match the rest of the surface in colour. While portland cement shall be substituted for a part of Grey portland cement to achieve this purpose as determined by a trial patch. Before application of mortar wall surface is to be dampened mortar is to be applied by firm rubber float or trowel, filling all surface voids. Compressing mortar into voids by using corborundum stone shall be continued colour and texture is produced. If the mortar surface dries too rapidly to permit proper compaction and finishing, apply a small amount of water with a sprayer. Produce the final texture with a cork/expanded polystyrene sheet float using to and from motion.

Architectural exposed reinforced and plain cement concrete. Generally specification for reinforced cement concrete work shall also apply to this type of work and the additional specifications set forth below: Materials Cement used for such work shall be of a uniform colour and obtained from one source of manufacture.

Aggregates:

Fine aggregate: Colour being on important consideration, for exposed concrete colour of sand used shall also be uniform throughout the entire construction, preferably total quantity required for the work shall be collected and well mixed together to a uniform shade.

Coarse aggregate: The colour of the aggregate shall be maintained the same throughout. Unless otherwise specified, exposed concrete in walls parapets and facias, which is non-load bearing and are less than 120 mm for which nothing extra shall be admissible. Flat or flaky pieces shall not be allowed. Reinforcement and cover of the concrete: Correct placing of the reinforcement with proper cover is important in all exposed concrete work to avoid discolouration by rusting. The minimum cover specified under specification of RCC work shall be maintained throughout. Concrete blocks or spacers shall be sparingly used at exposed surfaces. When used such blocks shall preferably by cast on vibrating tables or in some other similar manner so that it may match the concrete surface in texture and colour. These shall be put at regular intervals. Cover blocks of materials other than purpose cast blocks / precast cover blocks shall not be allowed to be used. Construction of shuttering: All centering and framework shall be rigid and of robust construction. All vertical props shall be cut square at both ends and shall rest on double wedges placed on continuous horizontal runne4s on firm natural soil. Resting of props or runners on made up soil shall not be permitted on any account. All members of the formwork shall be closely fixed without any gap between them so as to safeguard against any settlement of displacement of shuttering at the time of concreting.

Plywood shuttering: The Tenderer shall provide shuttering quality plywood (12mm film coated water proof plywood) as per IS : 4990 (type-I) of approved make or equivalent approved by the Architect in place of timber plank shuttering mentioned above for such location as called for by the Architects. Joints in plywood shuttering shall be located as directed by the Architects. Shuttering centering and form work for all exposed concrete work like exposed columns, beams, ribs coffer slabs, chajjas, slabs facias,



of 173

walls etc., shall be of such finish and rigidity as to produce all faces fair and smooth true to line, level and plumb. Not rendering or touching up shall be permitted on these faces.

The Tenderer shall be required to produce working drawings showing the general construction of form work and panels with details such as nail positions and holes for supports that may be required. Nail heads shall be positioned as instructed by the Architects. Grooves and chamfer shall be formed as shown on the drawings without any extra cost.

Any holes for the supports, which the Tenderer may need, shall be approved by the Architects. All such holes shall be subsequently filled in carefully so as to match with the other surface. Walls, column etc shall generally be cast to the full height in one operation and the form work shall be put in accordingly. If permitted by the Architects, these may be completed in two or more heights when the form the form work shall be carefully and compactly raised for further height so as to ensure a neat joint without disturbing the pattern. Any groove desired by the Architects as the joint shall be provided by the Tenderer at no extra cost. Coating for shuttering: Burma shell shuttering oil, colourless and emulisifiable in water shall be used for oiling the wood work, only a thin film shall be neatly applied avoiding collection at one place. Any mark left by the shuttering oil shall be washed clean.

Preparation for placing concrete: Special case is essential to see that all saw dust chips, nails or any other foreign materials is washed out or otherwise removed from the shuttering. In no case any nail, screws shall be allowed to be sticking out of the shuttering. Mechanical vibration: All concrete for exposed concrete work shall be vibrated, using needle vibrator 30/32 mm. Surface or trough vibrators could be permitted to be used for thin slabs. External vibrators for walls may be allowed but this shall be done carefully to safeguard the displacement of the shuttering. Vibrators shall only be operated by skilled labour. Over or under vibration shall not be permitted. Any spillage, or leakage, which is unavoidable and which flows down the exposed concrete surface, shall be immediately washed away with clean water and brush before setting. All finishing to the top surface of exposed concrete member shall be finished to desired surface while the concrete is still green. Construction joints: Break of construction joints shall not be allowed in exposed concrete work. In case such joints cannot be avoided these shall be left at place previously permitted by the Architects. Curing and protection of concrete: Curing will be done with clean water so as not to dis-colour the concrete. All exposed concrete work shall be properly protected by Alkathene film, gunny bags, wooden boards etc. so that the surface and edges are not damaged, disfigured or dis-coloured, till the entire construction is handed over, at no extra cost, and the Tenderer is deemed to have considered this in quoting his rates. All such damages shall be set right or replaced by the Tenderer at his own cost.

Removal of shuttering: Striking and removing or form work for exposed concrete shall be done very carefully without damaging the surface or edges. All such damages shall be set right or replaced by the Tenderer at his own cost.

Finishing: Finishing of exposed concrete surface shall conform to one of the three categories given in the section 4.10.4 to 4.10.6 as specified. Exposed concrete surface shall on no account be permitted to any sort of repairs or patching after striking the from work. In the event of any portion not coming upto standard, this shall be taken down by the Tenderer at no extra cost. Decision of the Architects as to the rejection of such work shall be final and binding on the Tenderer. Repair and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Concrete Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all defective areas such as honey-combed surfaces, rough patches, holes left, by form bolts etc, shall be inspected by the Engineer who may permit patching of



of 173

the defective areas or reject the concrete work. All through holes for shuttering shall be filled for full depth and neatly plugged flush with surface. Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by the Tenderer at no additional cost to the Employer. For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the surface shall be prepared as approved by the Engineer. Bonding between hardened and fresh concrete shall be done either by placing cement mortar or by applying epoxy. The decision of the Engineer as to the method of repairs to be adopted shall be final and binding on the Tenderer. The surface shall be saturated with water for 24 hours before patching is done with cement sand mortar. The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete shall be carried out as approved by the Engineer.

Optional Tests If the Engineer feels that the materials i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregates, reinforcement and water are not in accordance with the Specifications or if specified concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order tests to be carried out on these materials in laboratory, to be approved by the Engineer, as per relevant IS Codes. Tenderer shall have to pay for these tests. In the event of any work being suspected of faulty material of workmanship requiring its removal or if the works cubes do not give the stipulated strengths, the Engineer reserves the right to order the Tenderer to take out cores and conduct tests on them or do ultrasonic testing or load testing of structure, etc. The Engineer also reserves the right to ask the Tenderer to dismantle and re-do such unacceptable work, at no cost to the Employer. Alternatively ENGINEER also reserves the right to ask the TENDERER to dismantle and re-do such unacceptable work, at the cost of the TENDERER. Damp Proof Course Cement Concrete Layer: This shall consist of cement concrete of specified proportions and thickness. The surface of brick or stone masonry work shall be levelled and prepared before laying the cement concrete. Edge of dampproof course shall be straight, even and vertical. Side shuttering shall consist of steel forms and shall be strong and properly fixed so that it does not get disturbed during compaction and the mortar does not leak through. The concrete mix shall be of workable consistency and shall be tamped thoroughly to make a dense mass. When the sides are removed, the surface should come out smooth without honey-coming. Continuity shall be maintained while laying the cement concrete layer and laying shall be terminated only at the predetermined location where damp-proof course is to be discontinued. There shall be no construction joints in the Damp Proof Course. Curing: Damp proof course shall be cured for at least seven days, after which it shall be allowed to dry. Application of Hot Bitumen: Hot bitumen in specified quantity shall be applied over the dried-up surface of cement concrete, properly cleaned with brushes and finally with a piece of cloth soaked in kerosene oil. Bitumen of penetration A 90 or equivalent where used shall be heated to a temperature of 160º ± 5ºC.The hot bitumen shall be applied uniformly all over, so that no blank spaces are left anywhere. Water Proofing Materials: Water proofing material of approved quality shall be added to the concrete mixture in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification stating the quantity of water proofing material in litres or kg per 50 kg or cement. Measurements: The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal. The depth shall not be less than the specified thickness at any section.



of 173

BRICK WORK Ordinary Brick Work: The bricks used shall be ordinary first class burnt clay bricks of uniform size, shape and colour of class designation 75. The source for Bricks shall be approved by the Employer in writing. However Tenderer should ensure that Bricks brought are conforming to quality requirements. If any efflorescence appeared after or during project duration, Tenderer shall provide necessary treatment to remove efflorescence at his cost.

Mortar: The mortar for brick work shall be as specified.

Brick work in foundation: 1 cement : 6 coarse sand

230mm thk brickwork in super structure: 1 cement : 6 coarse sand

115mm thk brickwork in super structure: 1 cement : 4 coarse sand

All exposed brickwork: 1 cement : 4 coarse sand

In addition to above 115mm thk brickwork shall have include providing and placing in position 2 nos 6mm dia MS bars at every third course of half brick masonry Construction details (i) Soaking: All bricks shall be immersed in water for two hours before being put into work so that

they will be saturated and will not absorb water from the mortar. (ii) Bats: No bats or cut bricks shall be used in the work unless absolutely necessary around irregular

openings or for adjusting the dimensions of different course and for closer in which case, full bricks shall be laid at comers, the bats being placed in the middle of courses every alternate course.

(iii) Laying: The bricks shall be laid in mortar to line, level and shapes shown on the plans slightly pressed and thoroughly bedded in mortar and all joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that they will be completely filled with mortar and no hollows left anywhere. Bricks shall be handled carefully so as not to damage their edge. They should not also be thrown from any height to the ground and should be put down gently. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints made truly vertical. Vertical joints in one course and the next below shall not come over on another and shall not normally be nearer than quarter of a brick length. For battered faced bedding shall be at right angles to the face. Fixtures, plugs, frames etc. If any, shall be built in the places shown in the plans while laying the courses only and not later by removal or bricks already laid.

Care shall be taken during construction to see that edges of bricks at quoins sills head etc. are

not damaged. In case the edges get damaged, Tenderer shall replace them at no extra cost.The verticality of the wall and horizontality of the courses shall be checked very often with plumb bob and spirit level respectively.

(iv) Bond: Unless otherwise specified, brick work shall be done in English bond. (v) Joints: Joints shall not exceed 10 mm in thickness and this thickness shall be uniform throughout.

The joints shall be raked out not less than 15 mm deep when the mortar is green so as to provide proper key for plaster or pointing to be done. Where plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The face of brick work shall be cleaned on the same day on which brickwork is laid and all mortar droppings removed promptly.

(vi) Uniform Raising. Brick work shall be carried up regularly in all cases where the nature of work

will admit, not leaving any part 60 cm. Lower than another.



of 173

But where building at different levels is necessary, the breaks shall be stepped so as to given later uniform levels and effectual bond. Horizontal courses should be to line and level and even and face plumb. The rate of laying masonry may be upto a height of 1000 cm.

Scaffolding: Single Scaffolding shall be used. Holes shall be made good by bricks to match the face work when scaffolding is removed. Curing: All brick work shall be kept well-watered for 14 days after laying. Architectural exposed brick work: Where exposed brick work is specified, the usual specifications for ‘brick work’ as mentioned above will be applicable for ‘Exposed Brick’ but in additional specially selected brick shall be used for facing, ensuring regular and clean faces to uniform colour. No bricks which are broken, chipped, wrinkled or which have irregular edges or corners, shall be used. Depending on the quality of bricks and if instructed by the architects, the exposed face of every bricks shall be rubbed before laying without any extra charge. Wooden fillets 13 mm thick and 12 mm wide shall be placed at the edge of joints so that no mortar comes on the surface of the bricks and a regular thickness of joints is maintained. The surface shall be rubbed down with brushes or bricks if necessary and thoroughly washed. No mortar shall be allowed to stick to the surface, which shall be left clean with all joints even and true to straight line. Double scaffolding shall be used in exposed brick work. The mortar used for exposed brickwork shall be as specified earlier. Reinforcement in Half Brick thick walls. Half brick thick and brick on edge walls shall be provided with reinforcement consisting of 2 Nos. of 6 mm M.S. bars or Hoop iron 25x16 mm embedded. In mortar 15 mm thick at every third course and shall be anchored at ends. The cost of M.S. bars or Hoop iron shall be included in the rate for partition walls. Brick drip course It shall be laid above the junction of roof with the wall to shield the cracks at their junction. The upper course of the projecting brick shall be chamfered or rounded off with 7.6 cms. radius. A transverse drip or throating about 1.3 cm deep shall be cut on the underside of the projecting bricks. The drip course shall project 11.4 cms from the face of the wall thereby completely covering the gola and projection beyond it.

METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND GLAZING ETC. Glazing units shall be made from approved mild steel sections, free from rolling defect. All steel doors, windows and glazing shall conform to IS 1038-1975 revised upto date unless otherwise directed. Steel sections shall be cold straightened and such as to be easily punched and welded. Opening. All windows and ventilator shutter shall open outside unless otherwise directed.



of 173

Structural sufficiency. All doors, windows, ventilators shall be manufactured from standard extruded sections of approved, appropriate sizes suitable for the particular type and size of glazing unit. Detailed shop drawings indicating the full design of every type of unit shall be furnished for approval before undertaking the work. Tenderer shall assume full responsibility regarding soundness of the various units and adequacy of the sections used for the particular sizes required to provide appropriate stiffness and strength. If in the opinion of the architect deficiencies in the sections used are found, the Tenderer shall replace the glazing units at his own expense made out of approved sections. Welding. Both the fixed and opening frames of doors, windows, ventilators and other units shall be framed by cutting sections to required length and metered. The comers shall be electrically welded. Sash bars of units shall be tenoned and riveted into frame and the hinges shall be inserted inside and welded to frames. Handles and peg stays. Each side hung shutter be provided with suitable protruding hinges and peg stay arms: 300 mm long and shall have holes to keep the shutter open in three different positions upto 900 (the peg and the arm for the peg stay will be riveted). The handle shall be mounted on a handle plate and the plate shall be welded to the opening frame. The handle shall have a two-point nose which will engage with suitable tapered striking plate provided on the fixed frame to keep the shutter open in a slightly open position as well as in a fixed position. Top and bottom hung ventilators. Top and bottom hung ventilators shall be provided with two plain hinges with 300 mm peg stay arm, which will keep the shutter open in three different positions and will act as stopper too. Beading. The Tenderer shall provide windows with threaded holes for fixing steel/ aluminium beading with screws, required for fixing glass of thickness specified. Sample Unit. A typical approved sample of the glazing unit shall be kept in the site office or the Architect till the satisfactory completion of the work. The decision of the Architect whether a unit compares well with the approved sample shall be binding and final on Tenderers. Schedule of Hardware

1. Steel windows (each shutter) a. 150 mm handle 1 No. b. 300 mm peg stay 1 No.

2. Hinges 3 Nos. a. Top or bottom hung ventilator 1 No. b. 300 mm peg stay arm 2 Nos. c. Projected or friction hinges 2 Nos

3. Doors a. 300 tower bolt (per leaf) 2 No. b. Brass hinges of size 150mm per leaf 4 Nos. c. L Drop 300mm (outside) 1 Nos

Fixing: The glazing units doors, windows and ventilators shall not be built into the walls but shall be fixed in the prepared opening with lugs in masonry walls or with screws and jute expansion plugs in holes carefully drilled in RCC work, mastic compound shall be provided all-round the frame of the glazing unit at the junction of the frame and opening to make the junction water tight. Composition glazing units shall be supplied loose with necessary coupling transom or million with machine screws and mastic compound and shall be coupled with box mullions. The mullions shall be embedded in mastic to make the joint water tight.



of 173

Collapsible Gates: These shall be double or single collapsible gates depending upon the size of the opening. These shall consist of vertical channel 20X10X2 mm at 10 cm. Centers braced with flat iron diagonals 20 x 5 mm and top and bottom rails of T-iron 40 X 40 X 6 mm with 38 mm. Dia steel pulleys or ball bearings in every 4th double channels, unless otherwise specified. Where collapsible gate is not provided within the opening and is fixed along the outer surface T-iron at the top may be replaced by flat iron 40 X 10 mm. The collapsible gate shall be provided with necessary bolts and nuts, locking arrangement, stoppers and handles. Any special fittings like springs, catches and locks shall be provided as described in the nomenclature of item I the schedule of quantities. Fixing: T-iron shall be fixed to floor and lintel by means of anchor bolts of 45 cm. Centers alternatively in two flanges of T-iron embedded in cement concrete of floor and lintel. The bottom runner shall be embedded in floor and proper groove framed along the runner for the purpose. The collapsible shutter on the sides shall be fixed by fixing the end double channel with T-iron rails and also by hold fasts bolted to the end double channel and fixed in masonry of the side on the other side.

Aluminum Doors, Windows and Glazing Structural Sufficiency : All doors, windows, glazing & ventilators shall be manufactured from standard extruded sections of approved, appropriate sizes suitable for the particular type and size of glazing unit. The members shall be designed to with stand wind pressure as per IS:875 (part 3)-1987. Deflections of members under design wind pressure shall not exceed 1/175 of the Span. Detailed shop drawings indicating the full design of every type of unit shall be furnished for approval before undertaking the work. Tenderer shall assume full responsibility regarding soundness of the various units and adequacy of the sections used for the particular sizes required to provide appropriate stiffness and strength. If in the opinion of the architects deficiencies in the sections used are found, the Tenderer shall replace the glazing units at his own expense made out of approved sections. General: The unit assemblies shall be as per drawing or as directed by the Architects. Standard hardware for aluminium doors shall be as follows Aluminium Hinges 150mm – 4 nos 150 mm aluminium U handle – 2 nos (inside and outside) Concealed Lock (For Main doors only) Aluminium Tower bolt 300mm long – Inside (Top) Aluminium Tower bolt 200mm long – Inside (Bottom) Aluminium Tower bolt 200mm long – Middle rail (for toilet doors only) The unit assemblies shall be anodized finish in approved colur and shade. Anodising shall be minimum 20 to 25 microns thick of mat texture non-directional and non-specular. Anodized surface shall be suitably protected during transportation, storage and erection. Sub units shall be joined together by concealed screws. Jamb member shall be self-mulling type aviating use of separate mullions. Joint shall either be mitered or caped, mitered joints shall have extruded corner reinforcements. All joint shall be neat, hairline and sealed with epoxy resin to make them water proof. Openable shutter shall have a single row continuous neoprene or PVC weather strips to prevalent air infiltration. Weather strips shall not be interrupted by any fittings. All windows shall be glazed from inside with neoprene, PVC or rubber of approved make. Glazing beads shall be snap fit and shall be fitted without use of screws. No screws other than those on some of the hardware shall be visible.



of 173

Glass in windows shall be 4 mm thick and for doors and glazing 5.2 mm thick of float glass of selected quality unless otherwise specified. Where glass of full length is not available in fixed glazing, the butt joint shall be provided with ‘U’ foam insulation or Nylon packing as directed by the Architects. Fixing Fixing shall be done as for per the fixing detail drawing WOOD WORK AND JOINERY Timber Unless otherwise specified, all timber for frames and shutters for doors, windows, ventilators, cupboards etc. shall be quality sound, well-seasoned, timber as specified in the schedule of quantities and shall be free from knots, shakes, fissures, flaws, sun cracks and other defects. The planed surface shall be smooth and free from blemishes and discolorations. All timber for carpentry and joinery in touch with masonry or concrete shall be coal tarred or crested before fixing. All rough frame work in partitions suspended ceilings and veneering to walls etc., shall be treated with approved wood preservatives as per manufacturer’s instructions and specifications. The rates quoted shall provide for such treatments. Timber members shall be fabricated out of seasoned timber. Carpentry Work. The timber shall be properly, planed and wrought in a workman like manner. Joints shall be true and property, fit assembled accurately and clamped together so as to be square, flat and close jointed. The combed joints shall have two tongues on each member to be jointed and shall be guide and pinned together with wooden pegs. Pegs shall engage all tongues and no tongues shall be less than 6 mm thick. In mortise and tenor joints all tenons shall not be less than 12 mm thick and shall be the member.

Tenons shall be glued into the mortise. Through tenons shall in addition be pinned with wood dowels

of not less than 6 mm dia or with non-ferrous metal dowels of not less than 6 mm dia. Alternatively,

through tendons may be wedged if the mortises are tapered.

Holdfast. Three holdfasts shall be fixed to each post of the door frame and two-to each post of the window frame. The M.S. holdfasts shall be of the size 30 cms X 40 mm X 5 mm and shall be fixed to the frames by means of screws and/ or bolts and nuts as specified. The other end of the holdfast shall be fixed into jambs with cement concrete 1 : 3: 6 blocks of dimensions as specified or as directed. Horns in frames shall be cut and shall not be used as holdfasts. Whenever asked for, raw plugs or plugs or bolts as directed shall be used for rough grounds framing, hangers etc. Workmanship: The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of the Architects, Scantlings and boards shall be accurately sawn and shall be of required width and thickness. All carpenter’s work shall be wrought except where otherwise described. The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings and shall be framed together and securely fixed in approved manner and with properly made joints. All works is to be properly rounded, shouldered, wedged, pinned etc., and properly glued with approved quality glue to the satisfaction of the Architects.



of 173

Screws, All screws to be used in woodwork and joinery shall be of brass or as specified or as directed by the Architects/Employer. Tolerances. 1.5 mm will be allowed for each wrought face of the sizes specified. Protection. All woodwork and joinery edges of timber frames etc., shall be protected from being damaged during construction. Anti-termite treatment shall be done on all wooden members, doors and windows. Door/windows frames shall have cut rebates; Planted rebates shall not be permitted. Where door frames are fixed flush with plaster to wall, teak wood cover mould as per drawing shall be provided all round where the plaster is flush with the frame, painted or finished as doors and rates quoted shall include for the same. Wooden flush door shutters. Flush shutter shall be of commercial or teak veneered type as specified in the items of approved make and quality. The shutters will be provided with T.W. lipping. The finished thickness of the shutter shall be as per the Schedule of Quantities or drawings.

Fixtures and fastening. Unless otherwise specified, each shutter shall be hung with metal butt hinges of approved quality, size and make with metal screws and the Tenderer’s rate shall cover for providing and fixing hinges to the shutters. Schedule of hardware fittings unless otherwise specified shall be as given below:

1. Single leaf doors shutters a. 150 mm long butt hinge 4 Nos. b. approved sliding door bolt 300X16mm 1 No. c. 300 mm long tower bolt with 12 mm shoot 1 No. d. 125 mm handles 2 Nos. e. floor stopper 1 No.

Butt Hinges: Shall be heavy quality of mild steel welded at one end to the Pressed steel frames conforming to IS:205-1966 Tower Bolt: Shall be of mild steel, or aluminium as specified.

Steel tower bolts: Shall be of the size specified, the plate and straps shall be riveted, the barrel bolt shall be cast including the knob.

Aluminium Tower Bolts: Shall be made out of extruded sections. Knob shall be screwed to the bolt and riveted at the back. Sliding Door Bolts (Aldrop): These shall be of Mild steel, and shall have smooth sliding action, M.S. and brass sliding bolts shall conform to IS: 281-1973. Handles:

Iron Handles: Shall be of the size specified and shall be made out of sheet steel pressed into ovel section. They shall conform to IS:208-1972 and shall be fixed with 2.5 cms. Long wood screws.



of 173

Aluminium Handles: Shall be of size specified finished bright or anodized made out of cast aluminium to shape and pattern required. These shall be fixed with 2.5 cms. long wood screws.

FLOORING AND FINISHING Cement Concrete Flooring: Shall be laid in thickness and with cement concrete as specified in the schedule of quantities laid in panels with wooden removable forms. Before laying floor concrete the sub-grade shall be properly cleaned trimmed to give required thickness of floor and neat cement slurry applied to give proper bond of floor with the sub-grade. The cement concrete shall be laid and finished with trowels and finished with a coat of neat cement on top to give a smooth and homogeneous surface. No extra mortar shall be laid over the concrete to make the floor in level or for drying the concrete for applying the cement slurry.

The joints shall be straight both ways i.e along the length and width. No surplus mortar on the adjoining panel shall be allowed to spill from the other panel. The measurement shall be of exact length and breadth from wall face to wall face. Cement Skirting and dados: Shall consist of 20 mm or as specified in the schedule of quantities thick cement plaster 1:3 (cement and coarse sand mortar) applied to wall face and finished with a floating coat of neat cement including rounding of junctions within floors as directed. Kota Stone Flooring& Skirting The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall be of uniform colour. The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work, the Tenderer shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Dressing Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20, 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of ±2 mm shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of ± 5 mm for hand cut slabs and ± 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed. Preparation of Surface and Laying The specification shall be as described below. The edges of the slabs to be jointedshall be buttered with grey cement, with admixture of pigment to match the shade of the slab. The thickness of the joints should be as minimum as possible. In any location, it shall not exceed 1 mm. Laying Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand). The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and the thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm.



of 173

The slabs shall be laid in the following manner: Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with admixture of pigment to match the shade of the stone slabs. The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Joint thickness shall not be more than 1 mm. Polishing and Finishing The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted with coarse grade grit block (No. 60). Water shall be used profusely during grinding. After grinding the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey or white cement, mixed with or without pigment to match the colour of the topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin holethat appear. The surface shall be again cured. The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit block (No. 120). The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall be carried out the day after the second grinding before handing over the floor, as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. Then oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at 33 gm. Per square metered sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a NAMDHA block (Pad of woolen rags). The next day floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean. Additional grinding to achieve granolithic mirror polish to be done. While/coloured glazed tiles in skirting and dados: Glazed tiles, shall be of approved Indian make unless otherwise specified in the description of item. The tiles shall be flat, true to shape, free from cracks crazing spot, chipped edges corners. The glazing shall be uniform. The tiles shall be of thickness and of size as specified in the items of work or as directed by the Architect and the tiles shall conform to IS:777-1970.

Preparation of surface. The joints of brick work shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in case of RCC walls the surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet. Laying. The surface shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) of as specified to an average thickness of 12 mm and allowed to harden. The plastered surface shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal lines 1.5 mm deep at 7.5 cm centers both ways. The back of tiles shall be buttered with grey cement slurry and edges with white cement slurry and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be lightly tamped and corrected to proper plane and lines. Tiles shall be set in required pattern with as fine as possible butt joints. Top of dados skirting etc. shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical. Where full tiles cannot be used, cut (sawn) tiles of required size



of 173

shall be provided as in flooring. The joints shall be cleaned and flush pointed with white cment. The surface shall be kept wet for seven days.

The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

PLASTER Double scaffolding shall be provided for plasterwork having two sets of vertical supports.

Before apply plaster to wall faces the joints shall be racked by hooks. Use of “basuli” being prohibited. Mortar powder and dust shall be brushed out from joints and washed with clean water and surface well wetted. The minimum thickness of the mortar to be applied shall be as specified. To ensure perfect workmanship to plumb “Bundas” shall be provided with a plumb before mortar is applied to surface for plaster in uniform layer. Plastering shall be started from top towards bottom all corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal and neatly finished. Any cracks which appear in the surface and portions which sound hollow when tapped or are found soft or otherwise defective shall be cut out and redone. Curing shall be started after 24 hours of finishing and continued at least for 7 days and shall be protected from, sun, rain and other damage.

While plastering, RCC surfaces shall be roughened with steel chisels, cleaned of dust, washed and kept wet prior to plastering. The cement plaster shall be 12-15mm thk for walls and vertical surfaces (using 1:4 mix) and 6-10mm thk for ceilings (using 1:3 mix) For all plaster works in buildings, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases the inner end of the horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header course for the purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding shall, however, not be allowed in pillars/columns less than one meter in width or immediately near the skew backs of arches. The holes left in masonry works for scaffolding purposes shall be filled and made good before plastering.

Preparation of Surface The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out. Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced. In case of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work, the surface shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface. Mortar The mortar of the specified mix using the type of sand described in the item shall be used. For finishing coat work the fine aggregate conforming to grading zone V shall be used. Application of Plaster Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster. Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards the floor. All putlog holes shall be properly filled in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface, plaster about 15 × 15 cm shall be first applied, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 meters intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall then be laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. The mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than the specified



of 173

thickness. This shall be brought to a true surface, by working a wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges, with small upward and sideways movements at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off true with trowel or wooden float according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive troweling or over working the float shall be avoided. All corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arrises, provision of grooves at junctions etc. where required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding, chamfering or grooving shall be carried out with proper templates or battens to the sizes required. When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to line both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scrapped cleaned and wetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas, to enable the two to properly join together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any corners or arrises. It shall not be closed on the body of the features such as plasters, bands and cornices, nor at the corners of arrises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to leakages. The plastering and finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. The plastering and finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar. Curing Curing shall be started as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged when watered. The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this period, it shall be suitably protected from all damages at the Tenderer’s expense by such means as the Engineer-in-Charge may approve. The dates on which the plastering is done shall be legibly marked on the various sections plastered so that curing for the specified period thereafter can be watched. Finish The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a true straight edge not less than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and surfaces shall be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work proceeds.

Precaution Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow when tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1. When ceiling plaster is done, it shall be finished to chamfered edge at an angle at its junction with a suitable tool when plaster is being done. Similarly, when the wall plaster is being done, it shall be kept separate from the ceiling plaster by a thin straight groove not deeper than 6 mm drawn with any suitable method with the wall while the plaster is green.

2. To prevent surface cracks appearing between junctions of column/beam and walls, 150 mm

wide chicken wire mesh should be fixed with U nails 150 mm center to center before plastering the junction. The plastering of walls and beam/column in one vertical plane should be carried out in one go.



of 173

WHITE WASHING Scaffolding where required shall be with double supports. Where ladders are used, gunny bag pieces shall be tied on their top to avoid damage and scratches. For ceiling stage scaffolding shall be erected.

Preparation of Surface Before new work is white washed, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar droppings an foreign matter. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for atleast 48 hours before white washing is done. Preparation of Lime Wash The lime wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime (Narnaul or Dehradun quality). The lime shall be thoroughly slaked on the spot, mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 40 gm of gum dissolved in hot water, shall be added to each 10 cubic decimeter of the cream. The approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will be 5 litres of water to one kg of lime. Indigo (Neel) upto 3 gm per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added and stirred well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 5 liters per kg. of lime to produce a milky solution. Application The white wash shall be applied with moonj brushes to the specified number of coats. The operation for each coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush given from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the first stroke, and similarly one stroke horizontally from the right and another from the left before it dries. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the subsequent coat is applied. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. For new work, three or more coats shall be applied till the surface presents a smooth and uniform finish through which the plaster does not show. The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of cracking and peeling nor shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed. Protective Measures Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of the building not to be white washed, shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if any shall be removed by the Tenderer at his own cost and the surfaces cleaned. Damages if any to furniture or fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the Tenderer. Colour wash: Required colouring pigment shall be added to white wash. The primary coat, shall be white wash. The finished surface shall be of even tint. Any blotchy or bad surface shall be redone. Other specifications shall be the same as for white washing. Distempering: Distemper shall be Shalimar dry distemper or other approved manufacture of be decided by the Architect. The distemper shall be mixed in clean water using ½ pint for 1 lb of distemper as per manufacturer’s specifications and shall be stirred till the mixture attains on even consistency.



of 173

The surface shall be cleaned, cracks and holes repaired, all irregularities and inequalities and prepared smooth and wiped clean to present a fine smooth surface and shall be completely dried before distempering is started. The mixture shall be applied with a brush in long parallel strokes evenly so as not to leave any visible brush marks. The treated surface shall be allowed to dry and harden, then the 2nd coat shall be allowed to be applied on the 1st coat. If a uniform surface is not achieved then the 3rd coat shall be applied.

Cement Paints: The paint shall be of approved manufacturer (Snowcem or Acrocem) approved by the Architects. Before painting is commenced on surface, all dirt and foreign material shall be completely removed. The surface shall be wetted by sprinkling water with fine spray. The surface shall be sprayed several times with a few minus intervals between each spraying to allow moisture to soak into the surface. A cement paint solution shall be applied to surface with hair brushes in number of coats to get uniform finish. After the first coat of paints has hardened, if shall not be wetted again before the application of the 2nd coat. At least 24 hours should elapse between the two coats. Similarly required number of coats (minimum three) shall be given to get a uniform colour. It shall be kept damp at least for seven days. Oil Bound Distemper: All plaster surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall receive 4 coats. First coat of primer shall be applied. The second coat and 3rd coat shall be of oil bound distemper of approved colour shade and quality mixed with manufacturer’s petrifying liquid. After these operations if the work is not to the satisfaction of the Architects then one or more coat shall be applied without extra cost till a smooth and even surface is achieved and approved by the Architects. Enamel Paint: Surface to be painted shall be dry, free from dust and dirt and rubbed by means of sand paper or pumic stone to the satisfaction of the Architects. The paint shall be ready mixed synthetic enamel or oil paint of approved make and manufacture. The primary coat shall be ready mixed of approved make and manufacture and shall be applied even with brushes. After the primary coat is applied and perfectly dried all holes, cracks etc. shall be filled with putty and the surface sand papered. Then a second coat of approved shade and manufacture shall be evenly applied and allowed to dry. The third coat shall be carefully applied as and when required, to achieve smooth and even surface. Mud Phaska with bricks tiles paving. Mud Mortar: Mud mortar shall be prepared from good earth and shall be free from grass, roots, gravel, kankar etc. free from efflorescent salts and white ants. The earth fine powdered shall be mixed with plenty of water in a pit adding Bhusa at 8 kg. Per cum of mortar.

The mixture of earth straw and water shall be allowed to mature for not less than 4 days. During this period it shall be worked up at intervals with feet and/or phawras so that it gets pugged into a homogenous mass free from lumps and clods.

Laying: The mortar shall be laid on the terrace to required thickness and slopes in a single layer and rammed with wooden thapies under optimum moisture condition. The surface shall be checked with a straight edge and spirit level and corrected with same mortar where necessary. The surface shall slope from all sides towards outlet with slope not less than 1 in 48. The surface shall be allowed to dry. If any cracks appear, these shall be filled with liquid cow dung. The consolidated thickness of mud Phaska at any point shall not be less than 5 cm. Mud Gobri Plaster: The surface shall then be given a coat of plaster with mud gobri mortar 3:1 (3 mud : 1 cow dung).



of 173

Cow dung is soaked in water to free it from grass, straw, seeds and other impurities. It shall be added to this solution in the ratio of 3 parts by volume of fine earth to one of cow dung. The two shall be thoroughly mixed and brought to a workable state by adding water. The thickness of plaster shall be 13 mm uniform throughout.

Paving with the brick tiles and grouting: The brick tiles of local best quality shall be laid flat on the mud gobri plaster before it dries up. The tiles shall be laid with their joints not more than 6 mm wide and laid with their longitudinal lines of joints truly parallel and horizontal and right angles to the sloping edge of the roof.

As soon as the paving is done the open joints shall be grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand). Care shall be taken that no joints are left unfilled. The joints shall be finished flush with the brick surface, currying shall be done for at least seven days.

STEEL WORK General:

The Tenderer shall provide all items, articles operations mentioned or schedule on drawings including all labour, materials, fixing devices, handling and erecting equipment and other incidental necessary for their completion.

All steel work shall confirm to IS: 800-1962 and shall be free from defect impairing strength durability or appearance and shall be of the best tested commercial quantity for purpose specified, and possessing structural properties to withstand safely the stresses to which these shall be normally subjected. The Tenderer shall bear the costs. Unloading and Stacking: All steel members brought by handed over to the Tenderer shall be handled with care, stacked on edge and supported evenly. Welding: Welding, wherever indicated on the drawings, shall be conforming to IS: 814: 1974. Unless otherwise specified, all welds shall be 6 mm Single fillet welds. Welds should be made in the flat position, wherever possible. Adequate steps shall be taken to maintain the correct arc length, rate of travel, current and polarity for the type of electrode and nature of work.

Steel shall not be painted or oiled on any areas, where welding is to be performed and shall be well cleaned to remove any paint, scale, or rust immediately before welding for a distance of at least 2 cm, on either side. Grinding of finished welds is permitted provided the weld is not reduced below the prescribed section. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth.

All welds, which have not been ground, shall be scrubbed, with a 10% solution of hydrochloric acid which shall be washed off with water before paint is applied unless alkali resisting paint is used. The Tenderer shall employ a competent welding supervisor or charge hand to ensure that the standard of workmanship and quality of the materials comply with the general requirements. The Architect and his representative shall have free access to work being carried out by the Tenderer at all reasonable times, and facilities shall be provided so that during the course of welding he may be able to inspect any layer of weld metal. He shall be at liberty to reject any defective welds to be cut and re-welded.

Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contract as practicable and in no event shall be separated more the 3/16”, if the separation is 1/16” or greater, the size of the fillet welds shall be increased by the amount of the separation.



of 173

The separation between facing surfaces of lap joints shall not exceed 1/16”. The fit of joints at contract surfaces, which are not completely sealed by welds, shall be close enough to exclude water after painting.

Abutting parts to be butt welded shall be carefully aligned. Mis-alignments greater than 1/8” shall be corrected and in making the correction the parts shall not be drawn into a sharper slope than two degree (7/6” in 12”)

ROOFING, WALL CLADDING SYSTEM USING PRE-COATED GI SHEETS OF TRAPEZOIDAL PROFILE Material APPLICATION: ROOFING BASE METAL : 0.55 mm Thick for roofing (BMT) 550 MPa – G550 PROFILE : Single Skin -TRAPEZOIDAL SUBSTRATE : Zinc –Aluminum alloy Coating AZ150 PAINT SYSTEM : Super – Polyester XRW FASTENER : Hex-head, Self-Drilling, Tapping Screw;

(Class 3 screws as per AS3566) General:

Supply, fabrication, errection and fixing of colour coated Single Skin Trapezoidal profiled sheeting 720 -1020mm cover width 28-32 mm crests depth at 186-250 c/c ( Above 195 mm c/c crest distance there will be minimum 2 ribs at the centre for stiffning). The feed material is manufactured out of 0.45 mm BMT (Base Metal thickness) Hi-Tensile steel with min. 550Mpa yield strength coated with hot dip metallic zinc-aluminium alloy coating Zincalume AZ-150 or equivalent (as per AS1397) as 150 gms/sq.mt total on both sides of Zinc ( 45 %) & Aluminium (55%), with super polyester Colorbond XRW quality paint coat or equivalent as per AS/NZS-2728 (category 3) of approved color. The color shall have a total coating thickness of 35 microns of an super polyester XRW quality paint system or equivalent as per AS/NZS-2728 (category 3), comprising of 20 microns exterior coat on top surface and 5 micron reverse coat on back surface over 5 micron primer coat on both surfaces. The Steel manufacturers test certificate for the chemical and mechanical properties of steel must be submitted for approval by the concerned authority prior to installation. The sheet shall have brand marking of the manufacturer on the back of the sheet at every 1 mt c/c which should have the brand name, product specification and the coil number for confirming genuinity of the material.The profile and length of the sheet shall be commensurate with the site requirements and pre-coated with approved color. The tenderer shall prepare the shop drawings based on the drawings supplied by the Engineer – in charge or the concern authority. These shall be submitted in five sets sufficiently in advance to the concern authority for approval.

Steel Sheet Material:

The Steel base material of sheet shall have minimum 550 MPa Yield Strength made out of cold rolled steel and shall be coated with anti-corrosive layer of zinc-aluminum alloy coating as Zincalume AZ-150 coating or equivalent as per AS-1397 with min. 150 gms/sq.mt zinc-alluminium alloy coating mass (total on both side). Profile: Single skin Trapezoidal profiled sheeting 720 -1020mm cover width 28-32 mm crests depth at 186-250 c/c ( Above 195 mm c/c crest distance there will be minimum 2 ribs at the centre for stiffning).

Coating: The sheet shall is prepainted with super-polyester Colorbond XRW coat or equivalent as per AS/NZS-2728: 1997 (Category 3) of approved color on Zincalume zinc-alluminium alloy substrate or



of 173

equivalent (as per AS 1397: 1993). The color shall have a total coating thickness of 35 microns of super polyester Color bond XRW quality paint system or equivalent as per AS/NZS-2728: 1997 (category 3), comprising of 20 microns exterior coat on top surface and 5 micron reverse coat on back surface over 5 micron primer coat on both surfaces

All specials and accessories should also be factory fabricated. All the flashing and ridge cap or any other covering should be made out of the same material as that of roofing.

Erection and Fixing: The product will be fastened using Class 3 screws as per AS3566 (as per design) galvanized hex headed, self-drilling fasteners of approved make (Buildex or equivalent) and quality including EPDM / Neoprene washer on each crest (or as per design) of the sheet connecting with purlin. The standard practice as specified by the manufacturer and as approved by the concern authority. All sheets and accessories must be stored and finally erected without any damage, dent, scratches, etc. The tenderer will be required to submit design calculation in support of the proposed profile of the sheet and over all the fixing system for the structural properties, standard loading etc. to the satisfaction of the design consultant and the client. The tenderer shall also submit methodology for fixing and also a maintenance manual for routine maintenance. Flashing, capping and trims shall be formed out of same color coated substrate and thickness as that of the roofing sheet and shall be supplied in a minimum length of 2.5 mt. in the required shape and girths and fixed with fixtures compatible with the system. Silicon sealant non-hardening, neutral cure type of approved make and grade shall be applied at all end laps. The tenderer shall ensure that panel erector is familiarized with the erection procedure and all the supporting members are straight, level, plump and true (according to AISC) before starting panel erection. Panels shall be erected according to approved shop drawings. Measurement: The payment will be done on the actual finish / covered surface area of the sheet. No separate payment will be made for the lap of sheet and accessories, bolts, nuts, washers, adjustable bolts and supports for gutters and other fixtures. These are assumed to be included in the quoted rates. STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS Applicable Codes and Specifications The supply, fabrication, erection and painting of structural steel works shall comply with the following specifications, standards and codes unless otherwise specified herein. All standards, specifications and codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. Structural steel work shall be carried out by specialist vendors only.

IS: 808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel sections

IS: 814 Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steel

IS: 817 Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders

IS: 800 Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel

IS: 801 Code of Practice for Use of Cold Formed Light Gauge Steel Structural Members in General Building Construction.

IS: 806 Code of Practice for Use of Steel Tubes in General Building Construction

IS: 7205 Safety Code for Erection of Structural Steel Work

IS: 7215 Tolerances for Fabrication of Steel Structures

IS: 4000 High Strength Bolts in Steel Structure – Code of Practice

AISC Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Buildings

IS: 1161 Steel Tubes for structural purposes

IS:102 Ready Mixed paint, Brushing, Red Lead, Non-setting, Priming.



of 173

IS:110 Ready Mixed paint, brushing, grey filler for enamels for use over primers.

IS:117 Ready Mixed paint, Brushing, Finishing, Exterior Semi gloss for general purposes, to Indian Standard colors.

IS:158 Ready Mixed paint, Brushing, Bituminous, and Black; Lead free, Acid, Alkali and heat resisting.

IS:159 Ready Mixed paint, Brushing, Acid resisting for protection against acid fumes, colour as required.

IS:341 Black Japan, Types A, B and C

IS:2339 Aluminum paint for general purposes, in Dual container

IS:2932 Specification for enamel, synthetic, exterior, type 1, (a) undercoating, (b) finishing

IS:2933 Specification for enamel, exterior, type 2, (a) undercoating, (b) finishing

IS:3613 Acceptable tests for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding

IS:5905 Sprayed Aluminum and Zinc coatings on Iron and Steel.

IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel.

IS:9862 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black, lead free, acid, alkali, water & chlorine resisting.

IS:13183 Aluminum paint, Heat resistant.

IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubular and other Wrought steel fittings

Part 1 – Mild steel tubes

Part 2 – Mild steel tubular and other wrought steel pipe fittings

IS: 1363 (Parts 1to3)

Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of product Grade C (Size range M5 to M64)

IS: 1367 (All parts)

Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners

IS: 1852 Rolling and Cutting Tolerances for Hot Rolled Steel Products

IS: 1977 Structural Steel (Ordinary Quality)

IS: 2062 Steel for General Structural Purposes

IS: 2074 Ready Mixed Paint, Air drying, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome and Priming

IS: 3502 Steel Chequered Plate

IS: 3757 High Strength Structural Bolts

IS: 5369 General Requirements for Plain Washers and Lock Washers

IS: 5372 Taper Washers for Channels

IS: 5374 Taper Washer for 1 Beams

IS: 6610 Heavy Washers for Steel Structures

IS: 7318 Approval tests for welders when welding procedure approval is not required (Part 1 and 2)

IS: 8500 Structural Steel-micro alloyed (medium and high strength qualities)

IS: 803 Code of practice for design, fabrication and erection of vertical mild steel cylindrical welded storage tanks

IS: 816

Code of Practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General construction in Mild Steel

IS: 822 Code of Procedure for Inspection of Welds

IS: 1182 Recommended Practice for Radiographic examination of Fusion – Welded Butt Joints in Steel Plates

IS: 1200 Method of Measurement in Building Civil Works

IS: 1477 Code of Practice for Painting of (Parts 1&2) Ferrous Metals in Buildings



of 173

IS: 2595 Code of Practice for Radiographic Testing

IS: 3658 Code of Practice for Liquid Penetrate Flaw Detection

IS: 5334 Code of Practice for Magnetic Particle Flaw Detection of Welds

IS: 9595

Recommendations for Metal Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steel

Steel Materials

Steel materials shall comply with the Codes and Standards referred to herein under. All materials used shall be new, unused and free from defects. Steel conforming to IS codes mentioned below shall be only be used for the following:

Fe310-0(St 32-0) IS:1977 For general purposes such as door/window frames, window bars, grills, steel gates, handrails, fence posts, tee bars and other non-structural use.

Fe410 W A

IS:2062 For all structural purposes in welded, bolted and nutted structures.

Fe410 W B

IS:2062 For all structural purposes in welded, bolted and nutted structures subjected to severe fluctuation of stresses.

IS: 3502 For steel Chequered Plates.

Fabrication:

Fabrication shall conform to IS: 800. All fabrication shall be done on a, well lit, laid up platform, big enough to accumulate men & material for the fabrication at the rate as specified by the work schedule. The Tenderer shall ensure sufficient arrangement with back up arrangement for the continuous supply of welding power in order to adhere the work schedule. All members shall be punch marked for identification before transportation from fabrication yard to erection yard. All materials shall be straight and if necessary before being worked shall be straightened and or flattened by pressure, unless required being of curvilinear form and shall be free from twists. Workmanship and finish shall be of the best quality and shall conform to the best approved method of fabrication. All materials shall be finished straight and shall be machined/ground smooth true and square where so specified. All holes and edges shall be free of burrs. Shearing and chipping shall be neatly and accurately done and all portions of work exposed to view shall be neatly finished. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-in-charge, reference may be made too relevant IS codes for providing standard fabrication tolerance. Material at the shops shall be kept clean and protected from weather. The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings. Connections Shop/field connections shall be as per approved fabrication drawings.

Bolts and nuts shall be of grade ‘Black’ (B) conforming to the requirement given in the following IS specifications.

a) IS: 1363 – Specification for Black Hexagonal bolts, nuts & locknuts (dia 6 to 39 mm) and Black Hexagonal screws (dia 6 to 24 mm).

b) IS: 1367 – Technical Supply condition for threaded fasteners. c) IS: 6639 – Specifications for Hexagonal bolts for steel structures.

The electrode for manual metal arc welding shall conform to the requirement of IS: 814.The electrodes for Gas shielded welding procedure shall conform to IS: 6419 and the shielding gapes shall conform to as provided for in IS: 9595. Electrodes to be of make as specified in List of Makes In case of bolted connections, taper washers or flat washers or spring washers shall be used with bolts as necessary. The length of the bolt shall be such that at least one thread of the bolt projects beyond the nut.



of 173

In all cases where bearing is critical, the unthreaded portion of bolt shall bear on the members assembled. A washer of adequate thickness may be provided to exclude the threads from the bearing thickness, if a longer grip bolt has to be used for this purpose. All connections and splices shall be designed for full strength of members or loads. Column splices shall be designed for the full tensile strength of the minimum cross section at the splice. Splicing shall be avoided at critical locations and be done only after the approval of Engineer-in-charge as per the splice drawing submitted by Tenderer and approved by Engineer-in-charge. All members likely to collect rain water shall have drain holes provided.

Straightening

All materials shall be straight and, if necessary, before being worked shall be straightened and/or flattened by pressure and shall be free from twists. Heating or forging shall not be resorted to without the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge in writing.

Welding

Only welding Generators and rectifiers shall be used for welding, transformers shall not be used for structural welding. Welding procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for approval. Welding shall be entrusted to qualified and experienced welders who shall be tested periodically and graded Reference shall be made to IS 817, IS: 7310 (Part 1) and IS: 7318 (Part 1), as the case shall be. Electrodes for use shall be approved by the Project Engineer before use. The mechanical properties of the weld deposit shall be such as to satisfy all the requirements such as tensile strength, elongation strength & impact strength of parent metal. Approval of the welding procedure by the Engineer-in-charge shall not relieve the Tenderer of his responsibility for correct and sound welding without undue distortion in the finished structure.

No welding shall be done when the surface of the members is wet nor without adequate protection during periods of high wind. Base metal shall be preheated to the temperature as per relevant IS codes.

Electrodes other than low-hydrogen electrodes shall not be permitted for thick nesses of 20 mm and above.

Deep penetration electrodes shall be used as specified. All welds shall be inspected for flaws by any of the methods described under Sub-clause 6.5.3. The method adopted shall be agreed with the Engineer-in-charge. The correction of defective welds shall be carried out without damaging the parent metal in a manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge. When a crack in the weld is removed, magnetic particle inspection or any other equally positive means approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be used to ensure that the whole of the crack and material upto 25 mm beyond each end of the crack has been removed. The cost of all such tests and operations incidental to correction shall be borne by the Tenderer. Tolerances The dimensional and weight tolerance for rolled shapes shall be in accordance with IS: 1852 for indigenous steel and equivalent applicable codes for imported steel. The tolerance for fabrication of structural steel shall be as per IS: 7215.



of 173

Cutting, punching, drilling, welding and fabrication tolerances shall be generally as per relevant IS codes. End Milling

Where compression joints are specified to be designed for bearing, the bearing surfaces shall be milled true and square to ensure proper bearing and alignment.

Inspection The Tenderer shall give due notice to the Engineer-in-charge in advance of the works being made ready for inspection. All rejected material shall be promptly removed from the shop and replaced with new material for the Engineer-in-charge’s inspection. The fact that certain material has been accepted at the Tenderer’s shop shall not invalidate final rejection at site by the Engineer-in-charge if it fails to conform to the requirements of these specifications, fails to be in proper condition or has fabrication inaccuracies which prevent proper assembly nor shall it invalidate any claim which the Employer may make because of defective or unsatisfactory materials and/or workmanship.

No materials shall be painted or dispatched to site without inspection and approval by the Engineer-in-charge unless such inspection is waived in writing by the Engineer-in-charge.

The Tenderer shall provide all the testing and inspection services and facilities for shop work except where otherwise specified.

For fabrication work carried out in the field the same standard of supervision and quality control shall be maintained as in shop fabricated work. Inspection and testing shall be conducted in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer-in-charge.

Inspection and tests on structural steel members shall be as set forth below.

Material Testing

If mill test reports are not available for any steel materials the same shall be tested by the Tenderer to the Engineer-in-charge satisfaction to demonstrate conformity with the relevant specification, before consumption in the work.

Tests on Welds

Liquid Penetrate Inspection: In the case of welds examined by Liquid Penetrate Inspection, such tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant IS Code. All defects shown shall be repaired and rechecked. Radiographic Inspection: Generally full-Strength butt weld shall be tested with Ultrasound as per IS provision of IS. Raw material plates shall also be tested to check for laminar tearing, if any. All full-strength butt welds for important connection shall be radio graphed as specified in accordance with the recommended practice for radiographic testing as per relevant IS code. Dimensions, Workmanship & Cleanliness: Members shall be inspected at all stages of fabrication and assembly to verify that dimensions, tolerances, alignment, surface finish and painting are in accordance with the requirements shown in the Tenderer’s approved fabrication drawings. Test Failure: In the event of failure of any member to satisfy inspection or test requirement, the Tenderer shall notify the Engineer-in-charge. The Tenderer must obtain permission from the Engineer-in-charge before any repair `is undertaken. The quality control procedures to be followed to ensure satisfactory repair shall be subject to approval by the Engineer-in-charge.



of 173

The Engineer-in-charge has the right to specify additional testing as he deems necessary, and the additional cost of such testing shall be borne by the Employer, only in case of successful testing.The Tenderer shall maintain records of all inspection, testing & retesting which shall be made available to the Engineer-in-charge. Drilling Holes for other Works: As a part of this Contract, holes in members required for installing equipment or steel furnished by other manufacturers or the Tenderer at no extra cost of the Employer shall drill other tenderers. The information for such extra holes will be supplied by the Employer/Engineer-in-charge. Marking of Members :After checking and inspection, all members shall be marked for identification during erection. This mark shall correspond to distinguishing marks on approved erection drawings and shall be legibly painted and stamped on it. Errors: Any error in shop fabrication which prevents proper assembling and fitting up of parts in the field by moderate use of drift pins or moderate amount of reaming will be classified by the Engineer-in-charge as defective workmanship. Where the Engineer-in-charge rejects such material for defective workmanship, materials and workmanship conforming to these employers Requirements by the Tenderer, at no cost to the employer, shall replace the same. Site Operations: The Tenderer shall complete all preliminary works at site well before the arrival of structural steel, such as establishment of a well-equipped and adequately staffed site office, stores, unloading gantry, unloading and pre-assembly yard, labour quarters if any, electrical and water connections, electrical winches, derricks, cranes, compressors, all tools and tackles, rivet guns, welding sets, torque wrenches, spud wrenches, staging, etc., as well as experienced erection and supervisory personnel as part of this contract and any other work that may be necessary so as to start erection immediately after the arrival of the first batch of steel on site. The Tenderer shall furnish at his own expense, the necessary non-inflammable staging and hoisting materials or equipment required for the erection work and shall remove and take them away after completion of the job. The Tenderer shall also provide necessary passageways, fences, safety belts, helmets, lights and other fittings to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge and to meet the rules of local authorities and for protection to his men and materials. A licensed electrician shall be kept on the job for the entire duration of the work to maintain the Tenderer’s electrical equipment and connections. The Tenderer shall protect all existing plant, structures, piping, conduits, equipment and facilities against damage during erection. Any damage caused by Tenderer shall be rectified entirely at his cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. If work has to be carried out adjacent to existing switch yards or electrical installations which are live, the Tenderer must ensure suitable safety precautions in consultation with Engineer-in-charge.

If a portion of the work of the project area cannot be made available to the Tenderer for his activities due to operations being carried out by other agencies, he shall suitably modify his sequence of operations so as to continue work without interruption. The Tenderer shall work in co-ordination with other agencies working on the project site and plan his work suitably so as not to hinder the progress of construction at site.

Acceptance of Steel, its Handling and Storage

The Tenderer shall carefully check the steel to be erected at the time of acceptance. Any fabrication defects observed should be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-charge. No dragging of steel shall be permitted. All steel shall be stored 300mm above ground on suitable packing to avoid damage. It shall be stored in the order required for erection, with erection marks visible. All storage areas shall be prepared and maintained by the Tenderer. Steel shall not be stored



of 173

in the vicinity of areas where excavation or grading will be done and, if so stored temporarily, the Tenderer well before such excavation shall remove this and/or grading commences to a safe distance to avoid burial under debris. Scratched or abraded steel shall be given a coat of primer in accordance with these employer’s Requirements for protection after unloading and handling prior to erection. All milled and machined surfaces shall be properly protected from rust/corrosion by suitable coating and also from damage. Proper record of movement of shop-tested steel from Fabrication yard to erection yard shall be maintained. Anchor Bolts & Foundations The Tenderer shall carefully check the location and layout of anchor bolts embedded in foundations constructed, to ensure that the structures can be properly erected as shown on the drawings. Any discrepancy in the anchor bolts/foundation shall be reported to the Engineer-in-charge. Levelling of column bases to the required elevation may be done either by providing shims or three nuts on the upper threaded portion of the anchor bolt. All shim stock required for keeping the specified thickness of grout and in connection with erection of structures on foundations, crane brackets or at any other locations shall be of good M.S. plates and shall be supplied by the Tenderer at his cost.

A certain amount of cleaning of foundations and preparing the area is considered normal and shall be carried out by the Tenderer at no extra cost.

Where beams bear in pockets or on walls, bearing plates shall be set and levelled as part of the work. The Tenderer as specified by the Engineer-in-charge will carry out all grouting under column base plates or beam bearing plates. Assembly & Connections

Field connections may be effected by riveting, bolting, welding or by use of high strength friction grip bolts as shown on the design and erection drawings.

The Tenderer shall carry all field connection work as per the shop drawings prepared. All bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, electrodes required for the Tenderer shall supply field connections.

All assembling shall be carried on a level platform.

Drifts shall be used only for drawing the work to proper position and must not be used to such an extent as to damage the holes. Size of drifts larger than the normal diameter of hole shall not be used. Any damaged holes or burrs must be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

Corrections of minor misfits and reasonable amount of reaming and cutting of excess stock from rivets shall be considered as a part of erection. Any error in the shop, which prevents proper fit on a moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping or cutting, shall be immediately reported to the Engineer-in-charge. Erection All structural steel shall be erected as shown on the drawings. Proper size steel cable slings, etc., shall be used for hoisting. Guys shall not be anchored to existing structures, foundations, etc., unless so permitted by the Engineer-in-charge in writing. Care shall be taken to see that ropes in use are always in good condition.



of 173

Reference shall be made to IS: 7205 for safety precautions during the erection of steel. Structural steel frames shall be erected plumb and true. Frames shall be lifted at points such that they are not liable to buckle and deform. Trusses shall be lifted only at node points. In the case of trusses, roof girders, all of the purlins and wind bracing shall be placed simultaneously and the columns shall be erected truly plumb on screed bars over the pedestals. All steel columns and beams shall be checked for plumb and level individually before and after connections are made. Temporary bracings shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including erection equipment and the operation thereof. Such bracings shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety and stability.

Chequered plates shall be fixed to supporting members by tack welding or by countersunk bolts as shown/specified in relevant drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The edges shall be made smooth and no burrs or jagged ends shall be left. While splicing, care should be taken so that there is continuity in pattern between the two portions. Care should also be taken to avoid distortion of the plate while welding. The erection of chequered plates shall include:

1. Welding of stiffening angles/vertical stiffening ribs 2. Cutting to size and making holes to required shape wherever necessary to allow service piping

and/or cables to pass through a) Splicing as shown in relevant drawings b) Smoothening of edges c) Fixing of chequered plates by tack welding or by countersunk bolts d) Providing lifting hooks for ease of lifting.

As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted or tied to take care of all dead load, wind, seismic and erection stresses.

No riveting or welding or final bolting shall be done until the structure has been properly aligned and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. No cutting, heating or enlarging of the holes shall be carried out without the prior written approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

The erection scheme shall be got approved from Engineer-in-charge before start of erection work.

The Tenderer shall furnish test certificates.

Inspection The Engineer-in-charge shall have free access to all parts of the job during erection and all erection shall be subjected to his approval. In case of faulty erection, all dismantling and re-erection required will be at the Tenderer’s cost. No paint shall be applied to rivet heads or field welds or bolts until these have been approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Tolerances: Tolerances mentioned in the relevant MES/IS codes of practice shall be achieved after the entire structure or part thereof is in line, level and plumb. Painting Surface Treatment: All the surfaces of steel work to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scale, rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. The workmanship shall generally conform to the requirements of IS 1477- Part I. Oil and grease removal shall be carried out either by solvent cleaning or by using alkali type degreasing agents. The procedure for cleaning shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. Loose mill scale, loose rust and loose paint shall be removed by wire brushing, scrapping, chipping, rubbing with abrasive paper or steel wool. This method shall not be employed when the surface has



of 173

firmly adhering mill scale. After hand tool cleaning, the surface shall be rubbed with sand paper so as to ensure that no loose material exists and the surfaces shall be dusted off. Materials Primer Coat: Anti-corrosive primers shall be either lead based or lead-free types. Zinc chrome primer shall conform to IS 2074. All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer. The Tenderer shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge for the brand of manufacture and the color/shade prior to procurement for usage in the works. Primer and finish paints shall be compatible with each other to avoid cracking and wrinkling. And shall be from the same manufacturer for each painting system. Workmanship: The type and the number of coats of the primer paint and finish paint shall be as specified. Painting shall be carried out only on thoroughly dry surfaces. No painting shall be done in frosty/foggy weather or when the humidity is high enough to cause condensation on the surface to be painted. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be painted is at 5deg.C or lower Primers shall adhere to the surface firmly and offer a key to the subsequent coats. Workmanship shall generally conform to requirements specified in IS: 1477-Part II.It is essential to ensure that immediately after preparation of the surfaces, the first coat of primer paint shall be applied by brushing and working it well to ensure a continuous film. After the first coat becomes hard dry a second coat of primer shall be applied by brushing. The dry film thickness of each coat of primer shall be not less than 25 microns. This shall be checked with the help of electrometer before delivery of material from fabrication yard to erection yard.

Application of finishing paints shall be carried out within the shortest possible time interval after primer since the primer coats are too thin to give adequate corrosion protection of the steel surface over a long duration.

Painting shall be carried out either by brushing or by spraying. The Tenderer shall procure the appropriate quality of paint for this purpose as recommended by the manufacturer. After the second coat of primer is hard dry, the entire surface shall be wet rubbed cutting down to a smooth uniform surface. When the surface becomes dry, the undercoat of paint of optimum thickness shall be applied by brushing/spraying with minimum of brush marks. The coat shall be allowed to hard dry. The under coat shall then be wet rubbed cutting down to a smooth finish, taking adequate care to ensure that at no place the undercoat is completely removed. The surface shall then be allowed to dry.

The first finishing coat of paint shall be applied at the fabrication yard by brushing or by spraying and allowed to hard dry. The gloss from the entire surface shall then be gently removed and the surface dusted off. The second finishing coat shall then be applied by brushing or by spraying at work site after erection.

At least 24 hours shall elapse between the applications of successive coats. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge, prior to applying the next coat. Minimum dry film thickness of each coat of finish paint of synthetic enamel shall be 25 microns. Minimum dry film thickness of other finish paints shall be as specified in the respective item of work. The final finished surface shall look smooth and even. The tenderer shall ensure this by providing additional coat, if and when required. Nothing extra shall be paid for this.



of 173

Rate for steel Rate is inclusive of all items indicated above including men, material and equipment Including Enamel painting and shall not be paid separately. Measurement for steel The structural steel shall be measured as built. No deduction for holes less than 0.02 sq.m shall be made. Steel as erected and specified shall be paid.

Galvanising of Structural Steel Galvanising Plant: Prior approval shall be obtained from Employer / Engineer-in-charge if galvanizing is proposed to be carried out outside Tenderer’s plant. Workmanship: After all shop work is complete, all structural materials shall be punched with the erection mark and be hot-dip galvanized. Before galvanizing, the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust, acid or alkali or such other foreign matters as are likely to interfere with the galvanizing process or with the quality and durability of the zinc coating. Pickling shall be very carefully done and shall be proper. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 0.610 kg/sq.m unless specified otherwise. Stub members and members for grillage type footing shall have heavier zinc coating not less than 0.80 kg/sq.m.

The galvanized surface shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth, and shall be free from defects like discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter that is loosely attached to the steel, globules, spikes, etc. The finish shall be as per IS: 2633 unless specified otherwise.

All galvanized members shall be treated with Sodium dichromate solution or an approved equivalent after galvanizing; so as to prevent white storage stains. Galvanizing of each member shall be carried out in one complete immersion. Double dipping shall not be permitted. However, in case of members over 7.5 m long, the Tenderer shall take prior approval of Engineer-in-charge for double dipping. When the steel section is removed from the galvanizing kettle, excess spelter shall be removed by ‘bumping’.

Wherever galvanized bolts, nuts locknuts, washers, accessories etc. are specified, they shall be hot-dip galvanized. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanized. Excess spelter from bolts, nuts, etc. shall be removed by centrifugal spinning. Rechasing of bolt threads after galvanizing shall not be permitted. Nuts, however, may be tapped, but not to cause appreciable rocking of the nuts on the bolts. Readily available GI nuts, bolts and washers conforming to galvanizing requirements may also be used.

Defects in certain members indicating presence of impurities in the galvanizing bath in quantities larger than that permitted by the specifications, or lack of quality control in any manner in the galvanizing plant, shall render the entire production in the relevant shift liable to rejection.

Tenderer shall ensure that galvanizing is not damaged in transit. In the event of occurrence of any damages Tenderer shall at his own cost adopt scraping and regularizing the member to satisfy the specific requirements. STORM WATER DRAINS:

Brick pitched open surface drains: (a) Bricks shall be of the quality specified in the nomenclature of the item. (b) Preparation of Surface. The sides and bottom of earthwork to be pitched shall be brought to

the required slope and gradient and shall be compacted to a firm and even surface.



of 173

(c) Pitching. Pitching can be dry or with cement mortar 10 cms in depth or in multiples of 10 cms as specified. Profiles at suitable intervals shall be put by means of pegs and strings or by placing bricks. Bricks shall then be laid dry or in cement mortar as required in parallel rows breaking bond or Herring-bone pattern as directed. At the top, the toe and at every 3 metre intervals, brick courses be laid with bricks on edge.

R.C.C. Pipes: The pipes shall be S & S NP2 class RCC shall conform to IS 458-1961. All pipes shall be manufactured by centrifugal process, true to shape, straight, perfectly sound, free from cracks and flaws. The non-pressure pipes shall withstand a test pressure equivalent to 0.70 kg/cm2 of water. The pipes shall be carefully lowered in trenches laid true to line and grade. The pipes shall proceed upgrade of slope. In cases where the pipe line runs in the proximity of trees, poles and under existing or proposed tracks etc. the pipe shall be encased all-round in 15 cm. thick cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 stone aggregate 40 mm. and down gauge). Jointing of pipes The adjoining pipes shall be through push system. Rubber gasket of size specified by manufacturer and IS code shall slip over the spigot end of pipe. Socket end of one pipe and spigot of next pipe duly fitted with a rubber ring is pushed to fit tight and after fitting restrained to avoid slipping out due to thrust. Testing of joints Water test shall be performed by suitably plugging the low end of the drain and filling the system with water, where leakage becomes visible the defective work shall be removed and made good. Road Gully Chambers:

The Chamber shall be of local best quality brick masonry in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) and shall have a C.I. grating with frame in 15 cms. thick cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse and: 4 hard stone ballast 20 mm nominal size) on top. The size of the chamber shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the C.I. frame. The thick cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished with a floating coat of neat cement.

The gully cover shall be hinged to the frame. The weight of grating shall be 7 kg minimum. The exposed surfaces of the grating and the frame shall be painted with a thick coat of coal tar. BUILDING AS LEARNING AID (BALA) Building as Learning Aid, BALA techniques shall be adopted in the school building. Some of the adopted BALA techniques are as below. These shall be executed while executing the items like flooring, plaster, paint, Brick jaali, Tiling, Window grills etc as per the drawings. No additional payment shall be made on account of incorporating BALA techniques. The list below is indicative and not exhaustive.

1. School Map on Map Wall: Painting of school map on designated Map wall with enamel paint 2. Hide and Seek Wall: Making walls with voids and levels in brickwork and/or plaster as per the

drawings 3. Interactive Walls: Painting themes / educational motifs on walls 4. Brick Jaalis: Brick Jaali in pattern as per drawings 5. Calender Wall 6. Window Grill Pattern for Junior Section: MS Grills in pattern as per drawings 7. Fractional Wall Pattern & Tanagram Tiles in Tiling work 8. Any other as may be required.



of 173



of 173

INTERNAL ELECTRICAL WORKS GENERAL These specifications serve as general guidelines, appropriate technical sanctioning authority can depart from such guidelines to meet the particular requirements of any work or for other technical reasons. In addition to the General Specifications, governing BIA, IE Rules, Standard Contract Conditions etc. there would be necessity of additional conditions / specifications for a particular work. In case of any discrepancy such additional conditions/ specifications will override these General Specifications. The Tenderer shall co-ordinate with all other agencies involved in the building work so that the building work is not hampered due to delay in his work. Recessed conduit and other work, which directly affect the progress of building work, should be given priority. Care shall be taken by the Tenderer to avoid damage to the building during execution of his part of the work. He shall be responsible for repairing all damages and restoring the same to their original finish at his cost. He shall also remove at his cost all unwanted and waste materials arising out of his work from the site. Any addition temporary or permanent to the existing electrical installation shall not be made without a properly worked out scheme/ design by a qualified Electrical Engineer to ensure that such addition does not lead to overloading, safety violation of the existing system. All components shall confirm to relevant Indian Standard Specification, wherever existing. Materials with ISI certification mark shall be used. All materials to be approved prior to execution. Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be compiled with. The entire work of manufacture / fabrication, assembly and installation shall confirm to sound engineering practice. The Tenderer shall be a licensed Tenderer of appropriate class suitable for execution of the electrical work. He shall engage suitably skilled / licensed workmen of various categories for execution of work supervised by supervisors / Engineer of appropriate qualification and experience to ensure proper execution of work. All tests prescribed in this General Specification, to be done before, during and after installation, shall be carried out, and the test results shall be submitted to Engineer-in-Charge in prescribed Performa, forming part of the Completion Certificate. After the work is completed, it shall be ensured that the installation is tested and commissioned. Completion plan/ As built drawings in Autocad format shall be submitted by the Tenderer to Engineer-in-charge upto the satisfaction of the architect/Project Manager indicating the following

1. General layout of the building 2. Locations of main switchboard and Distribution boards, indicating the circuit numbers

controlled by them 3. Position of all points and their controls 4. Types of fittings 5. Wiring & conduit routes 6. Make/batch number/warranty details of the fixtures & fittings

WIRING SYSTEM: Scope



of 173

The scope of work under this section covers supply and wiring for lights, fans, exhaust fans, call bells, fan coil units, geysers and power sockets etc., The wiring shall generally be done using FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor wires in M.S./PVC conduits as called for including providing switches, sockets, plug tops, electronic fan regulators, outlet boxes etc. Standards The following latest standards and rules shall be applicable: IS: 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (System voltage not

Exceeding 1100 V). IS: 1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Electrical installation. IS: 9537 Conduits for Electrical installations (Part 1-4) IS: 2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring. IS: 3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring. IS: 3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring. IS: 694 PVC insulated cables. IS: 6946 Flexible (Pliable) non-metallic conduits for electrical installation. IS: 1293 Plugs and sockets outlets of rated voltage upto and including 250 V. IS: 8130 Specifications for conduits for electrical installation. IS: 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes. IS: 3419 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits. IS: 4648 Guide for electrical layout in residential building. IS: 4649 Adopters for flexible steel conduits. IS: 5133 Boxes for enclosures of the Electrical. IS: 4615 Switch socket outlets. IS: 8884 Code of practice for installation of Electric bells and call system. IS: 2551 Electric Danger notice plates. IS: 3646 Code of practice for interior illumination. IS: 371 Ceiling Roses. IS: 302 General and safety requirements for household and similar electrical appliances. IS: 3043 Code of practice for earthing. IS: 5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.

Indian Electricity Act and Rules. Regulations for the electrical equipment in buildings issued by the concerned Electrical Authorities. All standards and codes mean the latest. POINT WIRING FOR LIGHTS, FANS, EXHAUST & 6 AMPS CONVENIENCE SOCKETS A point wiring shall consist of the branch wiring from the distribution board together with a switch/electronic fan regulator (switch and fan regulator for fans) as required, including providing conduit & accessories, ceiling fan hook box or socket etc., with suitable termination. A point wiring shall include, in addition, the earth continuity conductor/wire from the distribution board to the earth pin/stud of the outlet/switch box/ light fitting & fans & all other such non-current carrying metals shall be earthed and to the outlet points. No tee jointing or looping of wires shall be done any anywhere except at a switch box or a light fitting or a plug socket outlet. The point wiring shall be carried out in the under mentioned manner: Supply, installation, fixing of conduits and Steel wire/ G.I. pull wire with necessary accessories, junction/pull/ inspection/switch boxes and outlet boxes/Fan hook box etc. However, Switches,



of 173

Switch plates & switch boxes are not required for the lights which are controlled directly from the MCB DB's. Supplying and drawing of wires of required size including earth continuity PVC insulated wire. Supply, installation and connection of modular type switches, shuttered sockets, cover plates, switch plates & fixing fan regulator, lamp holder, ceiling rose etc., The point shall be complete with the branch wiring from the distribution board to the outlet point, through switch board, conduit with accessories, junction, pull/inspection boxes, control switch, socket, outlets boxes, ceiling roses, lamp holder, connector, extension cord wire, flexible conduits etc. For the purposes of installation, the rate for point wiring shall include the following:

i) Circuit Main ii) Point Wiring.

The following type of point wiring systems shall be used i) One light controlled by one switch. These points are light/fan points of any length from the distribution boards via switch

to the first point. i.e. this includes circuit wiring also in its scope which will not be paid separately.

ii) Two nos. of lights controlled by one switch (in all classrooms and corridors). These points include wiring for first point as mentioned above and subsequent

points looped from the first point to next light points and are controlled from the same switch as the first point.

The Circuit Main The circuit main for lights/fan/6A sockets (where 6 A sockets connected to light circuit) shall include the wiring from the MCB distribution boards upto the first switch/light point/fan point. The scope of work shall include the following:

i. Supply and wiring in concealed/surface conduit from DB's to first switch/light/fan point.

ii. Providing PVC insulated copper conductor earth wire. iii. Providing Steel/G.I. fish wire (pull wire) in the conduit. iv. Termination of wires in DB's & switches using proper tinned copper lugs of

soldering/crimping type. v. Providing necessary pull/junction boxes where necessary. vi. Identification of circuits shall be done with ferrule nos.

Point Wiring The point wiring shall include supply, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of point wiring in conduit. The exact scope of work included in the point wiring is enumerated as stated below:

i. Wiring from the first switch/light/fan point, where the circuit main is terminated to the various lights/fans/sockets (where 6A sockets connected to light circuit loop), and then looping between the switches/lights/fans/6A sockets etc.

ii. Providing all necessary switches (modular type anchor or any other approved make,), switch plates, cover plates shuttered sockets, outlet boxes/pull/junction/fan hook boxes etc.

iii. Providing insulated earth continuity wire with each circuit in the conduit along with the wiring system.



of 173

iv. Providing G.I. fish wire (pull wire) in the conduits. v. Providing & installing lamp holders where ever necessary. vi. Providing PVC insulated, PVC sheathed flexible three core 2.5 sq.mm extension

cords including flexible conduits from outlet points mounted at false ceiling point to the light outlet.

Wiring for 6/16 Amps Power Sockets for Equipment Wiring: The work for wiring of 6A/16A sockets and wiring for power outlets shall include following:

i. Supply & installation of conduits from DB (concealed/ surface) with its accessories up to the 6/16 A power point in required size of conduit.

ii. Wiring from DB to the 6/16 A power point including earth wire of specified size. (4mm for 6/16amps outlets and 6mm for AC/Geyser/Heater/heavy load 20/25/32amps outlets)

iii. Supply and installation of the shuttered socket outlet with outlet boxes of approved make and Control switch of approved make.

System of Wiring Unless otherwise mentioned on the drawings, the system of internal wiring shall be as follows: The system of wiring shall consist of single core, PVC insulated, 1100 Volt grade, stranded copper conductor wires/cables laid through concealed or exposed PVC/MS conduits as mentioned elsewhere or as directed by Construction manager /Consultant. Prior to laying and fixing of conduits and light outlet boxes, Tenderer shall carefully examine the layout drawings and prepare detailed shop drawings, indicating the exact location of light outlets, with distances marked, conduit routing, with sizes, No. of wires run in each conduit, control switch location etc. The Tenderer shall obtain the approval of all shop drawings by the Construction manager/Consultant prior to the installation of conduits. Any discrepancy noticed in the design drawings shall be brought to the notice of the Construction manager/ Consultant. Any suggestions or modifications suggested by the Tenderer shall have the approval of Construction manager/Consultant before execution. Type of Installation Unless otherwise mentioned following system of conduit installation shall be followed. Concealed Conduit Wiring using PVC conduits in all areas PVC Conduits If specified to be provided in any special area the Nonmetallic conduits and accessories shall conform to IS 9537 (part 3), IS 3419 and each conduit shall bear the ISI Mark. PVC conduits shall be of white, round, heavy gauge polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The conduit shall be plain end type as specified in IS:9537 (Part-3). The conduits internal surface shall be smooth. Only approved quality factory made bends/accessories shall be used unless otherwise stated. Minimum size of conduits shall be 20 mm diameter PVC conduits shall be rigid unplasticised, heavy gauge having 1.8mm wall thickness upto 20 mm diameter conduit and 2.0 mm wall thickness for all sizes above 20mm diameter. PVC Conduit Bends & Collars If PVC conduits are used then the PVC conduit bends & collars shall preferably be of the same make as of conduit. This shall conform to IS 9537/3412 with ISI Mark where necessary bends or diversion



of 173

may be achieved by means of using bends and or circular inspection boxes with adequate and suitable inlet and outlet termination. In case of recessed installation system, the bends shall be properly secured & flush with the finished wall surface. Elbows shall not be used. No bends shall have radius less than 2 1/2 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Readymade factory bends shall be used where required. PVC/Inspection/Junction/Pull Boxes The Inspection/pull box/junction boxes where used with PVC conduit installation shall be of heavy gauge PVC & conform to IS specification and shall match with the conduit sizes. The box shall be of round/square rectangular shape with conduit stub projection for termination of conduit. The box shall be minimum 50mm deep and the size of box shall be suitable to pull/make necessary joints of wires inside the boxes. Extra deep boxes are preferred. The boxes shall have flush type cover. The colour of plate shall match the colour of paint of the surface where installed. The boxes shall have concealed screwed socket for fixing the ceiling rose. SWITCH OUTLET & SOCKET OUTLET BOXES Concealed Type outlet Boxes The concealed outlet boxes for switches, sockets, power outlets, telephone outlet, fan regulator etc., shall be of same make as of switches/sockets etc. to match the exact requirement of combination of outlets. The boxes shall be fabricated out of heavy gauge CRCA cold rolled carbon alloy sheet steel with zinc plating (G.I). The size of boxes should match the type of outlet/switch plate to be mounted on the box. The adequate No. & size of knockout holes shall be provided to terminate the conduits in the box. These boxes shall be standard factory-made product of same make as of switch plates & sockets. Separate screwed earth terminal shall be provided in the box for earthing. The outlet box shall be of minimum depth of 50mm. Long screw shall be provided to take care of the extra plaster thickness to mount the switch plates. Provision shall be made in the box & switch plate to have the minor adjustment of alignment of switch plate to plumb level. Light Outlet Boxes For concealed PVC conduit installation, the light outlet box shall be of PVC (round/square) with knock out holes, conduit projection suitable to terminate the conduit to the box. The box shall be made of heavy gauge PVC & the sample to have the approval of Construction manager/Consultant before use. The boxes shall have concealed screwed socket to fix the ceiling rose. The boxes shall be minimum 50 mm deep. Ceiling Fan Hook Boxes The ceiling fan hook box shall be fabricated of 2mm thick M.S. with adequately sized M.S. rod/hook to fix the ceiling fan. The hook shall be concealed within the fan hook box. The side extensions of rod shall be sufficiently long enough to provide adequate anchorage in the concrete. The size of the box shall be such that it should be totally covered by the plastic canopy of the ceiling fan. The box shall have anticorrosive primer coating. Cover Plates for Switches and Outlets Cover plates for Switches/socket/wiring devices shall be of the same manufacturer to suit the modular switch plate. Cover Plates for Inspection / Junction / Pull Boxes



of 173

The cover plate for PVC boxes shall be minimum 3mm thick of Formica sheet cover. The shape of the plate shall match that of the box. Receptacles The sockets shall conform to IS 1293. Each socket shall be provided with control switch of appropriate rating. The sockets shall be moulded type rated for 250 volts and of full 6 Amp or 16 Amp capacity as mentioned on the drawings. The 6/16 Amps sockets shall be multipin (6 pin) simple piano type anchor or equivalent/ approved make within built shutters for protection that opens only if plug with earth pin is inserted. CONDUCTORS All PVC insulated Copper conductor wires shall conform in all respects to standards as listed under sub-head 'Regulations and Standards' and shall be of 1100V Grade. PVC insulated FRLS wires (for light & small power wiring) The PVC cables shall conform to IS: 694/1977. For all internal wiring PVC insulated cables of 1100V grade, single core shall be used.

The conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors complying with relevant IS Codes. The conductors shall be circular stranded copper conductor.

The minimum number and diameter of wires for circular stranded conductor shall meet the requirements set out in the relevant Indian Standards.

The insulation shall be PVC compound complying with the requirements of relevant IS. It shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact homogeneous body. The thickness of PVC insulation shall be as set out in the relevant standards. The cores of all cables shall be identified by colors in accordance with the following sequence.

Single phase - Red Three phase - Red, Yellow, Blue Neutral - Black Earth - Green or Green/Yellow.

A means of identifying the manufacturer shall be provided throughout the length of cable. Wire Sizes Unless otherwise specified in the drawings the size of the cable/wires used for internal wiring shall be as follows: In case of circuit wiring for lights, exhaust fans, ceiling fans, bell, convenience socket outlet points:

2.5 Sq.mm - From DB's to the junction boxes, FCU, first switch board etc. with no joints. In between joints may be at switches, socket outlet, light points only. 1.5 Sq.mm - From junction boxes to lights/fan/ 6 A sockets outlets etc. In case of power socket outlet circuit. 6.0 Sq.mm - From D.B. 20/25/32 Amps Industrial type sockets/ AC sockets. 4.0 Sq.mm - From DBs to 6/16 Amps sockets



of 173

The earth continuity conductor size as indicated in the drawing shall be drawn through conduit along with other circuit cables/wires. For general guidance the size of the earth continuity conductor shall be as follows: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MINIMUM SIZE OF EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR

WIRES NOT FORMING PART OF THE SAME CABLE AS THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT

CONDUCTOR.

NOMINAL Cross-sectional area of largest associated copper circuit conductor in Sq.mm

NOMINAL Cross-sectional area of earth

continuity conductor in sq.mm (PVC insulated green colour wire).

2.5 2.5

4.0 2.5

6.0 2.5

10.0 6.0

16.0 6.0

25.0 10.0

35.0 10.0

50.0 10.0

Separate circuit shall run for each water heater, pantry/kitchen equipment, window air conditioner, and similar outlets at location as shown on drawings. INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS Concealed Conduit System with PVC Conduit Unless otherwise Specified the size of the conduit shall be selected in conformity with I.S. code and as specified in the table on the next page. Factory made conduit bends and accessories shall be used. PVC Conduit shall be joined using coupler as supplied by the conduit supplier. The conduit in ceiling slab shall be straight as far as possible. Before the conduits are laid in the ceiling, the position of the outlet points, controls, junction boxes shall be set out clearly as per the dimensions and to minimise off-sets and bends. Before the reinforcement rods are kept in position electrical Tenderer should mark in paint the position of outlet points and conduit drop on the shuttering. When the outlet boxes are kept in position & before pouring the concrete, all outlet boxes shall be filled with paper to avoid entry of concrete inside the box. Conduits in ceiling shall be bonded to the reinforcement rods with Steel wire bonding wire at intervals not more than 1000mm, to secure them in position. PVC deep light outlet / pull boxes shall be provided as required. The conduit in ceiling slab shall be laid above the first layer of reinforcement rods to avoid cracks in the ceiling surface. In general, the conduit shall not be laid directly on the shuttering surface to avoid cracks in the ceiling surface.

Conduits Concealed in the wall shall be secured rigidly by means of steel hooks / staples at min. 750 mm intervals. Before conduit is concealed in the walls, all chases, grooves shall be neatly made to proper required dimensions using electrically/manually operated groove cutting tools to accommodate number of conduits. The outlet boxes for control switches, inspection and draw boxes shall be fixed as and when conduits are being fixed. The recessing of conduits in walls shall be so arranged as to allow atleast 12mm plaster cover on the same. All grooves, chases etc. shall be refilled with 1:4 cement mortar and finished upto wall surface before plastering of walls is taken up by the general civil Tenderer. Horizontal chase in walls are not allowed. Where, unavoidable prior



of 173

permission of Construction manager/Consultant shall be obtained before making any chasing. Where conduits pass through expansion joints in the building, adequate expansion fitting or other approved devices shall be used to take care of the relative movement. Whenever the conduits terminate into Control Boxes, distribution boards etc. conduits shall be rigidly connected to the boxes/boards with check nuts on either side of the entry. After conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes etc. are fixed in position, their outlets shall be properly plugged with PVC stoppers or any other suitable material so that water, mortar, vermin or any other foreign materials do not enter into the conduit system. All conduit ends terminating into an outlet shall be provided with bushes of PVC or rubber after the conduit ends are properly filed to remove burrs and sharp edges. Necessary G.I./Steel wire pull wires shall be inserted into the conduit for drawing wires before concreting. Insulated earth wires shall be run in each conduit originating from the panel board upto the Light, Socket and Switch boxes. If the Electrical Tenderer forgets to install any conduit/ boxes etc., before the plastering/ painting work is done by other agencies, he may be permitted to install the same with prior permission of Construction manager /Consultant and he shall be liable to make good the wall, floor, ceiling etc. at his own cost.

Conduits shall be so arranged as to facilitate easy drawing of wires through them. Entire conduit layout shall be done in such a way as to avoid additional junction boxes other than light points. The wiring shall be done in a looping manner. All the looping shall be done in either switch boxes or outlet box. Joints in junction or pull boxes are strictly not allowed.

All conduits shall be installed so as to avoid touching of steam and hot water pipes. Conduits shall be installed in such a way that the junction and pull boxes shall always be accessible for repairs and maintenance work. The location of junction/pull boxes shall be marked on the shop drawings and approved by the Construction manager/Consultant.

A separation of 200mm shall be maintained between electrical conduits and hot water lines in the building. No run of conduit shall exceed ten meters between adjacent draw in points nor shall it contain more than two right angle bends, or other deviation from the straight line.

Caution shall be exercised in using the PVC conduits in location where ambient temperature is 50 degree Celsius or above. Use of PVC conduits in places where ambient temperature is more than 60-degree C is prohibited. The entire conduit system including boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion of installations and before drawing of wires. Conduit system shall be erect and straight as far as possible. Traps where water may accumulate from condensation are to be avoided and if unavoidable, suitable provision for draining the water shall be made.

All jointing method shall be subject to the approval of the Construction manager/Consultant.

Separate conduits shall be provided for the following system.

- Lighting wiring - 16 Amp power outlets. - Telephone/intercom system. - Fire Alarm system. - Cable TV/Music system. - Computer data cabling system. - Equipment wiring/Cabling.

Conduit Joints

Conduits shall be joined by means of plain couplers. Where there are long runs of straight conduit, pull/inspection boxes shall be provided at intervals, as approved by the Construction manager/Consultant The conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned before making the joints. In case of plain coupler joints, proper jointing material like a vinyl solvent cement (gray in color) or any material as recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.



of 173

Bends in Conduit

Wherever necessary, long bends or diversions may be achieved by bending the conduits or by employing normal bends. No bends shall have radius less than 2.5 times outside diameter of the conduit. Heat may be used to soften the PVC conduit for bending, but while applying heat to the conduit, the conduit shall be filled with sand to avoid any damage to the conduit. Kinks in the conduit bends shall not be acceptable. Bunching of Cables

Cables of AC supply of different phase shall be bunched in separate conduits. The number of insulated wires/cables that may be drawn into the conduits shall be as per the following table. In this table, the space factor does not exceed 40%. However, in any case conduits having lesser than 20 mm diameter shall not be used.

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE NUMBER OF 1100 VOLT GRADE SINGLE CORE CABLES THAT MAY BE DRAWN IN TO RIGID PVC CONDUITS.

CABLE SIZE IN SQ.MM

SIZE OF CONDUITS (MM) [MAX. NO. OF CABLES

20 25 32 40 50

1.5 4 8 12 - -

2.5 4 6 10 - -

4.0 2 4 8 12 -

6.0 1 4 6 8 -

10.0 1 3 5 10 -

16.0 - 2 4 5 12

Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in the conduit that the outgoing and return wires are drawn into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not be run in the same conduit. WIRING All final branch circuits for lighting and appliances, shall be single conductor cables run inside conduits. Branch circuit conductor sizes shall be as shown in the load analysis of drawing and conforming to the requirements of the I.E. Regulations & I.S. Code. Home runs indicated on the drawings for the final branch circuits shall be kept in a separate conduit upto the panel board via switches wherever called for. No other wiring shall be bunched in the same conduit unless the other circuit main of same phase run in the conduit. For each lot of wire supply, Tenderer shall supply a certificate issued by the Manufacturer stating its origin, date of manufacture, constitution and standards to which it complies and the test certificates. Looping system of wiring may be used for circuits that are operated by single switch only. For all other circuits, no looping is allowed. Wires shall not be jointed inside the conduit or pull boxes. Where joints are unavoidable, they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors with prior permission of Construction manager / Consultant. Control switches shall be connected in the phase conductors only and shall be 'ON' when knob is down. Switches shall be fixed in galvanised steel boxes. Chromium plated screws shall be used.



of 173

Power wiring shall be distinctly separate from lighting wiring.Each circuit phase wire from the distribution boards should be followed with a separate neutral wire of the same size as the circuit wire. Drawing of Conductors The drawing and jointing of PVC insulated copper wire and cables shall be executed with due regard to the following precautions. While drawing wires through conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks which causes breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends.

Insulation shall be shaved off like sharpening of a pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it square.

Strands of wires shall not be cut for connecting terminals. The terminals shall have sufficient cross-sectional area to take all strands and shall be soldered. Connecting brass screws shall have flat ends. All looped joints shall be soldered and connected through block/connectors. The pressure applied to tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, neither too much nor too less. Conductors having nominal cross-sectional areas exceeding 10 sq.mm. shall always be provided with cable sockets. At all bolted terminals, brass flat washer of large area and approved steel spring shall be used. Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.

Only certified wiremen and cable jointers shall be employed to do jointing work. All wires and cables shall bear the manufacturer's label and shall be brought to site in original packing. For all internal wiring, PVC insulated wires of 1100 volts grade shall be used. The sub-circuit wiring for point shall be carried out in loop system and no joints shall be allowed in the length of the conductors. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any nature, that may cause injury to wire, is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that no damage occurs to the insulation of wire. Before the wires are drawn into the conduits, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, dirt or any other obstruction by forcing compressed air through the conduits. The minimum size of PVC insulated conductor wires for all sub-circuit wiring for light points shall be 2.5 sq.mm. as indicated in the drawing. Joints All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards, socket outlets, lighting outlets and switch boxes only. No joints shall be made in conduits and in junction boxes. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to inlet. MAINS AND SUB-MAINS Mains and sub-mains cable or wires where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved make. Every main and sub-main wire shall be drawn into an independent adequate size conduit. An independent earth wire of the proper rating shall be provided for every single-phase submain. For every 3- phase submain, 2 nos. earth wires of proper rating shall be provided along with the submain. The earth wires shall be fixed to conduits by means of clips at not more than 1000 mm distance. Where mains and submain cables are connected to switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of cable shall be provided to facilitate easy connections and maintenance. Load Balancing Load balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to. Colour Code of Conductors



of 173

Colour code shall be maintained for the entire wiring installation: red, yellow, blue for three phases, black for neutral, green/yellow green for earthing. The control wire from light control switches to the light/ fan points shall be the same colour as that of the phase/ circuit wires feeding that particular loop. Earthing All earthing system shall be in accordance with IS 3043 code of practice for earthing. The type and size of earthing wire shall be as specified under the heading of cables. Each conduit originating from the DB to various outlets shall have one earth wire (PVC insulated copper conductor green colour wire). Testing of Installation Before a completed installation is put into service, the following tests shall be complied with. Insulation Resistance The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying 500-volt megger with all fuses in places, circuit breaker and all switches closed. The insulation resistance in megohms of an installation, measured shall not be less than 50 megohms divided by the number of points on the circuit. The insulation resistance shall be measured between Earth to Phase Earth to Neutral Phase to Neutral Earth Continuity Path The earth continuity conductors shall be tested for electrical continuity and the electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead but excluding any added resistance or earth leakage circuit-breaker, measured from the connection, with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation and shall not exceed one ohm. Polarity of Single Pole Switches A test shall be made to verify that every non-linked, single pole switch is connected to one of the phases of the supply system. Completion Certificates All the above tests shall be carried out in presence of Construction manager/Consultant and the results shall be recorded in a prescribed form. Any default during the testing shall be immediately rectified and that section of the installation shall be re-tested. The completed test results forms shall be submitted to the Construction manager/Consultant for approval. On completion of an electric installation a certificate shall be furnished by the Tenderer, countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in a prescribed form as required by the local electric supply authority.



of 173

EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL & HT SPECIFICATIONS General All specifications with respect to HT, Transformer shall comply to the requirements of local electricity board for obtaining sanction and prior to installation. In case of any deviation / variation the requirements as stipulated by the local electricity board shall be followed. In event of any discrepancy, Specifications and values given in BOQ and drawings shall precede the specifications listed here below TRANSFORMER Scope This specification generally describes the power transformers and associated auxiliary equipment for use on the electrical power distribution system suitable for outdoor installation and covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, supply and delivery, site erection, testing and commissioning aspects of the same. The details are given in the data sheet. Standards The equipment and accessories covered by this specification shall be designed, manufactured and tested in compliance with the latest relevant standards published by the Indian Standards institution wherever available in order that specific aspects under Indian conditions are taken care of. The equipment and accessories for which Indian Standards are not available shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest standards published by any other recognised national standards institution. The equipment shall also conform to the latest Indian Electricity Rules as regards safety, earthing and other essential provisions specified therein for installation and operation of electrical plants. Generally, the transformer shall conform to IS:2026, IS:10028 and unless otherwise stated. Following standards shall also be applicable.

i. IS: 5 Colour for ready mix paints ii. IS: 335 New insulating oil for transformers and switchgears. iii. IS: 375 Marking and arrangement for switchgear, busbars, main connection and Aux.

Wiring. iv. IS: 8468 ON load Tap changer. v. IS: 8478 ON load tap changer application guide. vi. IS: 1180 vii. IS: 3839 viii. IS: 6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers. ix. IS: 1886 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of Transformer x. IS: 1271 xi. IS: 1866 Code of practice for maintenance & supervision of oil. xii. IS: 2099 Bushings for alternating voltage above 1000V. xiii. IS: 3637 Gas operated Relays xiv. IS: 3639 Fittings and accessories for Power Transformers. xv. IS: 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear &

control gears. xvi. IS: 3202 xvii. IS: 2705 Current Transformers xviii. IS: 2247 Dimensions of porcelain Transformer bushings.



of 173

xix. IS: 1367 Hot dip galvanized coatings (Part-13) on threaded fastners. xx. IS: 10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of transformer.

General Design and Constructional Features All materials used shall be of best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the site conditions and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions, overloads, over excitation, short circuits as per applicable standards, without distortion or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform. The design shall be such that the risk of accidental short- circuit due to birds or vermin’s are obviated. All apparatus, including bushing insulators and fittings shall be so designed that water cannot collect at any point. Marshalling kiosks, boxes etc. shall be adequately ventilated to prevent condensation of moisture and so treated internally as to prevent growth of fungi on any coils, wires and insulating materials used. The transformers shall operate with minimum noise and vibration. The cores, tank and other structural parts shall be properly constructed so that the mechanical vibrations are kept to the minimum, thus reducing the noise. The design of the transformer shall be such that changes in transformer connection can be made by a simple change of link connection inside the tank. The transformers shall be designed to suppress harmonic voltages, specially the third and fifth, so as to eliminate distortion in wave form, and the possibility of circulating currents between the neutrals at different transformer stations. All transformers shall be of the latest design, oil filled as called for in the main specification. Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation. The type of cooling and the corresponding ratings for each transformer shall be as indicated in the main specification. The magnetic circuit of each transformer shall be so designed as to minimise eddy-current and hysteresis losses in the core. All electrical connections and contacts shall be of ample section for carrying the rated current without excessive heating. All mechanisms shall be of stainless steel, brass, gunmetal, or other suitable material to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. Tank The transformer tank shall be made of steel plate, shaped in such a way that minimum of welding is required. The tank shall be electrically welded and all welding stresses shall be properly relieved. Tank walls shall be reinforced by adequate stiffeners to ensure mechanical rigidity permitting hoisting of complete transformers filled with oil and also to damp transformer-noise. The tank shall be sufficiently strong to withstand shocks likely to be encountered during transport of the transformer without any deformation or weakening of joints. The joints shall be oil-tight. Guides shall be welded on the inner side of the tank to facilitate tanking and untanking of the transformer core and coil assembly. Tank cover shall be bolted on to the flanged rim of the tank with a suitable weather-proof, hot-oil-resistant gasket in between for oil-tightness. The bolted tank cover shall be so arranged that it can be removed and the core inspected without removal of the radiators. All requisite access and inspection holes shall be provided with bolted oil-tight, gasket-seated cover-plates. Bushing-turrets, covers of access holes, covers of pockets to prevent leakage of water into the tank shall be provided. The exterior of tank and other steel surface exposed to the weather shall be thoroughly cleaned and have a priming coat of zinc chromate applied. The second coat shall be of an oil and weather resistant nature preferably of distinct colour from the prime and finish coats. The final coat shall be of a glossy, oil and weather resisting non-fading paint of specified shade. The interior of the tank shall be cleaned by shot blasting and painted with two coats of heat resistant and oil insoluble paint.



of 173

Steel bolts and nuts exposed to atmosphere shall be galvanised however, surfaces of the transformer or other parts of the transformer or auxiliary equipment which are in contact with oil shall not be galvanised. The transformer tank, auxiliary equipment and fittings shall be provided with necessary devices for lifting and haulage facilities. The tank shall be mounted on a substantial under-carriage. Unless otherwise stated the tank together with radiators, conservator, bushings and other fittings shall be designed to withstand without permanent distortion the following conditions. Full vacuum of 760mm of Hg for filling oil by vacuum. Internal gas pressure of 0.35 Kg/Sq.cm. with oil at operating level. Valves shall not leak nor any welded joints sweat under above conditions. Wherever possible the transformer tank and its accessories shall be designed without pockets where in gas may collect. Where pockets cannot be avoided pipes shall be provided to vent the gas in to the main expansion pipe. Adequate space shall be provided at the bottom of the tank for collection of sediments. Core The magnetic circuit shall be built of transformer grade cold rolled grain oriented low loss steel stampings having high permeability and conforming to adopted standards. Stampings shall be insulated from each other with material having high interlamination insulation resistance and rust inhibiting property and also capable of withstanding pressure, mechanical vibration and action of heat and oil, thus reducing the possibility of sludge formation to a minimum. The framework, clamping arrangement and general structure of the cores of each transformer shall be of robust construction and shall be capable of withstanding any shock to which they may be subjected during transport, installation and service. The assembled core shall be securely clamped, on the limbs and the yoke, to build up a rigid structure. The clamping pressure shall be uniform over the whole of the core and so adjusted as to minimise noise and vibration in the core when the transformer is in service. The framework and the core bolts shall be efficiently insulated from the core so as to reduce the circulating currents to a minimum. The insulation of core to bolt and core to clamp plates shall be able to withstand a voltage of 2 KV RMS for one (1) minute. The core clamping frame shall be provided with lifting eyes for the purpose of tanking and untanking the core with winding mounted thereon and shall have ample strength to take the full weight of the core and winding assembly. An approved type of core grounding system shall be used; the grounding connections being located at the top of the core for easy access from the inspection hole. Winding The coils used for transformer winding shall be circular in shape, made of paper insulated, continuous and smooth, tinned or enameled electrolytic copper conductors of high conductivity. The transformer winding shall be designed for basic impulse insulation level not lower than that specified in the main specification. Liberal ducts shall be provided to prevent any hot spot temperature in the winding that may adversely affect the life of the transformer. Adequate supports, wedges and spacers of hard insulating material shall be so fitted that they will neither move nor permit relative movement of any part of winding during transit of normal service or under terminal short-circuit, nor damage the winding insulation in any way. All leads and connections shall be robust, adequately insulated, protected and clamped. The winding assembly shall be dried in vacuum with tested insulating oil of approved standard. The windings shall



of 173

be subjected to a thorough shrinking and seasoning process so that no further shrinkage of windings occur during service at site. However adjustable devices shall be provided for taking up any possible shrinkage of coils in service. The assembly shall be held in position under adequate axial compression to withstand the axial thrust likely to occur under terminal short-circuit. The end turns on the high voltage winding shall have reinforced insulation to take care of the voltage surges likely to occur during switching or any other abnormal system condition. The transformers shall be suitable for operation at full rated power on all tapping without exceeding the specified temperature rise as indicated in the applicable standards. Insulating Materials The new insulating oil before pouring in to the transformer shall conform to IS-335 and shall be suitable in all respects for operating the transformer at the rating and under conditions specified in the main equipment specification. Sufficient oil shall be supplied for the first filling of transformer, the oil circulating equipment and the tank containing tap-changing mechanism and an extra 10% shall be supplied in non-returnable drums. The tender shall contain information about the grades of oil recommended by the transformer manufacturer for use in the transformer. Test certificates for the oil shall be furnished before dispatch of transformer and acceptance by owner. The oil samples taken from the transformer at sire shall conform to the requirement of IS: 1866 and the value for various parameters shall not lie very close to the limiting value. Class A insulating materials specified in IS:1271 shall be used. Paper insulation shall be new and free from punctures. Wood insulation, where used shall be well seasoned and treated. Tapping Full power tapping shall be provided on HT side as specified for variations in L.V. supply. Tap Changer (Off Load type): The tap-changer arrangement shall be provided on the H.T. side. The tap-changer shall be of an approved and tested design. The number of plus and minus taps shall be as specified in the data sheet. The change-over of taps shall be made simultaneously in all phases. All switches and mechanism of the tap-changer shall be mounted in oil tanks or compartments, placed in an accessible position on the transformer tank. It shall not be possible for the oil from the chamber to mix with the oil in the main transformer. Suitable mechanism to lower the tank for inspection and maintenance of the tap-changer shall be provided. The OLTC oil chamber shall have oil filling drain plug, relief vent & level glass. Electrical Control The electrical control shall have the following feature: It shall not be possible to energise the electric drive when the hand operating gear is in use. It shall not be possible for local electric and remote electric control to be operated at the same time (i.e. a local and remote change over switch to be provided to cut off remote control during local electrical operation). Operation from the local or remote-control switch shall cause one tap movement only, unless the control switch is returned to normal position between successive operations.



of 173

On load tap changer mechanism shall be protected against short circuit and overload by means of relays. The motor shall be enclosed in a ventilated weather proof housing. A tap-position indicator for on load tap changer to give indication of the tap positions shall be provided. The indicator shall show clearly the actual voltage ratio (in kilovolts) in use and shall show simultaneously the number representing this ratio. The number shall range from 1 upwards. The lowest number shall be the tapping position corresponding to maximum number of high voltage winding turns i.e. plus percent position. The highest number shall represent the tapping position corresponding to the minimum number of high voltage winding turns i.e. minus percent position. Indicators for both local and remote-control positions of on load tap changers shall be provided. Remote control indicator shall be mounted on separate control panel. Cooling Equipment Natural cooling by means of banks of detachable type radiators made from pressed/round tubes around transformer tank shall be provided. The tubes shall be of seamless mild steel sheet with clean bright internal surface and shall be suitably braced to protect them from shock. The radiators shall be provided with butterfly type of shut off valves. The location and configuration of radiators shall be subject to approval. Cooling tubes/radiators shall permit every part of the cooling surface to be cleaned by hand. Each radiator shall be provided with a drain valve/plug at the bottom and an air release plug at the top. Terminal Arrangement High Voltage Side (11KV) Cable box shall be provided suitable for terminating one no. 3C x 150 sq.mm XLPE insulated armoured 11 KV cable complete with disconnecting chamber, compression glands, tinned copper lugs, Armour earth clamp and body earth terminal. Cable box shall be fitted with bushing insulators for H.T. cable termination side. Low Voltage Side (433 V) LT Termination shall be suitable for CABLE CONNECTION Disconnecting Chamber The disconnecting chamber shall be air insulated and complete with seal off bushing, removable flexible connectors / links and removable covers. It shall be possible to trail out the transformer without having disconnecting the bus duct/cable. Phase to phase and phase to ground clearances with in the chamber shall be such as to enable either the transformer or cable to be subjected separately to H.V. test. Bushing Bushings shall confirm to IS: 2099 and IS: 3347 & other relevant standards. Bushings shall be supplied with terminal connector clamp suitable for connecting the bushing terminal to the owner's conductor. Creepage distance of bushing shall be (41mm/kv phase ground) adequately,



of 173

Marshalling Box Whenever optional fittings, temperature indicators, with auxiliary contacts, Buckholts Relay and Bushing CT's are specified then the Tenderer shall provide a marshalling box and marshal to it all the contact terminals of electrical devices mounted on the transformer. It shall be in the Tenderer's scope to provide: The interconnection cabling between the marshalling box and the accessory devices either by PVC insulated copper wire in G.I. conduits or PVC insulated copper conductor armoured cables. Necessary compression type brass cable glands at the marshalling box for above cables. The marshalling box shall be tank mounted, water/dust tight sheet steel (2mm thick) enclosed with hinged door having padlocking facility. All doors, covers and plates shall be fitted with neoprene gaskets. Top surface shall be sloped and bottom shall be atleast 600mm from floor and provided with gland plate and cable glands as required. Terminals shall be clip-on type rated for 10A. All contacts for alarm/trip indication shall be potential free, wired up to the terminal block. Wiring shall be done with stranded copper conductor wires of sizes not less than 1.5 sq.mm for control and 2.5 sq.mm for CT circuits. C.T. terminals shall be provided with shorting facility. The marshalling box shall be provided with illumination lamp and a 6 pin 5/15A socket outlet. The marshalling box shall have a glazed door of suitable size for convenience of temperatures indicator reading. Electrical and Performance Requirement Transformer shall operate without injurious heating at the rated KVA at any voltage within the rated voltage of that particular tap. Transformer shall be designed for 110% continuous over fluxing withstand capability. The neutral terminals of the winding with star connection shall be designed for the highest over current that can flow through the winding. Overloads shall be allowed with in the conditions defined in the loading guide of the applicable standard. Under these conditions, no limitations by terminal bushings, tapchangers or other auxiliary equipment shall apply. The Transformer shall be continuously rated for full load. The temperature rise shall not exceed 45-degree C by thermometer in oil or 55 degree centigrade by resistance over an ambient of 50 degree C. Earthing Two separate earthing terminals to be provided at the bottom of the tank on opposite sides. The terminals shall be of clamp type suitable for connection to owners grounding strip (32x6mm). Internal Earthing The frame work and clamping arrangements of core and oil shall be securely earthed inside the tank by adequately sized copper strip connections to the tank.



of 173

Fittings and Accessories The transformer shall be provided with all standard fittings and accessories specified in the applicable standard for the size and type of transformer concerned. The accessories and fittings shall generally be as specified below: Oil Conservator The transformer to be provided with an oil conservator with welded end plates. It is to be bolted to the cover and can be dismounted for purpose of transport. It shall be provided with plain oil level gauge with marking for minimum level and an oil filling hole with a cap which can be used for filling oil. For draining purpose, a valve with plug shall be provided. An equiliser pipe between the conservator and the main tank is to be provided, which projects inside conservator. Magnetic Oil Gauge (MOG) MOG with low level alarm contacts shall be provided. The oil level at 30o C shall be marked on the gauge. Breather The transformer shall be provided with an indicating dehydrating silica-gel breather with glass window for inspection of sufficient capacity. Pressure Relief device & Explosion Vent For all transformer below 2 MVA an explosion vent with diaphragm shall be provided for relieving the pressure within the transformer. At least two (2) nos. of pressure relief devices shall be provided for rated 2 MVA and above which shall be of sufficient size for rapid release of any pressure. An equalizer pipe shall be connected to pressure relief device from the conservator. Diagram and Rating Plate Diagram and rating plate of stainless steel shall be provided indicating the details of transformer, connecting diagram, vector group, tap changing diagram etc. Earthing Terminals Two earth terminals of adequate mechanical and electrical capacity shall be provided. One separate earthing terminal shall also be provided on each separate radiator banks. Dial type Thermometer (OTI) Dial type thermometer (150mm dia) with maximum set pointer at 75 degrees c and electrical contacts for electrical alarm/trip at high temperature with thermometer pocket shall be provided. Winding Temperature Indicator (WTI) Shall comprise of: Temperature sensing element a. Image coil b. Bushing or turret mounted C.T.



of 173

c. Local indicating instrument with electrically inde pendent trip/alarm contact brought out to separate terminals.

Lifting Lugs The arrangement for lifting the active part out of the transformer tank along with cover by means of lifting lugs without disturbing the connections shall be provided. Swivel Type Rollers The transformer to be provided with 4 Nos bidirectional rollers fitted on cross channels to facilitate the movement of transformer in both directions. Air Release Plugs An air release plug shall be provided on the top of the tank cover/radiators to facilitate the release of the entrapped air and filling of oil. Drain-cum-oil Filter Valves with Plug on Cover Plate The transformer shall be provided with a drain-cum-oil filter valve with flanges and blanking plate & locking arrangement of atleast 1 1/2"BSP size at the bottom of the tank. Filter valve of 1 1/4" BSP at top with flanges and blanking plate. Sample valve with plug (1/2"). Inspection cover Oil filling hole with cap On-load Tap Changing Switch On load tap changer with local & remote electric control, having a position indicating plate & locking device. Jacking Pads Skids Neutral bushing terminals complete with connector for earth conductor. Neutral C.T as per specifications given in the data sheet the terminals shall be brought up to the marshalling box. Drawings and O&M Manuals Four copies of manual of complete instructions for the installation, operation, maintenance and repairs circuit diagrams, foundation and trenching details shall be provided with the transformers. List of spare parts shall also be indicated. Two copies of the drawings incorporating the following particulars shall be submitted after the award of work for preliminary study for obtaining approval from PMC before installation. GA drawing showing dimension, net weight and shipping weight, quantity of insulating oil etc.



of 173

Crane requirements for assembly and dismantling of the transformer. Drawing indicating GA of cable box and its dimension for cable entry cut out requirements etc. The drawings in (four sets) to be furnished by the supplier for approval after acceptance of his order shall include the following. GA showing front and side elevations and plan of transformer and all accessories and external features, detailed dimensions, crane lift for untanking, oil quantity, H.T./L.T. clearances etc. Drawings of MV Bus duct termination arrangement/MV Cable box & disconnecting chamber. HV cable box arrangement & disconnecting chamber GA & details drawings. Drawing of each type of bushing. Name plate and terminal making and connection diagram. Control wiring & schematic diagram showing polarity and vector group of windings, CTs and OTI, WTI etc. Reproducible copy of the above drawings for records Testing The transformer shall be subjected to all routine tests in accordance with IS : 2026 at the factory before dispatching the same and test certificates shall be furnished.

Measurement of winding resistance.

Ratio polarity and phase relationships.

Impedance voltage.

Load losses

No-load losses and No-load current

Insulation resistance (Before & after carrying out all tests)

Induced over voltage withstand test

Separate source voltage withstand test

Temperature rise test. Tenderers may quote rate for the HV impulse test. Alternatively they may submit the test certificate for the test conducted on the similar transformer. Owner reserves the right to exercise the option of carrying out H.V impulse test. Test Reports Four copies of the test reports in bound volume shall be submitted for approval. Spares The Tenderer shall quote itemised prices for his recommended spares for the period of operation of transformer for 5 years.



of 173

Data to be furnished by Tenderer POWER TRANSFORMER: 1. Name of Manufacturer : 2. Standards followed in design manufacture and testing : 3. Continuous maximum rating in KVA : 4. Transformer no-load voltage :

4.1. High voltage : 4.2. Low voltage :

5. Vector group reference : 6. Temperature rise over specified ambient temperature in degree C :

6.1. In oil by thermometer : 6.2. In winding by resistance : 6.3. Maximum hot spot temperature in degree C :

7. Terminal Arrangement. 7.1. H.V. Side : 7.2. L.V. Side :

8. One-minute dry power frequency test withstand voltage in KV : 8.1. High voltage : 8.2. Low voltage :

9. Impulse test withstand voltage with 1.2 x 50 microseconds wave in KV : 10. Type of tap changer :

10.1. No. of plus taps : 10.2. No. of minus taps :

11. Iron losses in KW at rated voltage and frequency : 12. Copper losses in KW at rated full load current and frequency at 75-degree C : 13. Reactance voltage with guaranteed tolerance in percent at rated full load current and frequency75

deg C : 14. Impedance voltage with guaranteed tolerance in percent at rated full load current and frequency at

75 deg C : 15. Regulation in percent of no-load voltage at full load current at 75-degree C and with power factors

of : 15.1. Unity : 15.2. 0.8 lagging :

16. Efficiency in percent at 75-degree C and unity power factor for 16.1. 100 percent load : 16.2. 75 percent load : 16.3. 50 percent load :

17. No-load current in amperes at rated voltage and frequency : 18. Inrush magnetizing current in percent of normal full load current. : 19. Details of winding insulation :

19.1. Class of insulation materials : 19.2. Turns insulation high voltage in meg ohm : 19.3. Turns insulation low voltage in meg ohms : 19.4. Insulation core to low voltage in meg ohms : 19.5. Insulation high voltage to Low voltage in meg ohms :

20. Details of 415 V neutral current transformer : 20.1. Name of manufacturer : 20.2. Current ratio : 20.3. VA capacity : 20.4. Accuracy & performance characteristics :

21. Quantity in liters and grade of oil : 22. Weights



of 173

22.1. Core and windings in kg : 22.2. Tank and fittings in kg : 22.3. Oil : 22.4. Complete transformer filled with oil :

23. Overall Dimensions : 23.1. Length in mm : 23.2. Breadth in mm : 23.3. Height in mm :

24. Tests: 24.1. List of tests proposed to be carried out at the factory : 24.2. List of tests proposed to be carried out at the site before commissioning. :

Drawings The following drawings shall be submitted for the PURCHASER'S approval in the stipulated time. General outline drawings showing plan, front elevation, rear elevation, cable boxes/disconnecting chamber section views, locating dimensions of cable entries, terminals foundation floor fixing details and weights. Bushings: Plan, elevation terminals details, mounting details make and type number, current and voltage rating, creepage distances and principal characteristics. Rating and diagram plate. Marshalling box terminal connections, wiring diagram. 2 Inspection & Testing The Tenderer shall carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing program during manufacturer & commissioning of the transformer. Inspection Tank and Accessories Physical and dimensional check of transformer tank and accessories. Crack detection of major strength weld seams by dye penetration test. Core Physical inspection and check of quality of varnish, if used. Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, bend properties, magnetization characteristics and thickness. Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any hot spot by exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux density in the core. The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to withstand HV test of 2 KV (RMS) for one (1) minutes. Checking for interlaminar insulation between core sections before and after pressing. Insulating Material



of 173

Sample checks for physical and electrical properties of the material, as per relevant IS. Check for Di-electric strength. Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating material. Winding Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and electrical conductivity and on insulation covering. Sample check insulation paper for PH value, bursting strength, electrical strength. Assembled Transformer Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing; provision for all fittings, finish etc. Jacking test on all the assembled oil filled transformers and followed by dye penetration test. Oil All standard test in accordance with relevant Standards shall be carried out on oil samples taken from the transformer before and after testing of the transformer. The Tenderer shall also prepare a comprehensive inspection and testing program for all bought out items and shall submit the same to the Project Manager for approval. Such program shall include the following components: Winding temperature indicator Bushings Marshalling box Tap change switch Oil temperature indicator Pressure relief device Magnetic oil level gauge Final Testing on Finished Transformers All standards routine tests in accordance with IS: 2026 shall be carried out on each transformer. Type tests in accordance with IS: 2026 shall be conducted on one transformer of each rating. Employer reserves the right to get conducted certain or all type tests on one transformer of each rating at the cost of Tenderer. Al least four (4) weeks advance notice shall be given for witnessing the type tests. All routine tests shall be conducted prior to short circuit testing. All other type tests shall be conducted after successful short circuit testing:



of 173

1. Oil samples to comply with IS:1866 Routine Test

2. Measurement of winding resistance for each tap position Routine test

3. Measurement of voltage ratio for each tap position Routine test.

4. Vector group and polarity check Routine test

5. Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance at principal tap and two extreme taps, load losses

Routine test

6. Measurement of no load lossess and magnetizing current at rated frequency and 90%, 100% & 110% rated voltage.

Routine test

7. Short Circuit test Type Test

8. Noise Level Measurement Type Test

9. Measurement of zero phase sequence impedance Type Test

10. Measurement of the harmonics of no load current Type Test

11. Measurement of the insulation resistance Routine test

12. Temperature rise Type test

13. Oil samples (repeat) Routine test

14. Insulation resistance (repeat) Routine test

15. Dielectric Tests

i. Power frequency/separate source AC withstand voltage test.

Routine test

ii. Lightning impulse voltage test on all the three limbs as per cl. 13 of IS: 2026 part-III, 1981

Type test

iii. Induced over voltage withstand test. Routine test

16. Oil samples (repeat) Routine test

17. Insulation resistance measurement (repeat) Routine test

18. Measurement of iron loss (repeat after induced over voltage test)

Routine test

19. Measurement of capacitance and tan delta Type test

20. Pressure relief device test Type test

21. IP 55 Degree of protection test for cable box and marshalling box, as per IS-2147

Type test.

Tank Test Routine Tests/Oil Leakage Test All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be factory tested for oil tightness by being completely filled with oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil conforming IS: 335 at the ambient temperature and applying a pressure equal to the normal pressure plus 34 KN/M2 measured at the base of tank. The pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 24 hours during which time no sweating or leakage of oil shall occur. This test shall also be repeated as a pre-commissioning test at site. The gaskets and flanges used shall be capable of meeting the above requirement. The gasket shall not deteriorate during the life of transformer if not opened for maintenance at site. Tenderer shall also recommend the arrangements like oil bath and heating element to maintain temperature of oil bath to preserve spare gaskets to have a longer shelf life of a least 10 years. All joints flanged or welded associated with oil shall be such that no oil leakage or sweating occurs during the life of transformers. The quality of these joints is considered established, only if the joints do not exhibit any oil leakage or sweating for a continuous period of at least 3 months during the guarantee period. In case and leakage/sweating is observed, Tenderer shall rectify the same and establish for a further period of three months of the same. If it is not established during the guarantee period, the guarantee period shall be extended until the performance is established.



of 173

Type Tests Vacuum Test Transformer tank shall be subjected to the specified vacuum. The tank designed for full vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 0.35 Kg/cm2 (absolute, 250 mm of Hg) for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not exceed the values specified below:

Horizontal Length of Flat Plate (in mm) Permanent deflection (in mm)

Upto and including 750 5.0

751 to 1250 6.5

1251 to 1750 8.0

1751 to 2000 9.5

2001 to 2250 11.0

2251 to 2500 12.0

2501 to 3000 16.0

Above 3000 19.0

Pressure Test Transformer tank together with its radiator and other fittings shall be subjected to a pressure corresponding to twice the normal pressure of normal pressure plus 0.35 kg/cm2 whichever is lower measured at the base of the tank and maintained for an hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the excess pressure has released shall not exceed the figure for vacuum test. The pressure relief device shall be subject to increasing fluid pressure. It shall operate before reaching the test pressure as specified in above clause. The operating pressure shall be recorded. The device shall seal off after the excess pressure has been released. In addition to the above, the following checks should be carried out at manufacturers works before dispatch of all transformers. Check for proper packing and preservation of accessories like radiators, bushings, explosion vent, dehydrating breather, Buchholz relay, conservator etc. Check for proper provision of bracings to arrest the movement of core and winding assembly inside the tank. Test for Gas tightness and derivation of leakage rate to ensure adequate reserve gas capacity during transit and storage. Installation, Testing & Commissioning Inspection and Testing at Site The Tenderer shall carry out a detailed inspection and testing program for field activities. An indicative program is given below. This is however not intended to form a comprehensive program. The Tenderer shall draw up and carry out a detailed inspection/testing program at site after approval by the Project Manager. Receipt and Storage Checks



of 173

Check and record condition of each package for damage/short supply. Installation Checks: Check the whole assembly for tightness, general appearance etc. Oil leakage checks (visual) The Tenderer shall specify bolt tightness (torque) and sequencing in the O & M manual to ensure oil tightness. Pre-commissioning Checks Check the oil level in the transformer tank, cooling system etc. Check the bushing for conformity of connection the lines etc. Check for correct operation of all protection and alarms. Excessive winding temperature Excessive oil temperature Low oil level indication Check for the adequate protection on the electric circuit supplying to the accessories. Check resistance of all winding on all steps of tap changers Vector group and ratio test. Magnetic balance test. Insulation resistance measurement for Control wiring Main windings Check for cleanliness of the transformer and the surroundings. Installation The entire work of installation, testing and commissioning of equipment supplied under this package shall be carried out by Tenderer. For this purpose, the Tenderer shall depute suitable qualified technical team to site on advance intimation by the Employer along with all necessary equipment required for installation, testing and commissioning. This team shall be responsible for the installation, testing and commissioning of the transformers as per IS:1886. The Tenderer shall ensure that under the Installation activities the equipment supplied by him are installed in a neat workman like manner such that the equipment is properly leveled and these is no leakage of oil through the gaskets etc. The tolerances shall be established as indicated in Tenderers drawings and/or as stipulated by the Employer. All necessary and special tools and tackles required for installation, testing and commissioning of equipment shall be supplied by the Tenderer.



of 173

Installation, testing and commissioning manuals and procedures shall be supplied, prior to dispatch of equipment for Employer’s review. The Tenderer shall ensure that installation work shall be completed as per the drawings, instruction and recommendations correctly while handling, installation, testing and commissioning the equipment. Test Reports Test results shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 75 deg C. Two copies of test results shall be submitted for the Owner's/Consultants approval before dispatch of transformer. Additional bound copies, as required by the Owners/Consultants contract, of complete test results including all tests on transformer, bushing, current transformer (if provided), shall be furnished with the transformer. EARTH PITS AND EARTHING Scope All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed as per IS: 3043. All equipment, metal conduits, rising main cable armour, switch gear, distribution boards, meters, all other metal parts forming part of the work shall be bonded together and connected by two separate and distinct conductors to earth electrodes. Earthing shall be in conformity with the provisions of Rules 32, 61, 62, 67 and 68 of IER 1956. GI Pipe Earth Station G.I. pipe shall be of medium class, 40 mm dia and 3.5 m length. Galvanising shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. G.I. pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12 mm dia drilled not less than 7.5 cm from each other up to 2 M of length from bottom. The pipe electrode shall be as far as practicable embedded below permanent moisture level. Except where rock is encountered, pipes shall be driven to a depth of at least 2.5 meter. Where rock is encountered at a depth of less than 2.5mtr the electrode may be buried inclined to the vertical and the inclinations shall not be more than 30 deg from the vertical. The pipe electrode shall be made of one piece. Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a heavy-duty GI pipe and connected to the pipe electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. GI pipe shall be terminated in a wire meshed funnel. The funnel shall be enclosed in a masonry chamber of 450 mm x 450 mm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with C.I. frame and CI inspection cover. The earth station shall also be provided with a suitable permanent identification label tag. The earth electrode shall conform to IS:3043 latest edition. The soil around the earthing electrode shall be treated to reduce the resistivity of the soil by filling the complete depth of electrode with alternative layers of charcoal and salt. Plate Earth Station Plate electrodes shall be made of G.I./copper (CU) plate of 6mm/3mm thick and 600 x 600mm size. The plate shall be buried vertically in ground at a depth of not less than 2.5 meters to the top of the plate, the plate being encased in charcoal to a thickness of 300 mm all round. It is preferable to bury the electrode to a depth where subsoil water is present. Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a heavy-duty GI pipe and connected to the plate electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. A GI pipe of not less than 20 mm dia shall be clamped with bolts vertically to the plate and terminated in a wire meshed funnel. The funnel shall be enclosed in a masonry chamber of 450 mm x 450 mm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with GI frame and CI inspection cover. The earth station shall also be



of 173

provided with a suitable permanent identifications label tag. The earth electrode shall conform to IS:3043 latest edition. Earthing Conductors All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper/or GI as specified and shall be protected against mechanical damage and corrosion. The connection of earth electrodes shall be strong secure and sound and shall be easily accessible. The earth conductors shall be rigidly fixed to the walls, cable trenches, cable tunnel, conduits and cables by using suitable clamps. Main earth bus shall be taken from the main medium voltage panel to the earth electrodes. The number of electrodes required shall be arrived at taking into consideration the anticipated fault on the medium voltage network. Earthing conductors for equipment shall be run from the exposed metal surface of the equipment & connected to a suitable point on the sub main or main earthing bus. All switch boards, distribution boards and isolators disconnect switches shall be connected to the earth bus. Earthing conductors shall be terminated at the equipment using suit able lugs, bolts, washers and nuts. All conduits cable armouring etc., shall be connected to the earth all along their run by earthing conductors of suitable cross-sectional area. The electrical resistance of earthing conductors shall be low enough to permit the passage of fault current necessary to operate a fuse/ protective device or a circuit breaker and shall not exceed 2 Ohms. Location of Earth Electrode Normally an earth electrode shall not be situated less than 2 M from any building. Care shall be taken that excavation for earth electrode may not affect the column footings or foundation of the building. Further the location shall be such where the soil has reasonable chance of retaining moisture as far as possible. Entrances, pavements and roadways are definitely to be avoided for locating the earth electrode. Earthing System Main earthing grid shall be of 30 x 6 GI strip laid in a grid formation. All other equipment shall be earthed to this strip. All panels, equipment and non-current carrying conductor shall be earthed through the strip/wire of suitable size. Main panels - 30 x 6 Main panels to sub panels - 20 x 3 Sub panel to DB - PVC Cu wire / As per BOQ/Drawings DBs to sub DBs - 8 SWG G.I./PVC Cu wire as per dwg Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be capable of retaining low resistance even after subjection to fault currents. Joints shall be tinned, soldered and/or double rivetted. All the joints shall be mechanically and electrically continuous and effective. Joints shall be protected against corrosion. Testing On the completion of the entire installation, the following tests shall be conducted: Earth resistance of electrodes. Impedance of earth continuity conductors.



of 173

Effectiveness of earthing. All meters, instruments and labour required for the tests shall be provided by the Tenderer. The test results shall be submitted in the prescribed tabulated form in triplicate to the consultants for approval. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Scope The scope of work under this section covers the specifications for supply, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of lightening protection system consisting of the following: Air termination network. Roof conductors. Down conductors. Testing joint Earth termination network. Standards The lightning protection system shall comply with IS: 2309/ 1989 and Indian Electricity Act and Rules. System The lightning protection system shall be installed as indicated on the drawings or in case such is not available the Tenderer shall prepare one as per IS-2309/1989 and get the same approved by Employer /Consultant. As air terminals shall be installed on the highest roof of the building, the air terminals shall be joined to horizontal roof conductor by means of rivets/clamps. Roof conductor shall be laid horizontally on the roof as indicated on the drawing. Down conductor shall be installed on the vertical surface of the building. The down conductor shall be joined with roof conductors in the method as prescribed by the code. A test joint shall be provided in the down conductor 1000 mm above the ground level at a place which is easily accessible for testing. The down conductor shall be joined with earth termination network or to the earthing station as indicated on the drawing. The earthing station and the earthing conductor shall be as per section under heading "EARTHING". Component Part Air Terminals and Roof Conductors An air termination shall consist of vertical conductor or a system of horizontal conductors and shall be installed along the outer perimeter of the roof. No part of the roof shall be more than 9 m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor. All metallic projections, chimneys, ducts, vent pipe, railings, gutters etc., on or above the main surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination network. The method and nature of the fixing shall be simple, solid and permanent.



of 173

The minimum dimension of the air termination network shall be as follows:

Above Ground Below Ground Galvanised iron strip 20 x 3 mm 30 mm x 6 mm The Air terminal shall be installed vertical on the highest point of the roof and shall be clamped firmly with the structure. The roof conductor shall be laid horizontally above the finishing of the roof surface. Down Conductor The number of down conductors shall be as follows: A structure having a base area not exceeding 100 sq.m. shall have only one down conductor. For a structure having a base area exceeding 100 sq.m, the number of down conductors shall equal to smaller of the following: One, for first 100 sq. m plus one more for every 300 sq.m or part thereof in excess of the first 100 sq.m or one for every 30 m of perimeter. The down conductor shall be distributed around the outside wall of the structure. Any external metal running vertically through the structure shall be bonded to the down conductor at the top and bottom. A down conductor shall follow the most direct path possible between the air terminals and the earth termination. The size of the down conductor shall be similar to roof conductor/air termination network. Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing joint in such a position that, it is convenient for testing. (about 1000 mm above Ground level) Joints and Bonds The lightning protection system shall have as few joints as possible. Joints and bonds shall be mechanically and electrically effective eg. clamped, screwed, bolted, riveted or welded. With overlapping joint, the length of overlapping shall not be less than 25mm for all types of conductor. Contact surfaces shall be first cleaned, then inhibited from oxidation with a suitable non-corrosive compound. Joints of dissimilar metals shall be protected from moisture by an inert, tenacious material. The lightning conductor shall be secured at not more than 2 M apart for horizontal run and 1.0 M for vertical run by fasteners resistive to corrosion. Earth Resistance: The resistance from any part of the lightning protection system to earth shall not exceed 10 Ohm before any bonding has been affected to metal in or on a structure or to services below ground. If the value obtained exceeds the specified 10 Ohm it shall be reduced by adding to the number of earth electrode. In addition, the resistance from the earth electrode to the nearest test clamps shall not exceed 0.2 Ohm. Method of Measurement:



of 173

The complete earth conductor shall be measured and paid per unit length, including air termination network, down conductor, test joints and earthing termination network. LT SWITCHGEARS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS: Scope This section shall cover supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of medium voltage cubicle type MV Switchgear and Distribution boards as described in these specifications, drawings and schedule of quantities. The distribution boards are designated as: Meter Board Measurement The unit rate per item shall include design supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of MV Assembly Distribution boards, with all the components in place, internal cabling, as specified in this specification, and shown on the drawing, and load schedule complete with supply and fixing of M.S. channel/ angle iron support on wall/floor etc. In case of switchgears and panels issued by owner for erection the unit rate shall include inspection, receiving, storage, installation, field testing and commissioning activities including coordination with the suppliers of the switchgears. The rate shall be quoted per set of switchgears/panels as identified in the DWG. The details of design/Constructional features of these switchgears are specified here below. System Rating All the Meter boards, shall be suitable for operation on three phase/ single phase, 415/230 volts, 50 Hz neutral solidly grounded at transformer and short circuit level not less than 415 Volts at 25 KA. The Distribution boards shall be designed to withstand heaviest condition at site, with maximum expected ambient temperature of 40ºC, 90-95 percent humidity and dusty weather. Standard and Codes The Distribution boards shall comply with the latest edition of relevant Indian Standards and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations. The following Indian Standards shall be complied with:

IS 1394 - L.V. switchgear and control gear Part-I - 1993 General rules IS 5578-85 Guide for marking of insulated conductors. IS 11353-85 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of

conductors And apparatus terminals.

IS 2147-62 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switch gear and control gears.

IS 2675-83 Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cutouts for Voltages not exceeding 1000 V.

IS 2551-82 Danger notice plates. IS 13947-1993 Circuit breakers. (Part-II) IS 13947-1993 Switches, Disconnectors, switch disconnector (Part - III) and fuse

combination units. IS 1818-72 Alternating current isolators (disconnectors) and earthing switches.



of 173

IS 8623-77 Factory built assembles of switchgear and control gear for voltages upto and including 1000 V AC & 1200 V DC.

IS 8828 Miniature air break circuit breakers for voltages not exceeding 1000 V.

IS 9926 Fuse wires used in rewireable type Electric fuses upto 1100 Volts. IS 2208 HRC fuse links IS 2705 Current Transformers (Part- I,II & III) IS 3156 Voltage Transformers (Part- I,II & III) IS 1248 Indicating Instruments IS 722 Integrating Instruments IS 13947-93 Control devices and switching elements. (Part - 5) Section-1 IS 13947-93 Contactors and motor starter section 1 (Part - 4)

Electromechanical. Section - 1

Section-1 IS 3231 Relays IS 375 Marking and arrangement of busbars Indian Electricity Act and

Rules.

Shop Drawings Prior to fabrication of the Switchgears, Distribution boards, the Tenderer shall submit for Construction manager/Consultants approval the shop/ vendor drawing, and design calculations, indicating type, size, short circuit rating of all the electrical components used, details & schedule of components & model Nos. type, rating etc., busbar size, internal wiring size, Distribution board dimension, colour, mounting detail etc., The Tenderer shall submit manufacturer's catalogues of the electrical components installed in the distribution. Inspection At all reasonable times during production and prior to transport of the distribution boards to site, the Tenderer shall arrange and provide all the facilities at their plant for inspection by Construction manager/Consultant or authorised representative. Test Certificates Testing of Distribution boards shall be carried out at factory and or at site as specified in Indian Standards in the presence of Construction manager/Consultants The test results shall be recorded on prescribed forms. The test certificates for the test carried out at factory or at site shall be submitted in six copies to the Construction manager/Consultants for approval. Construction CUBICLE TYPE MV SWITCHGEARS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS: Structure The MV Switchgears panels and Distribution boards shall be sheet steel enclosed cubicle pattern, floor mounted free standing, totally enclosed dead front, compartmentalized multitier formation design. The panels shall be extensible type with provision for bus bar extensions. Generally all Switchgears, Panels, shall be of front access only & suitable for top entry of cables unless otherwise specifically specified for bottom entry.



of 173

All MS. sheet steel used in the construction of Distribution boards shall be 2mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Sheet steel shrouds and partitions shall be of minimum 1.6 mm thickness. Joints of any kind in sheet steel shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. The height of the panels should not be more than 2000 mm. The operating levels of the top most cubicle shall not be more than 1700 mm. The Panels / Distribution boards shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof. Gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be fully gasketed with foam rubber and/or rubber strips and shall be lockable. Doors shall have concealed hinges. All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame, and holes in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with bolt and nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of the panels/DBs etc. A base channel of 75mm x75mm x 5mm thick shall be provided at the bottom. A clearance of 300mm between the floor of the Panels/ Distribution Board and the bottom of the lower most unit shall be provided. The Panels/ Distribution boards shall be preferably arranged in multitier formation. These shall be of adequate size with a provision of 20 Percent spare space to accommodate possible future additional switch gear. The size of the boards shall be designed in such a way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement, and the electrical component do not attain temperature more than 40 degree Celsius. Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Panels/Distribution board in conformity with the number, and size of incoming and outgoing conduits/cables. Alternatively, the Panels/Distribution boards shall be provided with removable undrilled sheet steel gland plates (3mm thick) at top to drill holes for cable/ conduit entry at site. The switch boards shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and repair. The Panels/Distribution boards shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without distortion under normal and short circuit condition. They shall be suitably braced for short circuit duty. Provision shall be made for permanently earthing the frames and other non-current carrying parts of the switchgear by two independent earth connections. The meter boards shall be requiring space for meter as per electricity authority. Protection Class All indoor Panels/Distribution boards shall have degree of protection conforming to class IP 43 as per IS 2147. While outdoor panels shall be weather proof dust and water tight IP-55.



of 173

Metal Treatment and Finish All sheet steel work used in the construction of switchboard shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphating, passivating and then spraying with a high corrosion resistant primer. The primer shall be baked in an oven followed by finishing treatment of two coats of epoxy paint alternatively these shall be powder coated to the specified shade of IS.5 of approved colour and stove. Inside the doors shall be painted ivory white, matt finished. The total thickness of paint shall not be less than 25 microns. Bus Bars The Bus bars shall be of three phase four wire system with separate neutral and earth bar. The busbars, and interconnection between busbars and various components shall be of high conductivity, high strength aluminium alloy complying with the requirement of grade E91E of IS 5082. The busbar shall be of rectangular cross section designed to withstand full load current for phase busbars and half rated current for neutral busbars and shall be extensible on both sides. The bus bar shall be rated for the frame size of the main incoming breaker, but in any case, not less than 200 amp. capacity. The busbar shall have uniform cross section throughout the length. The busbars and interconnections shall be coated with heat resistant sleeves & colour coding. The busbars shall be supported on unbreakable, non-hygroscopic insulated supports of FRP SMC supports at sufficiently close intervals to prevent busbar sag and shall effectively withstand without damage electromagnetic stresses in the event of short circuit. The neutral as well as earth bar shall also be capable of withstanding the fault level. The busbars shall be housed in a separate compartment. The busbar shall be isolated with 3mm thick Bakelite sheet to avoid any accidental contact. All busbars connections shall be done by drilling holes in busbars and connecting by chromium plated brass bolts and nuts. Additional cross section of bus bars shall be provided in all Panels/ Distribution boards to cover up the holes drilled in the busbars. Spring and flat washers shall be used for tightening the bolts. All connections between busbars and circuit breakers/ switches and between circuit breakers/switches and cable terminals shall be through solid copper strips of proper size to carry full rated current. These strips shall be insulated with insulating heat resistant paint with colour coding. Circuit Compartments Each circuit breaker shall be housed in separate compartments and shall be enclosed on all sides. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker units in "ON" and "OFF" positions. Safety interlocks shall be provided for air circuit breaker to prevent the breaker from being drawn-out when the breaker is in "ON" position. The door shall not form an integral part of the draw out position of the circuit breaker. All instruments and indicating lamp shall be mounted on the compartment door. Sheet steel barrier shall be provided between the tiers in a vertical section. Instrument Compartments Separate and adequate compartment shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control contactors/ relays, and control fuses etc., These components shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker units, bus bars and connections. Terminals



of 173

The outgoing terminals and neutral link shall be brought out to a cable alley suitably located and accessible from the panel front. The current transformers for instruments metering shall be mounted on the terminal blocks. No direct connection of incoming or outgoing cables to internal components of the Panels/Distribution board is permitted, only one conductor may be connected in one terminal. Wireways A horizontal PVC wire way with screwed covers shall be provided at the top to take interconnecting control wiring between different vertical sections. Cable Compartments Cable compartments of adequate size shall be provided in the Panels/Distribution Boards for easy termination of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top. Adequate supports shall be provided in the cable compartments to support cables. All outgoing and incoming feeder terminals shall be brought out to terminal blocks in the cable compartment. Earthing Copper earth bars of suitable size but not less than 25 mm x 3 mm shall be provided in the Panels/Distribution Boards for the entire length of the panel. The frame work of the Panels/Distribution board shall be connected to this earth bar. Provision shall be made for connection from this earth bar to the main earthing bar coming from the earth pit on both sides of the Panels/Distribution board and to take tapping to the outgoing earthing strips to connect to the main distribution boards. The earth continuity conductor of each incoming and outgoing feeder shall be connected to this earth bar. The armour shall be properly connected with earthing clamp, and the clamp shall be ultimately bonded with the earth bar. CT earthing also shall be connected to this earth bar. Labels Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeders. Single line circuit diagram showing the arrangements of circuit inside the Panels/DBs shall be pasted on inside of the panel door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet. Internal Components The Panels/ Distribution boards shall be equipped complete with all type of required number of circuit breakers, contactors, relays, fuses, meters, instruments, indicating lamps, push buttons, equipment, fittings, busbars, cable boxes, cable glands etc., and all the necessary internal connections /wiring as required and as indicated on relevant drawings. Components necessary for proper complete functioning of the Panels/Distribution boards, but not indicated on the drawings shall be supplied and installed on the distribution boards. All parts of the Panel/Distribution boards carrying current including the components, connections, joints and instruments shall be capable of carrying their specified rated current continuously, without temperature rise exceeding the permissible values as per the relevant specifications at any part of the Panel/Distribution boards. All units of the same rating and specifications shall be fully interchangeable. MCB Distribution Boards Scope



of 173

This section relates to specifications for design supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of lighting and power distribution boards (LPDB’s), using Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB), Earth Leakage Circuit breaker (ELCB), Contactor, Neutral link, earthing terminals, control switch terminals, cubicle of CRCA sheet steel housing and complete the item installation. System The MCB distribution boards shall be suitable for operation on 400/440-volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz A.C. supply system or 220/250-volt, 1 phase, 2 wire, 50 Hz A.C. supply system. Construction The DB's shall be factory made and preferably of those manufacturers whose MCBs, ELCB's are to be used. General arrangement layout of the DB's shall be approved by the Construction manager/Consultant before manufacture. The DB shall be metal clad duly fabricated from 2mm (14/16 SWG) thick high quality CRCA sheet. The DB shall be cubicle, compartmentalized, wall/floor mounted and dead front operated. The DB shall be totally enclosed and made dust, vermin and weather proof such that it meets IP 54 of IS 2147 protection classification. A detachable cover plate of 2mm thick CRCA sheet to be provided on front of the board such that all live parts of the electrical accessories mounted on the board can be accessible only on removal of the said cover plate. Further, the cover plate shall also, have suitable cut out so that dolly of the MCB's can be operated even if the cover plate is in position. A transparent plastic protection cover shall be provided on the cut-out portion of the cover plate. The cover plate shall also provide right above the respective cut outs a suitable arrangement to label the electrical circuit details of the MCB's mounted on it as well as to affix a danger plate in legible manner. The cover plate shall be fixed to the board with adequate size zinc passivated machine screws. Above the detachable cover plate, one additional hinged door of 2mm thick CRCA sheet covering the MCB's etc., shall be provided with a suitable locking arrangement. The hinged door shall be provided with a suitable gasket capable of withstanding corrosive & humid atmosphere and to meet degree of enclosure protection IP 54 as per IS : 2147. The DB's shall undergo the process of painting as described under cubicle type main/submain distribution boards. The DB shall have top/bottom entry arrangement for incoming and outgoing cables/conduits. All hardware to be used in manufacture of the DB shall either be of mild steel zinc passivated or otherwise be treated to prevent corrosion due to humid atmosphere. All internal electrical connections shall be carried out using 1100-volt grade, PVC insulated, Copper conductor of ISI approved make, having rated current carrying capacity to carry continuous full current of respective switch/MCB rating at operating conditions prevailing at the project site. The DB internals shall be earthed with use of copper strips running throughout the length. Size of the earthing strip shall be as shown in the respective drawing.



of 173

The earthing strip shall be brought out on two sides of the DB's with bolted type earth terminating arrangement, for connecting to the building earthing grid. The earth terminal shall be of either brass or zinc passivated mild steel. All non-current carrying metal surfaces of the DB's shall be adequately treated with seven tank pretreatment process to render it free from grease, oil, oxide, dirt, etc., to make them ready to receive and hold coats of zinc chromate primer. The DB's shall be provided with electric components and accessories as per the details shown in the drawing/BOQ for the respective electric distribution board. Inspection The DB's shall be inspected and checked as per inspection manual of the DB manufacturer. Various electrical components and accessories of the DB's shall be checked as per drawing for the respective DB's. The DB's shall be checked for rigid mounting, earthing connection, proper rating & size of components, internal wiring etc., All mechanical fasteners and electrical connections shall be checked and tightened before installation. Installation The DB's shall be assembled and aligned together and be installed at site as per installation manual/ instruction of the DB manufacturer. The installation shall conform to relevant Indian Standard specification and requirement of local site conditions. The DB shall be installed in surface/concealed manner at the location as shown in the respective drawings. All minor electrical and mechanical work required to be attended to on the DB shall be completed in an approved manner after installation but before energizing the DB's. Test Prior to commissioning of the DB's following tests shall be carried out. Mechanical endurance test shall be carried out by closing and opening of all the MCB's, switches etc. Insulation resistance test shall be carried out between phases and between phase to earth bus, keeping the isolating switch in open position. Similar test shall be carried out keeping the isolating switch in closed position. All the interlocks, controls and tripping mechanisms of the switch gears shall be tested for their proper functioning. Each panel shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled space heater of adequate rating and single-phase plug point and cubicle illumination lamp with switch operated at 240V AC, 50 Hz. Heaters shall have individual ON-OFF switches.



of 173

Components The type, size and rating of the components shall be as indicated on the relevant drawings. While selection of the capacity of the components resulting from the prevailing conditions like room temperature shall be allowed for, the thermal and magnetic trip rating shall be compensated for the ambient temperature. The rating indicated on the drawings are ratings anticipated at prevailing site condition. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) MCCBs shall satisfy the requirements of IS-2516 and shall be of current limiting type. MCCB shall provide type `C' protection to the contactors as per IEC 158-1B. MCCBs shall be quick make, quick break, independent manual type with trip free feature with mechanical ON, OFF, and TRIP indications. A trip button shall be provided for tripping the breaker. MCCB shall have thermal, magnetic, undervoltage and earth fault releases. Alarm and auxiliary contacts, terminal shrouds, sliding type front operation kit with facility for door interlocking and pad locking shall be provided. Fuse Switch Units The fuse switch units shall be 3 pole double break type suitable for load break duty, quick make and break action. Separate neutral link shall be provided in the switch. All fuse switch units shall be provided with hinged doors duly interlocked with operating mechanism so as to prevent opening of the door when the switch is in "ON" position and also prevent closing of the switch when the door is not properly secured. All contacts shall be silver plated and all live parts shall be shrouded. The incoming and outgoing terminals of switch shall be adequately sized to receive proper size of cables. High rupturing capacity (HRC) fuse links shall be provided with switch fuse units and shall be in accordance with IS: 2208-1962 and having rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 volts. HRC fuse links shall be provided with visible indicators to show that they have operated. The switch fuse unit shall be manufactured in accordance with IS:4047-1967 as amended to date. Miniature Circuit Breaker Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type and conform to IS:8828. The housing of MCBs shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The fault current of MCBs shall not be less than 9000 amps, at 230 volts. The MCBs shall be flush mounted and shall be provided with trip free manual operating mechanism with mechanical "ON" and "OFF" indications. The circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the breaker on a faulty circuit. The MCB contacts shall be silver nickel and silver graphite alloy and tip coated with silver. Proper arc chutes shall be provided to quench the arc immediately. MCB's shall be provided with magnetic fluid plunger release for over current and short circuit protection. The over load or short circuit devices shall have a common trip bar in the case of DP and TPN Miniature Circuit Breakers. All the MCB's shall be tested and certified as per Indian Standards, prior to installation. Fuse Fuses shall be of high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuse links and shall be in accordance with relevant ISS and having rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 volts. The backup fuse rating for each



of 173

motor/ equipment shall be so chosen that the fuse does not operate on starting of motors/equipment. HRC fuses shall be of English Electric make or approved equal. Contactors The contactors shall meet with the requirements of IS:2959. The contactors shall be of MN series only. The contactors shall have minimum making and breaking capacity in accordance with utilization category AC3 and shall be suitable for minimum class II intermittent duty. If the contactor forms part of a distribution board then a separate enclosure is not required, but the installation of the contactor shall be such that it is not possible to make an accidental contact with live parts. Voltmeter Voltmeter shall comply with IS-1248 (Latest edition) requirements. The dial of the meter shall be square in shape 96 x 96 Sq.mm for sub-panels & 144 x 144 Sq mm size for main panels. The voltmeter shall be moving iron type, flush pattern, with dust and moisture proof enclosure. The voltmeter selector switch shall be arranged to provide line to line voltage reading and line to neutral voltage reading. Ammeter Ammeter shall comply with IS-1248 (Latest edition). The dial of the ammeter shall be square in shape of 96 x 96 Sq.mm and 144 x 144 Sq.mm size for main panels. The Ammeter shall be moving iron type, flush pattern with dust and moisture proof enclosure. The range of the ammeter shall be in accordance with 1 to 1.5 times the feeder full load current. Separate current transformer shall be provided for all ammeters. Three way ON and OFF selector switch shall be provided for measuring current in different phases. Current Transformers (CTs) Where ammeters are called for C.T's shall be provided for current measuring. Each phase shall be provided with separate current transformer of accuracy class-I and suitable VA burden for operation of associated metering and controls. Current transformer shall be in accordance with IS:2705 as amended up to date. H.T. CABLES General The cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with Drawings. Specifications, Indian Standard Specifications IS: 1255-1967 and cable manufacturer’s instructions. The cables shall be of reputed make. The recommendations of the cable manufacturer with regard to jointing and sealing shall be strictly followed. The installation of cables shall be done by an approved, qualified and experienced person in this trade. Material The H.T. cables shall be 11 KV, aluminium conductor CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE steel tape armoured cable laid underground and or in masonry trenches as shown on Drawings. The conductor shall be made of Electrical purity aluminium wires and stranded together and compacted. The cable shall be of 3 Core type. The insulation shall be of high-quality cross-linked polyethylene applied by



of 173

extrusion process. Both conductor and the insulator are provided with shielding made of Semi Conducting compound. Armouring is applied over inner sheath and shall be of flat steel strips. The outer sheath shall be of heat resisting tropodur (PVC) compound. This shall be of black colour. Inspection All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked for any damage during transit. Joints in Cables The Tenderer shall take care to see that all the cables received at site are apportioned to various locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilisation and avoidance of jointing cable. This apportioning shall be got approved by the Owner/Consultant before the cables are cut to lengths. Where joints are unavoidable, the location of such joints shall be got approved by the Owner/Consultants. Jointing Boxes for Cables Cable joint boxes shall be of appropriate size, suitable for aluminium conductor XLPE insulated cables of 11000 volts ratings, and shall be manufactured by CCI & Indian Cable Corporation or approved equivalent. Jointing Cables All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes. Jointing of cables in the joint boxes and the filling in of compound shall be done in accordance with the best practice in trade, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in an approved manner. All straight T-joints shall be done in epoxy mould boxes with TROPOLIN/M-SEAL epoxy resin or approved equal. All jointing accessories shall also be manufactured by Indian Cable Corporation/CCI or approved equivalent. All terminal ends of conductors shall be heavily soldered upto atleast 50mm length. All cables shall be jointed colour to colour and tested for continuity and insulation resistance before jointing commences. The seals of cables must not be removed until preparations for jointing are completed. Joints shall be finished on the same day as commenced and sufficient protection for the weather shall be arranged. Joints shall be made by means of suitable solder for conductors, the conductors being firmly butted into the connections or thimbles or ferrules and the whole soldered with proper solder and soldering flux or resin. The conductors shall be efficiently insulated with high voltage insulating tape and use of spreaders of approved size and pattern. The joints shall be completely filled with epoxy compound being topped as necessary to ensure that the box is properly filled. Cable Terminations Cable termination shall be done in terminal cable box using cable glands and the cable ends sealed with sealing compound. The cable boxes of transformers shall be filled with bituminous compound manufactured by CCI or approved equal. Bonding of Cables Where a cable enters any piece of apparatus, it shall be connected to the casing by means of an approved type of armoured clamp and gland. The clamps must grip the armouring firmly to the gland or casing, so that in the event of ground movement no undue stress is passed into the cable conductors. Laying of Cables



of 173

H.T. cables shall be laid either buried directly underground or in Masonry/Concrete trenches. The cable buried underground shall be at minimum depth of 1.2 mtr. from the ground level. Sand cushion of not less than 80mm shall be provided both above and below the cable with a protective concrete slab on the top of the sand layer. The cable trench shall be back filled and compacted. Protection of Cables The cable shall be protected by placing precast reinforced 50mm, thick (1:2:4) concrete slabs 200mm wide on the top layer of sand for the length of the cable. Where more than one cable is running in the same trench, the concrete blocks shall cover all the cables and shall project minimum 80mm on either side of the cables. Cables under road crossings and any surfaces subjected to heavy traffic, shall be protected by running them through huge pipes of suitable size. MEDIUM VOLTAGE 1.1 KV GRADE XLPE / PVC CABLES The MV cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with drawings, Specifications, relevant Standard Specifications and cable manufacturer's instruction. Material The MV cables shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC sheathed of 1100 volts grade as asked for in the schedule of quantities. Cables upto 16 sq.mm shall be with copper conductor and 25 sq.mm and above shall be with aluminium conductor. Technical Requirements All XLPE Aluminium/ Copper Power cables shall be 1100 Volts grade, multi core constructed as per IS : 7098 Part-I of 1988 as follows : Stranded Aluminium /Copper conductor in case of 10 sq.mm. and above and solid conductor in case of 10 sq.mm. and below. Cores laid up The inner sheath should be bonded over with thermo-plastic material for protection against mechanical and electrical damage. Armoring should be provided over the inner sheath to guard against mechanical damage. Armouring should be Galvanised steel wires or galvanised steel strips. (In single core cables used in A.C. system armouring should be non-magnetic hard aluminium Wires/Strips. Round steel wires should be used where diameter over the inner sheath does not exceed 13 mm; above 13 mm flat steel armour should be used. Round wire of different sizes should be provided against specific request.) The outer sheath should be specially formulated heat resistant black PVC compound conforming to the requirement of type ST2 of IS: 5831-1984 extruded to form the outer sheath. Conductor shall be of electrolytic Aluminium/Copper conforming to IS: 8130 and are compact circular or compact shaped. Insulation shall be of XLPE type as per latest IS general purpose insulation for maximum rated conductor temperature 70 degree centigrade.



of 173

In Inner sheath laid up cores shall be bonded over with thermoplastic material for protection against mechanical and electrical damage. Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion and lapping up process only. Armouring shall be of galvanised steel wire/flat. Repaired cables shall not be used. Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS: 3961. The XLPE insulated cables shall conform to latest revision IS read along with this specification. The Conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper circular/ sector shaped and compacted. In multi core cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring of insulation. The XLPE insulated 1100 Volts grade power cables shall conform to latest IS and shall be suitable for a steady conductor temperature of 70 degree centigrade. The conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper as called for in the Schedule of quantities. The outer sheath shall be as per the requirement of type ST-2 of IS:5831 of 1984. The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water. Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in meters at every one meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables. Cables shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drums as per IS: 10418. Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress of water during transportation, storage and erection. The product should be coded as per IS :- 7098 Part-I as follows :- Aluminium Conductor A XLPE Insulation 2X Steel round wire armour W Steel strip armour F Steel Double round wire armour WW Steel Double strip armour FF Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armour Wa Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa PVC outer sheath Y Inspection All cables shall be inspected by the Tenderer upon receipt at site and checked for any damage during transit. Joints in Cables (To be done on written instruction from Project Engineer & Architect only). The Tenderer shall take care to see that all the cables received at site are apportioned to various locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoidance of cable jointing. This apportioning shall be got approved by the Owner’s site representative before the cables are cut to lengths. Where joints are unavoidable heat shrinkable type joints shall be made. The location of such



of 173

joints shall be got approved from the Owner’s site representative and shall be identified through a marker. Jointing Boxes Cable joint boxes shall be installed with heat shrinkable sleeve and of appropriate size, suitable for XLPE armoured cables of particular voltage rating. Jointing of Cables All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes and the filling in of compound shall be done in accordance with manufactures' instructions and in an approved manner. All straight joints shall be done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resin. All cables shall be joined colour to colour and tested for continuity and insulation resistance before jointing commence. The seals of cables must not be removed until preparations for jointing are completed. Joints shall be finished on the same day as commenced and sufficient protection from the weather shall be arranged. The conductors shall be efficiently insulated with high voltage insulating tape and by using of spreaders of approved size and pattern. The joints shall be completely topped up with epoxy compound so as to ensure that the box is properly filled. Cable Terminations Cable termination shall be done in cable terminal box using crimping sockets and proper size of glands of double compression type with earthing facility. Bonding of Cables Where a cable enters any piece of apparatus, it shall be connected to the casing by means of an approved type of armour clamp and gland. The clamps must grip the armouring firmly to the gland or casing, so that no undue stress is passed on to the cable conductors. Laying of Cables on Cable Trays Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be exercised in laying cables to avoid forming kinks. The relative position of the cables, laid on the cable tray shall be preserved and the cables shall not cross each other. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturers. All cables shall be laid with minimum one diameter gap and shall be clamped at every meter to the cable tray and shall be tagged for identification with aluminum tag and clamped properly. Tags shall be provided at both ends and all changes in directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by embossing on the tag the size of the cable, place of origin and termination. All cables passing through holes in floor or walls shall be sealed with fire retardant Sealant and shall be painted with fire retardant paint upto one meter on all joints, terminations and both sides of the wall crossings by “VIPER CABLE RETARD”. Laying of Cables in Ground The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be minimum 350 mm. Where more than one cable is to be laid in horizontal formation, the width of the trench shall be workout by providing 200 mm gap between the cables, except where otherwise specified. There shall be clearance of 150 mm between the end cable and the side wall of the trench. The minimum depth of the cable trench shall



of 173

not be less than 1200 mm for single layer of cables. When the cables are laid in more than one tier the depth of the trench shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional tier. Excavation of trenches: The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided. Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual. The excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench. The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick bats etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 100 mm in depth. Prior to laying of cables, the cores shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance. The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks, at a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of the drum and the spindle is horizontal. Cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire drum length shall be laid in one stretch. However, where this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by `Flaking’ i.e. by making one long loop in the reverse direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted off the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 meters apart and laid in a reasonably straight line. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a cover of clean, dry sand of not less than 150 mm. above the base cushion of sand before the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 300 mm shall be provided over the initial bed before the second tier is laid. Finally, the cables shall be protected by second class bricks before back filling the trench. Back Filling: The trenches shall be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp-edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 300 mm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in the center and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence. Cables Inside Buildings Cables inside buildings shall be laid on the cable trays. All cables passing through walls shall run through GI Pipes of adequate diameter 50 mm apart maintaining the relative position over the entire length. Route Marker Route marker shall be provided along straight runs of the cables not exceeding 100 meters also for change in the direction of the cable route and underground joints. Route marker shall be of cast iron painted with aluminum paint. The size of marker shall be 100 mm dia with “Cable” and voltage grade inscribed on it. Cable Trays Cable Trays shall be Galvanized and factory fabricated out of MS channels, angle iron, tee, bends, sections, flats and perforated sheet for different loads and number and size of cables as given below: Note: Suitable length of 8 mm dia GI rod suspenders at 2000 mm intervals shall be included in the item for perforated type cable tray. SPECIFICATION FOR HOT DIP GALVANIZING PROCESS FOR MILD STEEL USED FOR EARTHING, CABLE TRAYS OR JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. Quality of Zinc Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS:209-1992.



of 173

Coating Requirement Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in accordance with IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm. The weight of coating expressed in grams per square meter shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface. The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters. Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and then galvanizing. Testing of Cables Cables shall be tested at works for the following tests before being dispatched to site by the project team.

Insulation Resistance Test.

Continuity resistance test.

Sheathing continuity test.

Earth test. (in armoured cables)

Hi Pot Test. Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for each length of cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner’s site representative.

Insulation Resistance Test (Sectional and overall)

Continuity resistance test.

Sheathing continuity test.

Earth test. All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice and Electricity Rules. The Tenderer shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting the above tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Owner’s site representative. SAFETY EQUIPMENT Danger Plate Danger plate shall be provided on HV and MV equipment. MV danger notice plate shall be 200 mm x 150 mm made of mild steel atleast 2 mm thick with vitreous enameled white on both side and with inscription in red colour on front side. Fire Extinguishers Portable CO2 conforming to IS:2878-1976, and dry chemical conforming to IS:2171-1967 shall be provided in the Sub-station. Rubber Mats for Electrical Purpose Materials: Mats shall be of vulcanized rubber compound free from fabric insertions and fibrous materials.



of 173

The upper surface shall have ribs or any other pattern, the thickness shall not be less than 6.5 mm at the root of the pattern. The material shall be free from blisters, pin holes, cracks, embeded foreign matters and other defects. INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, PLUMBING, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY WORKS Applicable Codes The latest edition of the applicable standards and codes are made a part of this work. Sanitary Installation The work shall he carried out complying in all respects with any specific requirements of the local body in whose jurisdiction the work is situated and as approved by the Employer's Representative. Any damage caused to the building, or to installations therein, either due to negligence on the part of the Tenderer, or due to actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building or the installation shall be restored to its original condition by the Tenderer. All sanitary and plumbing work shall be carried out by licensed plumbers. All sanitary appliances including sanitary fittings, fixtures, toilet requisites shall be of size, and design as approved by the Employer's Representative. All white glazed porcelain fixtures, such as wash basin, sink drain board, water closet pan, urinal, 'P' trap etc., shall have hard durable white glazed finish. They shall be free from cracks and other glazing defects. No chipped porcelain fixtures shall be used. Joints between iron and earthenware pipes shall be made perfectly air and water tight by caulking with neat cement mortar. Indian Type Water Closet This shall be the Orissa pattern with integral type footrests made of white glazed vitreous china. The general requirements shall conform to IS: 2556 (Parts III and X). Each pan shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet or supply horn for connecting the flush type. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self-draining type. It shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet to the pan. The flushing inlet shall be in the front, unless otherwise approved by the Employer's Representative. The inside of the bottom of pan shall have sufficient slope from the front towards the outlet and the surface shall be uniform and smooth enable easy and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior surface shall be unglazed and sufficiently rough or grooved at right angles to the axis of the outlet. Pans shall be provided with a trap `p' or `S' type with a minimum 50 mm water seal and 50 mm dia. Vent horn. Pan shall be laid at the correct location and level over a bed of lime concrete using brick aggregates (I part lime mortar to 2 parts brick bats with lime mortar to 2 parts of sand) or cement-sand admixture as specified in the drawings. European Type Water Closet Water closets shall be of white glazed vitreous china as specified and shall be of “Siphonic Wash down type" conforming to IS:2556 (Part VIII). The closets shall be of one-piece construction with approved



of 173

plastic/Bakelite seat and cover. Each water closet shall have 4 fixing holes having a minimum diameter of 6.5 mm for fixing to floor and shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet of supply horn for connecting the flush pipe. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self-draining type. The water closet shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet. Each water closet shall have an integral trap with either “S" or "P" outlet with at least 50 mm water seal. The water closets shall have an ant siphonage 50 mm dia. vent horn on the outlet side of the trap. The inside of water closet and traps shall be uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush. The serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed externally. The water closet when sealed at the bottom of the trap in line with the back plate, shall be capable of holding not less than 10 liters of water between the normal water level and the highest possible water level of the water closet installed. Urinals Urinals shall be of the bowl pattern, either flat back or angle back type lipped in front. They shall be of white glazed earthenware, white glazed vitreous china or white glazed fire clay, and of size as specified conforming to IS 2556 (Part VI). The urinals shall be of one-piece construction. Each urinal shall be provided with not less than two fixings holes of a minimum dia of 6.5 mm on each side. Each urinal shall have an integral flushing box rim of suitable type and inlet or supply horn for connecting the flush pipe. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self-draining type. It shall have a weep hole at the flushing. inlet of the urinal. At the bottom of the urinal. an outlet horn for connecting to an outlet pipe shall be provided. The exterior of the outlet horn shall not be glazed and the surface shall be provided with grooves at right angles to the axis of the outlet to facilitate fixing to the uniform and smooth throughout to ensure efficient flushing. Flushing Cisterns The flushing cisterns shall be automatic or manually operated, high level or low level, as approved by the Employer's Representative. For water closets and urinals high level cistern is intended to operate with minimum height of 125 cm and a low-level cistern a maximum height of 30 cm between the top of the pan and the underside of the cistern, they shall be of PVC 10 liters capacity white, manually operated in case of WCs. Automatic flushing cistern for urinals shall conform to IS 2326. Cast Iron Soil Waste and Vent Pipes and Fittings. All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of uniform thickness with strong and deep sockets, free from flaws, air holes, cracks, sand holes and other defects and confirm to IS 1729. The diameter approved shall be internal diameter of pipe. The pipes and fittings shall be true to shape, smooth and cylindrical and shall ring clearly when struck over with a light hand hammer. All pipes and fittings shall be properly cleaned of all foreign material before being fixed. All plug bends of drainage pipes shall be provided with inspection and cleaning caps, covers, which shall be fixed with nuts and screws. Pipes shall be fixed to the wall by W.I. or M.S. holder bat clamps, unless projecting ears with fixing holes are provided at socket end of pipe. The clamps shall be fixed to the walls by embedding their hooks in cement concrete blocks (1:2:4) 10 cm x 10 cm making necessary holes in the walls at proper places. All holes and breakages shall be made good. The clamps shall be kept 25 mm clear of the finished face of the walls to facilitate cleaning and painting of pipes. The annular space between the socket and spigot shall be filled with a gasket of hemp or spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry. The joint shall then be filled with stiff cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) well pressed with caulking tool and finished smooth on top at an angle of 45°C. The joint shall be kept wet for not less than 7 days by tying a piece of gunny bag kept moist. Joints shall be perfectly air tight as well as water tight.



of 173

C.I. pipes and fittings which are exposed shall be first cleaned and then painted with a coat of red lead primer. Two coats of zinc paint with white base and mixed with pigment of required colour to get the approved shade shall be given over the base primer coat. The thickness of fittings and their socket and spigot dimensions shall conform to the thickness and dimensions approved for the corresponding sizes of straight pipes. The connection between the main pipe and branch pipes shall be made by using branches and bends with access for cleaning. Floor traps shall be provided with 25 mm dia puff pipe where the length of the waste is more than 1800 mm or the floor trap is connected to a waste stack through bends. All cast iron pipes and fittings including joints shall be tested by a smoke test to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative and left in working condition after completion. The smoke test shall be carried out as stated under: Smoke shall be pumped into the pipe at the lowest and from a smoke machine which consists of a bellow and a burner. The material usually burnt is greasy cotton waste which gives out a clear pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as by smell if there is a leak at any point of the pipe line. Water test and air test shall be conducted as stipulated in IS 5329. PIPES General Any damage caused to the building, or to electric, sanitary water supply or other installations etc. therein either due to negligence on the part of the Tenderer, or due to actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building or the installations shall be restored to its original condition by the Tenderer. Nothing extra shall be paid for it, except where otherwise specified. All water supply installation work shall be carried out through licensed plumbers. It is most important to ensure that wholesome water supply provided for drinking and culinary purposes, is in no way liable to contamination from any less satisfactory water. There shall, therefore, be no cross connection whatsoever between a pipe or fitting for conveying or containing wholesome water and a pipe or fitting for conveying or containing impure water or water liable to contamination or of uncertain quality of water which has been used for any purpose. The provision of reflux or nonreturn valves or closed and sealed valves shall not be construed a permissible substitute for complete absence of cross-connection. Where a supply of wholesome water is required as an alternative or standby to supply of less satisfactory water or is required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered only into a cistern, and by a pipe or fitting discharging into the air gap at a height above the top edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore, and in no case less than 15 cm. No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into, through or adjoining any sewer, scour outlet or drain or any manhole connected therewith nor through any ash pit or manure-pit or any material of such nature that can cause undue deterioration of the pipe. Where the laying of any pipe through fouled soil or previous material is unavoidable, the piping shall be properly protected from contact with such soil or material by being carried through an exterior cast iron tube or by some other suitable means. Any piping or fitting laid or fixed which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed and re-laid in conformity with the above requirements.



of 173

The design of the pipe work shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply from any cistern or appliance whether by siphonage or otherwise, and reflux or non-return valves shall not be relied upon to prevent such back flow. All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed, and maintained so that it remains completely watertight, thereby avoiding wastage of water, damage to property and the risk of contamination of the water conveyed. In designing and planning the layout of the pipe work, due attention shall be given to the maximum rate of discharge, required economy in labour and materials, protection against damage and corrosion, protection from frost, if required, and to avoidance of airlocks, noise transmission and unsightly arrangement. To reduce frictional losses, piping shall be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of jointing shall be such as to avoid internal roughness and projection at the joints, whether of the jointing materials or otherwise. Change in diameter and in direction shall preferably be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made so as to materially reduce or alter the cross-section. Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by frost or traffic loads and vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence, but where such ground cannot be avoided; special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the piping. Where piping has to be laid across recently disturbed ground, the ground shall be thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and even support. Where the service pipe is of diameter less than 50 mm the stop valves shall be of the screw down type and shall have loose washer plates to act as non-return valves. Other stop valves in the service line may be of the gate type. In flats and tenements supplied by a common service pipe a stop valve shall be fixed to control each branch separately. In large buildings a sufficient number of stop valves shall be fixed on branch pipes, and to control groups of ball valves and draw off taps, so as to minimize interruption of the supply during repairs, all such stop valves shall be fixed in accessible positions and properly protected from being tampered with, they may be of the gate type to minimize loss of head by friction. Water for drinking or for culinary purposes as far as possible shall be on branch pipes connected directly to the service pipe. Pumps shall not be allowed on the service pipe as they cause a drop of pressure on the suction side thereby affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where pumping is required, a properly protected storage tank of adequate capacity shall be provided to feed the pump. Service pipes shall be so designed and constructed as to avoid air-locks, so that all piping and fittings above ground can be completely emptied of water to facilitate repairs. There shall be draining taps or draw-off taps (not underground) at the lowest points, from which the piping shall rise continuously to draw-off taps, ball valves, cisterns, or vents (where provided at the high points). Service pipes shall be designed so as to reduce the production and transmission of noise as much as possible. Appliances which create noise shall be installed as far distant as possible from the living rooms of the house. High velocity of water in piping and fittings shall be avoided. Piping shall be confined, as far as possible, to rooms where appliances are fixed, it shall have easy bends, and where quietness is particularly desired, holder bats or clamps shall be insulated from the piping by suitable pads.



of 173

The rising pipe to the storage cistern, if any, or to any feed cistern shall be taken as directly as possible to the cistern and shall be fixed away from windows or ventilators. All pipe work shall be planned so that the piping is accessible for inspection, replacement and repair. To avoid its being unsightly, it is usually possible to arrange it in or adjacent to cupboards, recesses, etc. provided there is sufficient space to work on the piping with the usual tools. Piping shall not be buried in walls or solid floors. Where unavoidable, piping may be buried for short distances provided that adequate protection is given against damage and that no joints are buried. If piping is laid in ducts or chases, these shall be roomy enough to facilitate repairs and shall be so constructed as to prevent the entry of vermin. To facilitate removal of pipe casing, floor boards covering piping shall be fixed with screws or bolts. When it is necessary for a pipe to pass through a wall or floor, a sleeve shall be fixed therein for insertion of the pipe and to allow freedom for expansion, contraction and other movement. Piping laid in wood floors shall, where possible, be parallel with the joists. Where storage tanks are provided to meet overall requirements of water connection of service pipe with any distributing pipe shall not be permitted except one direct connection for culinary or drinking requirements. No service pipe shall be connected to any water closet or urinal. All such supplies shall be from flushing cisterns which shall have supply from storage tank. No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot-water system or to any apparatus used for heating other than through a feed cistern thereof. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipes CPVC pipes & fittings used in hot & cold potable water distribution system shall conform to requirement of IS 15778. The material from which the pipe is produced shall consist of chlorinated polyvinyl chlorides. The polymer from which the pipe compounds are to be manufactured shall have chlorine content not less than 66.5%. The internal and external surfaces of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. The pipes shall not have any detrimental effect on the composition of the water flowing through it. Diameter and wall thickness of CPVC pipes are as per given in Table below.

For CPVC pipes SDR is calculated by dividing the average outer diameter of the pipe in mm by the minimum wall thickness in mm. If the wall thickness calculated by this formula is less than 1.52 mm, it shall be increased to 1.52 mm. The SDR values shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5.



of 173

Galvanised Mild Steel (G.I.) Pipes The pipes shall be galvanised mild steel welded pipes and seamless screwed and sockets types conforming to the requirements of IS 1239, for medium grade. They shall be of the diameter (nominal bore) approved. The sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended. The pipes and sockets shall be finished neatly, well galvanised on both inner and outer surfaces, and shall be tree from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects. All screws, threads shall be clean and well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of the tube. All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads conforming to the requirements of IS 554. Screwed tubes shall have taper threads while the sockets shall have parallel threads. The fittings shall he of malleable cast iron or mild steel types complying with all the appropriate requirements as approved for pipes. The fittings shall he designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended. The fittings shall have screw threads at the ends conforming to the requirements of IS 554. Female threads on fittings shall be parallel and male threads (except on running nipples and collars of unions) shall be tapered. The pipes and fittings shall be inspected at site before use to ascertain that they conform to the specification. The defective pipes shall be rejected. Where the pipes have to be cut or rethreaded, the ends shall be carefully filled out so that no obstruction to bore is offered. The ends of the pipes shall then be threaded conforming to the requirements of IS 554 with pipe dies and taps carefully in such a manner as will not result in slackness of joints when the two pieces are screwed together. The taps and dies shall be used only for straightening bent and damaged screw threads and shall not be used for turning of the threads so as the make them slack, water tight joint. The screw-thread of pipes and fittings shall be protected from damage until they are fitted. The pipes shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matter before being laid. In jointing the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the pipes shall be oiled and rubbed over tight white lead and few turns of spun yarn wrapped around the screwed end of the pipe. The end shall then be screwed in the socket. tee, etc. with the pipe wrench. Care should be taken that all pipes and fittings are properly jointed so as to make the joints completely water tight and pipes are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing. Burrs from the joint shall be removed after screwing. After laying, the open ends of the pipes shall be temporarily plugged to prevent access of soil or any other foreign matter. Any threads exposed after jointing shall be painted or in the case of underground piping thickly coated with approved anticorrosive paint to prevent corrosion. For internal work the galvanised iron pipes and fittings shall run the surface of the walls or ceiling (not in chase) unless otherwise specified. The fixing shall be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps, keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical/horizontal, when it is found necessary to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the ducts of recesses etc. provided there is sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. The pipes shall not ordinarily be buried in walls or solid floors. Where unavoidable, pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is given against damage, but the joints in pipes shall not be buried. M.S. pipe sleeve shall be fixed at a place where a pipe is passing through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and to allow freedom for expansion/contraction and the movements/maintenance. In case the pipe is embedded in walls or floors it should be painted with anti-corrosive Bitumastic paint of approved quality. The pipe should not come in contact with lime mortar or lime concrete as the pipe is affected by lime. Under the floors the pipes shall be laid in layer of sand filling or as approved by the Employer's Representative. G.I. pipes with socket and spigot ends shall be provided with lead caulked joints wherever specified and the joints shall conform to the requirements of IS 3114.



of 173

The work of excavation and backfilling shall be done true to line and gradient in accordance with general Employer's requirements for earthworks in trenches for pipes laid underground. The pipes shall be laid on a layer of 10.0 cm sand and filled upto 15 cm above the pipes. A sand cushion of 15 cm on either side of the pipe shall also be provided. The remaining portion of the trench shall then be filled with excavated earth. The surplus earth shall be got rid of a directed. When excavation is done in rock the bottom shall be cut deep enough to permit the pies to be laid on a cushion of sand 75 mm minimum. The pipes and fittings after they are laid and jointed shall be subjected to hydrostatic pressure test as approved by the Employer's Representative and shall satisfactorily pass the test. Pipe line system shall be tested in sections as the work proceeds, keeping the joints exposed for inspection. Pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape. All draw off taps shall then be closed and water pressure gradually raised to test pressure. Care shall be taken to ensure that pressure gauge is accurate and preferably should have been recalibrated before the test. Pump used having been stopped, the section of the pipeline shall maintain the test pressure for at least half an hour. Any joints or pipes found leaking shall be removed and replaced by the Tenderer. The GI pipe line shall be cut to the required length at the position where the meter and stop cock are required to be fixed. The ends of the pipes shall be threaded. The meter arid stop cock shall be fixed in position by means, of connecting pipe, G1 nuts, sockets, etc. The stop cock shall be fixed near the inlet of the water meter. The paper disc inserted in the ripples of the meter shall be removed and meter installed exactly horizontally or vertically and with the arrow cast on the body of the meter pointing in the direction of flow. Care shall be taken that the factory seal of the meter is not disturbed. Whenever the meter is to be fixed to a newly fitted pipeline, the pipeline will have to be completely washed before fixing the meter. For this purpose, a connecting piece of pipe equal to the length of the meter is to he fixed on the new pipe line. The water shall he allowed to flow completely to wash the pipeline and then the meter installed as described above by replacing the connecting piece. Stoneware pipes and fittings for Sewerage. All pipes with spigot and socket ends shall conform to IS 651/3006 and shall be of grade' A'. These shall be sound, free from visible defects such as fine cracks or hair cracks. The glaze of the pipes shall be free form crazing. The pipes shall give a sharp clear note when struck with a light hammer. The following information shall be clearly marked on each pipe and fitting:

a. Internal diameter; c. Grade; c. Date of manufacture; d. Name of manufacturer or his registered trade-mark or both

All pipes and fittings shall have ISI mark. Jointing of GSW pipes and fittings shall be done as per the requirements of the following Employer's Requirements and the relevant IS. After jointing, extraneous material if any, shall be removed from the inside of the pipes and fittings and the newly made joints shall be thoroughly cured. In case, rubber sealing rings are used for jointing, these shall conform to IS:5382. Spigot and Socket Joint (Cement Joint) The spigot of each pipe shall be slipped home well into the socket of the pipe previously laid and adjusted in the correct position. In each joint, spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry or tarred gasket shall be passed around the joint and inserted in it by means of a caulking tool. More skeins of yarn or gasket shall be aided if necessary and shall be well caulked. Yarn or gasket so rammed shall not occupy more than one fourth of the depth of socket.



of 173

Cement mortar (I : I) shall be slightly moistened and carefully inserted by hand into the remaining space of the joint after caulking of yarn or gasket. The mortar shall than be caulked into the joint with a caulking tool. More cement mortar shall be added until the space of joint has been completely filled with tightly caulked mortar. The joint shall then be finished of neatly outside the socket at an angle of 45 degrees. Cement mortar joints shall be cured at least for seven days before testing. The approximate quantity of cement required for each joint for certain common sizes of pipes are given below for guidance:

Nominal Diameter of Pipe (mm) Cement (kg) 15 1.5 200 2.0 250 2.5 300 3.25 350 4.5 400 5.5 450 6.5

Cleaning of Pipes As soon as stretch of GSW pipes has been laid complete from manhole to manhole or for a length as approved by the Employer's Representative, the Tenderer shall run through the pipes both backward and forward a double disc or solid or closed cylinder 50 mm less in diameter than the internal diameter of pipes. The open end of an incomplete stretch of pipeline shall be securely closed as approved by the Employer's Representative to prevent entry of mud or silt etc. If as a result of the removal of any obstruction, the Employer's Representative considers that damages may have been caused to the pipe lines, he shall be entitled to order the length to be tested immediately. Should such test prove unsatisfactory the Tenderer shall repair the pipeline and carry out such further tests as are required by the Employer's Representative. It shall also be ascertained by the Tenderer that each length from manhole to manhole or the length as approved by the Employer's Representative is absolutely clear and without any obstruction by means of visual examination of the interior of the pipeline suitably illuminated by projected sunlight or otherwise. After laying and jointing or GSW pipes is completed the pipe line shall be tested as per the following Employer's Requirements and as approved by the Employer’s Representative. All equipment for testing at work site shall be supplied and erected by the Tenderer. Water for testing of pipeline shall be arranged by him. Damage during testing shall be the Tenderer’s responsibility and shall be rectified by him to the full satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative. Water used for test shall be removed from pipes and not released to the excavated trenches. After the joints have thoroughly set and have been checked by the Employer's Representative and before backfilling the trenches, the entire section of the sewer or storm water drain shall be proved by the Tenderer to be water tight. Before commencing the hydraulic test, the pipelines shall be filled with water and maintained full for 24 hours by adding water, if, necessary, under a head of 0.6 m of water. The test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the low end of the drain and the ends of connections, if any, and filling the system with water. A knuckle bend shall be temporarily jointed at the top end and a sufficient length of vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the required test head; or the top end may be plugged with a connection to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the required head is obtained and fixed suitably for observation. The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least 2.5 m head of water at the highest point of the section under test. The tolerance of two litres per centimeter of diameter per kilometer may be allowed during a period of 10 minutes. Any



of 173

leakage including excessive sweating which causes a drop in the test water level will be visible and the defective part of the work should be removed and made good. If any damage is caused to the pipeline during the execution or work or while cleaning/testing the pipeline as specified. the Tenderer shall he held responsible for the same and shall replace the damaged pipeline and retest the same to the full satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative. Water for testing. of pipeline shall be arranged by the Tenderer. Stop Cock and Bib Cock A bibcock (bib tap) is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlet and free outlet and stopcock (stop tap) is a valve with a suitable means of connections for insertion in a pipeline for controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and shall be of the screw down type. The closing device should work by means of a disc carrying a renewable non-metallic washer, which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right angles to the axis of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be either crutch or butterfly type securely fixed to the spindle. The cocks shall open in anti-clockwise direction. When the bib cocks and stop cocks are required to be chromium plated, the chromium plating shall be of service Grade No.2 conforming to IS 1068 in finish and appearance, the plated articles shall be free from plating defects such as blisters, pits, roughness and shall not be stained or discoloured. These fittings shall be of brass heavy class, chromium plated (C.P.) and of approved manufacture and pattern with screwed of flanged ends as specified. The fittings shall in all respects comply with the requirements of IS :781. The standard size of brass fittings shall be designated by the nominal bore of the pipe to which the fittings are attached. A sample of each kind of fitting shall be approved by the Employer’s Representative and all supplies made according to the approved samples. All cast fittings shall be sound and free from laps, blow holes and fillings both internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand etc. Burning, plugging stopping or patching of the casting shall not be permitted. The bodies, bonnets, spindles and other parts shall be truly machined and when assembled the parts shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished. The area of the water way of the fittings shall not be less than the area of the nominal bore. The fittings shall be fully examined and cleared of all foreign matter before being fixed. The fittings shall be fitted in the pipeline in a workman like manner. The joints between fittings and pipes shall be made leak-proof. The joints and fitting shall be leak proof when subjected to a pressure test approved by the Employer's Representative and the defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone. Soak Pit Soak pit shall be constructed at the location specified by the Employer's Representative. Earthwork excavation shall be carried out to the exact dimensions. Brick masonry lining with open joints shall be constructed in. the pit upto 150 mm below the outlet pipeline. Brick in cement mortar 1:6 shall be constructed above this level upto ground. Well burnt brick aggregates of nominal size 40 mm to 80 mm and coarse sand shall be filled within the chamber. Construction of pit lining and filling of the brick ballast shall progress simultaneously. Refer Drawing for details Manholes: Shall be constructed as per standard CPWD specifications PVC encapsulated foot rests Use of only PVC encapsulated foot rests as per item of DSR 2007 is permitted. Frame and Covers



of 173

Frame and covers for manholes shall be of required type and dimensions as per the relevant drawings prepared by the Tenderer. The following information shall be clearly marked on each cover. Year of Manufacture, Identification mark of the purchaser, Sewers/ SWD, Arrow showing direction of flow Fibre Reinforced Concrete Frame and Cover Fiber reinforced concrete frame and cover shall be capable of withstanding load of 35 tones. The frame shall be fixed in cement concrete of M 15 grade all around and finished with neat cement. The fiber reinforced frame shall have clear opening of 560 mm diameter and weighing 102 kg. The cover shall have a minimum thickness of 100 mm and weighting 78 kg. The fibers shall constitute 1 % of the weight of the concrete in the form of 50 mm to 100 mm long high tensile steel wires. For the cover, MS sheet lapping of 18 gauge shall be provided to avoid damage to the edges. Similarly, for frame, MS angle/flat shall be provided along the edge. Both MS sheet and angle shall be painted with black bituminous paint. The cover should have suitable lifting arrangement. The fiber reinforced frame and cover shall be manufactured as approved. Miscellaneous If any damage is caused to the other services such as water supply pipeline, sewer, cable, etc. during the construction of manholes and erection or vent shafts, the Tenderer shall be held responsible for the same and shall replace the damaged services to the full satisfaction of the Employer's Representative. The interior of manholes shall be cleared of all debris after construction and before testing the same for water tightness by the Tenderer. Wash Basins a. Wash basins shall be of white glazed earthenware, white glazed vitreous china or white glazed

fire clay as approved by the Employer's Representative and conforming to IS. 2556. Type Size Flat Back 630 x 450 mm

b. Wash basins shall be of one-piece construction, including a combined overflow. All internal angles shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. Each shall have rim sloping inside towards the bowl on all sides except skirting at the back. Basins shall be provided with single or double tap holes as approved. The tap holes shall be square. A suitable tap hole button shall be supplied if one tap hole is not required in installation. Each basin shall have a circular waste hole to which the interior of basin shall drain. The waste hole shall be either rebated or beveled internally with diameter of 65 mm at top and a depth of 10 mm to suit a waste plug having 64 mm diameter. Each basin shall be provided with a nonferrous 32 mm waste fittings. Stud slots to receive the brackets on the underside of the wash basins shall be suitable for a bracket with stud not exceeding 13 mm diameter, 5 mm high and 305 mm from the back of basin to the center of the stud. The stud slots shall be of depth sufficient to take 5 mm stud. Every basin shall have an integral soap holder recess or recesses which shall fully drain into the bowl. The position of the chain stay-hole shall not be lower than the overflow slot. A slot type of overflow having an area of not less than 5 sq. cm shall be provided and shall be so designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow.

a. All the waste fittings shall be chromium plated, Bottle trap shall conform to IS. 5434. The chromium plating shall be of service grade No.2 conforming to IS. 1068.

The Sinks.



of 173

The sinks shall be of white glazed earthenware, white glazed vitreous china or white glazed fire clay as approved by the Employer's Representative conforming to IS. 2556 (Part V) and shall be of the following sizes.

450 x 300 x 150 MM. 600 x 450 x 200 MM.

They shall be of one-piece construction, including a combined overflow. The floor of the sink shall gently slope towards the outlet. The outlet shall in all cases be suitable for waste fitting having flange of 65 mm. diameter and the waste hole shall have a minimum diameter of 40 mm at the bottom to suit the waste fittings. The waste hole shall be either rebated or beveled having a depth of 10 mm. Each sink shall be provided with a non-ferrous 40 mm dia. waste fitting. The sink shall have overflow of the weir type and the inverts shall be 30 mm below the top edge. The waste fittings and plug fittings shall be chromium plated. The chromium plating shall be of service grade No.2 conforming to IS. 1068. ANY OTHER SPECIFICATIONS Any specifications not covered under this chapter or given elsewhere in this document and required due to modifications or change shall be as per the relevant codes and duly approved by the architect well in advance. In case a newer specification/ code is available, it shall supersede the specifications given herein with the due approval of the architect, client and concerned consultants. The Tenderer for any reason requires clarification or requires approval for design, drawing or any other issue shall submit their request in writing at least two weeks in advance.

Employer TENDERER Date: Date: Place: Place:



of 173

PREAMBLES TO WORK SECTIONS UNDER BILL OF QUANTITIES GENERAL These preambles set out the amplification to methods of measurement together with factors to be considered when pricing the Bill of Quantities. They apply to the whole of the works regardless of the headings under which they have been described. The descriptions stated in the Bill of Quantities are not comprehensive. Reference should be made to the 'Specification of Materials and Execution' for details of types of materials and quality of workmanship; General Conditions and Special conditions affecting the whole of the Works; and to these preambles for pricing factors. The Tenderer's rates shall be deemed to have allowed for compliance with the above-mentioned documents. EXCAVATION & EARTHWORK

a) Excavation either straight, inclined or curved in trenches, footings etc. including marking out, cutting and dressing sides and bottom to true dimensions and depositing excavated stuff beyond three meters clear of the edge of trench or mass excavations for basements or anywhere within the site as directed.

b) Clearing all shrubs, roots, rank vegetation and trees upto 300mm girth from alignment of the buildings

c) Bailing out, pumping out or otherwise removing all water, which may accumulate in the excavation from any source whatsoever.

d) All labour and material required for fencing in and protection against risk of accident to open excavation etc. with necessary shoring, planking and strutting and for providing gangways with hand rails across open trenches etc. where necessary during the progress of the work.

e) Watching and lighting arrangements and its maintenance wherever necessary whether ordered by the architects or otherwise

f) Filling back available excavated earth and or good earth brought from outside in plinth, sides of foundations, sides of basements, under floors and for ground formation etc. as and where required in 150mm thick layers, ramming, watering, consolidation, dressing the filled-up area, disposal of all surplus unserviceable soil when directed to Tenderers own dump unless otherwise specified.

g) Battering, benching, forming steps in the sides of foundations and mass excavations where required and removal of slips and falls

CONCRETING

a) Making all drips, groves and moulds, curved surfaces and chamfered edges etc in concrete and /or plaster work as directed

b) Forming all expansion and/or construction joints in RCC as directed c) All projections, toothings, ornamental work etc. and finishing to shape as directed d) Embedding all electric pipes, boxes, fan hooks, false ceiling suspensions and inserts of any

description etc. in RCC slabs, beam, walls as directed. e) Installing a calibrated cube testing machine at site, getting it calibrated every month and

submitting test reports to architects f) Preparing test cubes, testing them at site and/or getting tested in an approved laboratory and

any fees, costs etc relating to them. g) Working up or hacking of concrete surface for providing keys for further concrete work including

applying thick cement slurry or mortar as directed.



of 173

h) Exposed architectural or ordinary centering, shuttering, and form work, strutting, boxing, propping etc. except wherever specified to exclude in the item. Shuttering to be made water tight with film coated plywood lined timber

i) Use of shuttering oil as specified j) Use of cement slurry over shuttering before commencing concreting k) Machine mixing of all concretes and hoisting to all lifts, carrying to all leads, consolidating by

rodding, vibrating, tamping and curing. l) Sinking of floors in specified areas m) Providing dowel bars wherever necessary. Cost of bars to be paid as reinforcement. n) Forming cutouts, openings and concreting at a later stage as required. o) Maintaining of Pour Cards showing approval of architects to concrete various components of

RCC frame p) Work in narrow widths, small quantities and curved alignments etc.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

a) Removing rust, mill scales, oil, grease, paint etc. b) Wastage due to cutting bars to required length c) 18guage annealed binding wire d) Providing cover to steel with cement concrete briquette spacers e) Calculation of steel as per Indian Standard Section weights actually placed in position as per

design and drawing or as directed f) No allowance shall be made for rolling margins

BRICK AND STONE WORK

a) Work in English bond or any other bond or design as directed by the architects b) Work in square, round and rectangular pillars, flower troughs, under floor drains, making curved

and tapered surface steps etc. c) Forming openings, chases and groves etc. d) Embedding conduits, boxes, other fixtures of any descriptions, hold fasts for doors and

windows, glazing etc. No deductions shall be made of cavities so formed. e) Making all drip courses, projected courses of any description, offsets, setbacks, corbels,

architraves or any other feature of any description f) Raking out joints for plastering or pointing or finishing joints flush as directed. g) Bonding with RCC work h) Work in narrow widths, small quantities i) Overlapping reinforcement and embedding reinforcement in adjoining walls in case of half brick

masonry walls j) Supply moulds, taking briquettes, getting tested and any fee, cost etc. relating to the same.

WATER PROOFING a) Water proofing chemical / membrane used in the works shall be of known approved make b) Preparation of surfaces required to receive water proofing felts by plastering with cement mortar

1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand) of sufficient thickness. c) Cutting chases in wall, tucking in felt and filling chases with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement:

2 coarse sand: 4 hard stone aggregate 12.5 mm nominal size). d) The water proofed roof shall be tested with 15 cms. Standing water for 7 days. e) Providing required slope as directed. f) A guarantee for 10 years against any defects. g) The work shall be carried out through a specialized agency approved by architects.

MISCELLANEOUS

a) Anti-termite treatment shall be got done through a specialized sub. Tenderer approved by the Architects.



of 173

b) The Tenderer shall guarantee against termite for a period of 10 years. FLOORING AND FINISHING:

a) Cleaning and final preparation of base, sub grade or subfloor by trimming slight undulation etc. including applying beat cement slurry.

b) Use and waste of all temporary fillets, side forms, templates, moulds, straight edges. c) Laying floors to required slope in any size and shape of panels made either by wooden side

forms or strips of any description. The strips shall not be paid for separately. d) Making all constructing and expansion joints. e) Making ‘V’ grooves of any pattern in plaster and dados including rounding of junctions with

floors. f) Skirting and dados of any height to be measured in square meter. g) Raking out joints, cleaning the surface, application of cement slurry and providing and fixing of

300 mm wide 24-gauge chicken mesh tightly secured at the junction of brickwork and RCC work before applying plaster skirting and Dado treatment.

h) Stone for floors, treads and risers of steps, skirting, wall cladding etc. shall be machine cut of sizes as per approved samples.

i) Cutting holes in marble and stone for treads of steps for fixing staircase railing balustrades. j) Work in patches, narrow widths, small quantities, curved surfaces, projected bands, setbacks,

offsets, corbels, architraves etc. k) Repairing and finishing the junctions of skirting and dados with plaster. l) Finishing the edges of electric fittings and boxes etc. m) Use of scaffolding, cradles, etc., dust sheets and other coverings for the protection of fixtures,

fittings furniture, floors etc. n) Cleaning paint splashes, drops or dirt, glasses joinery, electric fittings, wiring etc., including

washing the floors and leaving the premises neat and clean.



of 173

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES Item Makes

Cement Ultratech, Birla, Gujrat Ambuja, (all OPC 43 grade for structure)

Steel Tata Tiscon, Sail (Both FE500)

Glass Modi, St.Gobain

Flush Door Shutters Jyotiply, Duro, Merino, Century

Aluminium Sections Jindal, Hindalco

Ceramic Tiles Kajaria, NITCO, Somany

Paint Asian Paint, Berger, Jenson & Nicholson, Dulux

Cement Paint Acrocem, Snowcem

Vitrous China Sanitary Ware Parryware, Hindware

Stainless Steel Sink Jaina / Neelkanth

CP Fittings ESS ESS/Parryware

Sand Cast Iron Soil Waste & Vent Pipe and Fitting

RIF / Neco

Stoneware pipe and gully trap ISI Mark (IS: 651-1980)

Water Tanks 3 Layer white Sintex / Euro / Sheetal

U-Pvc water Pipes Supreme, Jain Pipes, Captain Pipes, Jindal, Ori-Plast

HDPE Pipes Apollo, Supreme, Jain

Electro Fusion Fittings Apollo, Supreme, Kimplas,

Sluice Valve Indian valves

G.I water supply pipes Tata, Jindal

RCC Pipes Hindustan Hume pipe ISI Mark (IS: 458-1971)

C.I. Manholes Cover and frames

Neco

Air Valve Indian Valve

PVC water stopper Supreme

Aluminium Extruded section Hindal co./Jindal

Aluminium composite panels Alucobond / Rweynobond /Alucomat

Stainless steel door fittings Godrej/Dorset

Door closer Godrej/Dorset

Hard ware Godrej/Dorset

Patch fittings Godrej/Dorset

Water proofing compound Dr.fixit/ Fosroc

Anti Termite Pest Control of India

Galvalume sheet TATA/Interarch/Jindal

Prelaminated board Merino / Duro / Century

Concrete Additives & Hardners Fosroc / Pidilite, CICO

Fire Check door Global Fire protection co, Radient, Godrej

Laminates Century, Merino, Greenlam

Silicon sealant Down Corning, Alstone

Fasteners HILTI, Fischer

Rolling Shutter Rama, Prakash or equivalent

MCB Distribution Boards L&T (Hager) /GE/MDS/DATAR/Group Schneider

Miniature Circuit Breaker L&T (Hager) /GE/MDS/DATAR/Group Schneider

ELCB L&T/GE/MDS/DATAR

Terminals Elmex or equal

PVC insulated FRLS Copper Wires

Finolex / Skyline/R R Kabel

LT Cables (Power & Control) CCI/ /Skytone/Polycab / KEI



of 173

HT XLPE Cables Skytone / Polycab/KEI

Cable Glands Dowells / Gripwell / Comet

Bi-metalic Crimping Type Lugs Dowells / Ismal

Indicating Lamps L&T/ Siemens

Transformer Crompton / ABB/Siemens/Kirloskar

HT Joining Kits Raychem / Mahindra /Denson/ Cabseal

Power Capacitors Crompton / Siemens

VCB/RMU Crompton / ABB/Siemens

PVC Conduits & accessories Polypack/AKG/BEC

MS Conduit and Accessories B.E.C, AKG

Telephone/TV Cables Delton / Skyline

Switches, Sockets, Plugs etc Anchor Roma / Crabtree / L&T

Industrial sockets in sheet steel enclosure with MCB

Siemens/MDS/Crompton/BCH

Ceiling Fans GEC\CGL\USHA\POLAR

Exhaust Fans GEC\CGL/USHA\POLAR

Tagblock with Boxes Krone (Germany)/ITD

Data Cables Avaya/AMP

Lighting Fixtures Wipro/Philips/POLAR/OSRAM/HAVELLS/Crompton

Centrifugal Pumps Kirloskar, Grundfos, Pratt&Matter

Electric Motors ABB, Crompton, Kirloskar

Diesel Engine Kirloskar, Cummins

Automatic Start Stop Panel for D.E.

As per CPRI approved

MS Pipe line Tata, Jindal

Pressure gauge H.Guru

Water Level Indicator Salmnos, Dp Holland

Ball valve Leader, Zoloto

Butterfly Valve Sant / Advance / Zoloto / Kartar

Check Valve Sant / Advance / Zoloto / Kartar

Landing Valve Sant / Advance / Zoloto / Super XE/Padmini

Hose Reel Drum Newage, Padmini, Kasarplast, Super XE

Hose Reel Cotton Minimax / Newage

Rubber Pipe for drum Minimax / Newage

Coupling and Nozzle Minimax / Newage

Fire Axe Alert

Hose Reel Cabinet Minimax / Newage

Automatic Alarm Gong HD

Sprinkler Tyco

Signages Autoglo / Glolite

Hydrant Valves Newage

Pressure Switch Indfoss, Switzer

Starter, Switches L & T, Siemens

Wrapping & Coating IWL /Pypokote

Notes

1. The Tenderer shall produce all samples before procurement of the materials, for seeking approval of the Project Engineer / Architect and the Employer

2. Where more than one manufacturer is listed, the Tenderer shall quote the rates of various items of work after ascertaining the availability, timely delivery schedule of the same

3. In respect of materials for which approved makes are not specified above, those shall be decided by the Project Engineer / Architect and the Employer.

construction of school building at lotus petal charitable ...

Documents

Transcript of construction of school building at lotus petal charitable ...